April 18, 2018 board meeting packet

Regular Meeting of the Capitol Region Watershed District (CRWD) Board of Managers, for Wednesday, April 18, 2018 6:00 p.m. at the office of the CRWD, 1410 Energy Park Drive, Suite 4, St. Paul, Minnesota.

REGULAR MEETING AGENDA Materials Enclosed

I.

Call to Order of Regular Meeting (President Joe Collins) A) Attendance B) Review, Amendments, and Approval of the Agenda

II.

Public Comment – For Items not on the Agenda (Please observe a limit of three minutes per person.)

III.

Permit Applications and Program Updates (Permit Process: 1) Staff Review/Recommendation, 2) Applicant Response, 3) Public Comment, and 4) Board Discussion and Action.)

A) B)

Permit 14-005 Hazelden Redevelopment – Closure (Hosch) Permit 18-007 Woodlawn Jefferson (Hosch)

IV.

Special Reports – McCarrons AIS Plan Update, Joe Sellner

V.

Action Items A) AR: Approve Minutes of the April 4, 2018 Regular and Workshop Meetings (Sylvander) B) AR: Approve Accounts Payable/Receivables for March 2018 (Sylvander) C) AR: Approve Monetary Limits of Municipal Tort Liability (Doneux) D) AR: Approve 2017 CRWD Annual Report (Bromelkamp) E) AR: Approve 2018 Quality Assurance Program Plan (Belden) F) AR: Approve Professional Services Agreement with Limnotech for Como Lake Management Plan (Fossum) G) AR: Approve Contract Amendment with Barr Engineering for Office Remediation (Kelley) H) AR: Approve Professional Services Agreement for TBI Easement Acquisition Project (Eleria)

VI.

Unfinished Business A) Building Update (Doneux) B) Snelling Midway Update (Eleria)

VII.

General Information A) Board of Manager’s Updates B) 2017 Administrator’s Update

VIII. Next Meetings A) Wednesday, May 2, 2018 Regular Board Meeting B) Wednesday, May 9, 2018 CAC Meeting IX.

Adjournment Our mission is to protect, manage and improve the water resources of Capitol Region Watershed District

April 18, 2018 III. Permit Applications A. Permit Close Out (Hosch)

DATE: TO: FROM: RE:

April 9, 2018 CRWD Board of Managers Elizabeth Hosch Permit Closeout

Background Construction activity is complete for permit #14-005, Hazelden Redevelopment.

Issues Hazelden Redevelopment #14-005 This permit was issued for demolition/reconstruction on the Hazelden campus at Stewart and Drake in St. Paul. Stormwater treatment was met through construction of one surface filtration basin and one surface infiltration basin that have been confirmed functional. The project is complete and the site is stable. $13,900 surety is available to return.

Action Requested Approve $13,900 surety return and Certificate of Completion for permit #14-005, Hazelden Redevelopment.

W:\07 Programs\Permitting\Board Memos\2018-04-18 Permit Closeout Board Memo.docx

Our Mission is to protect, manage and improve the water resources of Capitol Region Watershed District.

Capitol Region Watershed District

Applicant:

Permit 18-007 Woodlawn Jefferson

Barbara Mundahl St. Paul Public Works 25 West Fourth Street (CHA 900) St. Paul, MN 55102

Consultant:

Description: Street reconstruction Stormwater Management: SAFL baffle and volume bank debit.

District Rule: —C, D, F Disturbed Area: 3.2 Acres Impervious Area: 3.2 Acres

STAFF RECOMMENDATION: Approve with 2 Conditions: 1. Provide plans signed by a professional engineer per the Minnesota Board of AELSLAGID. 2. Provide a copy of the NPDES permit.

Volume Bank Recommendation: Approve Withdrawal of 12,961 cf of Volume Reduction Credits from the City of St. Paul Public Works Bank.

First Street Second Ave

Permit Location Aerial Photo Permit Report 18-007

Board Meeting Date: 04/18/2018

Capitol Region Watershed District Permit Report

CRWD Permit #:

Review date:

Project Name:

Applicant:

Purpose:

Location:

18‐007 April 6, 2018 Woodlawn Jefferson Barb Mundahl City of Saint Paul Public Works 25 West Fourth Street Saint Paul, MN 55102 651‐266‐6112 Street reconstruction. Stormwater management includes a SAFL baffle.

Jefferson from Cretin to Mississippi River Blvd, Woodlawn and Mt. Curve from Jefferson to Randolph, Edgecumbe from Field to Wordsworth.

Applicable Rules: C, D, and F

Permit Recommendation: Approve with 2 Conditions

Volume Bank Recommendation: Approve withdrawal of 12,961 cf of Volume Reduction Credits from the City of St. Paul Public Works Bank.

EXHIBITS:

1. Civil Plans (24 Sheets), by City of St. Paul Department of Public Works, dated 3/1/18, rcvd. 3/12/18.

2. Watershed Permit Submittal, by City of St. Paul Department of Public Works, dated 2/16/18, rcvd. 3/12/18.

3. Drainage Map, by City of St. Paul Department of Public Works, not dated, rcvd. 3/12/18.

4. Geotechnical Exploration and Review, by American Engineering Testing, Inc., dated 8/9/17, rcvd. 3/12/18.

5. Additional SAFL baffle exploration by City of St. Paul Department of Public Works via email dated 4/3/18.

HISTORY & CONSIDERATIONS:

Street reconstruct borders the Cleveland Randolph Groundwater Study.

RULE C: STORMWATER MANAGEMENT

W:\07 Programs\Permitting\2018\18-007 Woodlawn Jefferson\18-007 Woodlawn-Jefferson Permit Report_R3.doc Page 1 of 4

Standards  Proposed discharge rates for the 2‐, 10‐, and 100‐year events shall not exceed existing rates.  Developments and redevelopments must reduce runoff volumes in the amount equivalent to an inch of runoff from the impervious areas of the site.  Stormwater must be pretreated before discharging to infiltration areas to maintain the long‐term viability of the infiltration area.  Developments and redevelopments must incorporate effective non‐point source pollution reduction BMPs to achieve 90% total suspended solid removal.

Findings 1. A hydrograph method based on sound hydrologic theory is not used to analyze runoff for the design or analysis of flows and water levels.

2. Runoff rates for the proposed activity do not exceed existing runoff rates for the 2‐, 10‐, and 100‐year critical storm events. Stormwater leaving the project area is discharged into a well‐defined receiving channel or pipe and routed to a public drainage system.

3. Stormwater runoff volume retention is not achieved onsite in the amount equivalent to the runoff generated from 1.1‐inch of rainfall over the impervious surfaces of the development. a. The amount of proposed impervious is 141,388 square feet. b. Volume retention required: 141,388 ft2 x 1.1 inches x 1 ft/12 inches = 12,961 ft3

Table 1. Proposed volume retention through abstraction (i.e. infiltration, reuse).

Volume Volume Retention 1.1‐inch 2‐inch Retention BMP Provided below Runoff Runoff Required outlet (cu. ft.) (cu. ft.) (cu. ft.) (cu. ft.)

12,961 Volume credit withdrawal has been requested

4. Alternative compliance has been requested due to poor soils and high groundwater. a. The applicant did not partially comply with the volume retention standard. b. The applicant did comply with the volume retention standard through the use of qualified banking credits. c. The applicant has not submitted money to be contributed to the Stormwater Impact Fund. d. The project is linear, but the cost cap has not been reached.

5. Best management practices do not achieve 90% total suspended solids removal from the runoff generated an annual basis. The project proposes a SAFL baffle for gross pollutant removal that is in line with site limitation,s including existing utilities, groundwater levels, flow rates, and historic flooding concerns.

6. A memorandum of agreement for maintenance of stormwater facilities exists between the City of St. Paul and the CRWD. Adequate maintenance access is provided for the SAFL baffle.

RULE D: FLOOD CONTROL

W:\07 Programs\Permitting\2018\18-007 Woodlawn Jefferson\18-007 Woodlawn-Jefferson Permit Report_R3.doc Page 2 of 4

Standards  Compensatory storage shall be provided for fill placed within the 100‐year floodplain.  All habitable buildings, roads, and parking structures on or adjacent to a project site shall comply with District freeboard requirements.

Findings 1. There is no floodplain on the property according to FEMA. 2. It is unknown if all habitable buildings, roads, and parking structures on or adjacent to the project site comply with CRWD freeboard requirements. However, adequate conveyance has been provided to prevent flooding.

RULE E: WETLAND MANAGEMENT

Standard  Wetlands shall not be drained, filled (wholly or in part), excavated, or have sustaining hydrology impacted such that there will be a decrease in the inherent (existing) functions and values of the wetland.  A minimum buffer of 25 feet of permanent nonimpacted vegetative ground cover abutting and surrounding a wetland is required.

Findings 1. There are no known wetlands located on the property.

RULE F: EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Standards  A plan shall demonstrate that appropriate erosion and sediment control measures protect downstream water bodies from the effects of a land‐disturbing activity.  Erosion Control Plans must adhere to the MPCA Protecting Water Quality in Urban Areas Manual.

Findings 1. Erosion and sediment control measures are consistent with best management practices, as demonstrated in the MPCA manual Protecting Water Quality in Urban Areas.

2. Adjacent properties are protected from sediment transport/deposition.

3. Wetlands, waterbodies and water conveyance systems are protected from erosion/sediment transport/deposition.

4. Disturbed area is greater than 1 acre; an NPDES permit is required. A SWPPP has been submitted and is sufficient.

RULE G: ILLICIT DISCHARGE AND CONNECTION Standard  Stormwater management and utility plans shall indicate all existing and proposed connections from developed and undeveloped lands for all water that drains to the District MS4.

Findings 1. New direct connections or replacement of existing connections are not proposed.

W:\07 Programs\Permitting\2018\18-007 Woodlawn Jefferson\18-007 Woodlawn-Jefferson Permit Report_R3.doc Page 3 of 4

2. Prohibited discharges are not proposed.

Permit Recommendation: Approve with 2 Conditions Conditions: 1. Provide plans signed by a professional engineer per the Minnesota Board of AELSLAGID. 2. Provide a copy of the NPDES permit.

Volume Bank Recommendation:

Approve withdrawal of 12,961 cf of Volume Reduction Credits from the City of St. Paul Public Works Bank.

W:\07 Programs\Permitting\2018\18-007 Woodlawn Jefferson\18-007 Woodlawn-Jefferson Permit Report_R3.doc Page 4 of 4

4/12/2018 Account: Transaction Requested Deposit Withdrawal Withdrawal Deposit Withdrawal Withdrawal Deposit Withdrawal Deposit Withdrawal Deposit Withdrawal 3/16/2010 Withdrawal 4/14/2010 Deposit 5/26/2010 Withdrawal 2/2/2011 Deposit 2/25/2011 Withdrawal 2/25/2011 Withdrawal 2/25/2011 Deposit 9/7/2011 Transfer 10/14/2011 Deposit 11/16/2011 Deposit 1/4/2012 Withdrawal 1/4/2012 Deposit 5/2/2012 Deposit 9/19/2012 Withdrawal 12/19/2012 Withdrawal 2/6/2013 Withdrawal 2/6/2013 Deposit 5/15/2013 Withdrawal 7/10/2013 Withdrawal 9/18/2013 Deposit 2/19/2014 Withdrawal 3/5/2014 Withdrawal 3/19/2014 Withdrawal 9/3/2014 Withdrawal 2/4/2015 Withdrawal 3/11/2015 Withdrawal 4/1/2015 Permit withdrawn Withdrawal 5/20/2015 Withdrawal 7/22/2015 Withdrawal 2/22/2016 Withdrawal 1/18/2017 Withdrawal 4/19/2017 Deposit 8/2/2017 Withdrawal 4/18/2018

Volume Banking Credits Saint Paul Public Works Approved 4/4/2007 4/4/2007 1/22/2008 Pending 8/20/2008 8/20/2008 Pending 3/18/2009 Pending 6/3/2009 Pending 5/5/2010 5/19/2010 Pending 2/2/2011 Pending 4/20/2011 4/20/2011 Expired 11/16/2011 Pending 1/4/2012 Pending Pending Pending 12/19/2012 2/6/2013 2/6/2013 Pending 7/10/2013 9/18/2013 8/5/2015 3/5/2014 3/19/2004 9/3/2014 2/4/2015 4/1/2015 4/1/2015 6/3/2015 5/20/2015 7/22/2015 2/22/2016 1/18/2017 4/19/2017 Pending 4/18/2018

Permit NA 07-009 08-001 07-008 08-003 08-004 08-016 09-004 09-009 09-011 09-017 10-005 10-011 10-014 11-002 11-004 11-005 11-006 11-021 09-031 11-027 NA 11-030 12-004 12-018 12-029 13-001 13-002 13-014 13-021 13-018C 14-004 13-033 14-001 14-028 15-002 15-017 15-009 15-014 15-010 15-016 16-001 16-031 17-009 17-003 18-007

Project Deposit Withdrawal Balance (cf) Chatsworth-Goodrich 10,532 10,532 Davern 0 5,717 4,815 Selby Avenue 0 3,790 1,025 Hubbard-Griggs 9,386 10,411 Seventh-Bay 0 8,278 2,133 Ashland-Pascal 0 20,069 -17,936 Payne Avenue 2,576 -15,360 East Sixth Street 0 6,044 -21,404 Victoria Street 1,991 -19,413 Magnolia-Earl 0 18,356 -37,769 Knapp-Ramond 2,338 -35,431 Seventh-Douglas 0 17,462 -52,893 Davern-Jefferson 0 39,308 -92,201 Front-Victoria 14,791 -77,410 Fairview 18,034 -95,444 Blair-Griggs 5,935 -89,509 Howell-Goodrich (revised 15,238 to Zero) 0 -89,509 Davern-Jefferson II 25,611 -115,120 College Park (never built, cancelled) 0 -115,120 Wells and Russell 116,436 1,316 Hewitt-Tatum 4,067 5,383 St. Albans-Arundel Trenches 35,710 41,093 Prior-Goodrich 29,228 11,865 Wheelock Parkway Bridge 391 12,256 Hamline Library Pervious Alley 7,100 19,356 Arlington-Rice 28,035 -8,679 Hatch-Agate 22,137 -30,816 Hamline Avenue Bridge 6,697 -37,513 Trout Brook Nature Sanctuary 103,455 65,942 Jefferson-Griggs Bike Routes 5,881 60,061 Prince Street 7,303 52,758 Hampden Park 24,908 77,666 Fairview-Bohland 16,626 61,040 Montana-Greenbrier 11,091 49,949 Highland Village Streetscape 487 49,462 Raymond Ave Phase II 7,059 42,403 Kellogg Blvd bridge reconstruction 2,385 40,018 3rd Street 6,044 33,974 East 7th Streetscape 0 0 33,974 Como-Chatsworth 15,370 18,604 Franklin Avenue 6,628 11,976 University Avenue 14,164 -2,188 Como Avenue 8,914 -11,102 Jackson at University 6,271 -17,373 Como Park Senior High 19,120 0 1,747 Woodlawn-Jefferson 12,961 -11,214 358,736 369,950 -11,214

April 18, 2018 IV. Special Reports McCarrons AIS Plan Update (Sellner)

DATE: TO: FROM: RE:

April 6, 2018 CRWD Board of Managers Joe Sellner, Water Resource Technician McCarrons AIS Plan Update

Background In 2014 and 2015, the District participated in aquatic plant harvesting in Lake McCarrons. During the District’s work on harvesting aquatic plants, it became apparent that consideration of aquatic invasive species (AIS) is an important aspect of active management of all biota in the lake. On February 1, 2017 the Board of Managers authorized a consultant services agreement with Wenck Associates for the development of a Lake McCarrons AIS Plan.

Issues Aquatic invasive species continue to be a concern and potential threat to all lakes in CRWD. As the only lake with a public boat launch, Lake McCarrons is likely the most prone to introduction of aquatic invasive species. District staff have worked with Wenck Associates and District partners to develop a draft Lake McCarrons AIS plan (enclosed). Staff will review the draft plan with the Managers.

Table 1: McCarrons AIS Management Plan Timeline McCarrons AIS Plan Timeline Item Partner Meeting Update Draft Plan Board Presentation CAC Presentation Public Meeting ‐ Presentation and Comment Update Plan Based on Board/Public Comments Plan Review ‐ Internal Finalize Plan CRWD Board Adopt Plan

Week 1

April‐2018 Week 2 Week 3

Week 4

Week 1

May‐2018 Week 2 Week 3

Week 4

Week 1

June‐2018 Week 2 Week 3

Week 4

Fiscal Note: 2018 CRWD Budget Fund 310-15471: AIS Management Plan--$14,300 Requested Action: No action requested enc: Draft Lake McCarrons AIS plan from Wenck Associates, dated April 2018 (digital only) W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Board Memo AIS Plan 04-06-2018.docx

Our Mission is to protect, manage and improve the water resources of Capitol Region Watershed District.

Wenck File # 1486-0063 April 2018

Lake McCarrons Aquatic Invasive Species Management Plan

Prepared for:

Capitol Region Watershed District

1410 Energy Park Drive, Suite 4 St. Paul, MN 55108

Prepared by: Tom Langer WENCK 7500 Olson Memorial Hwy Suite 300 Golden Valley, MN 55427 Phone: 763-252-6800 Fax: 763-479-4242

Table of Contents 1.0

INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 1-1 1.1

2.0

Project Purpose ..................................................................... 1-1

CURRENT STATE OF LAKE MCCARRONS....................................................... 2-1 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4

Overview of Lake McCarrons ................................................... 2-1 Water Quality ....................................................................... 2-1 Biotic Communities ................................................................ 2-1 Summary of Current Conditions ............................................... 2-4

3.0

AIS MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORK ................................................................. 3-5

4.0

AIS MANAGEMENT ...................................................................................... 4-6 4.1 4.2 4.3

Established Populations......................................................... 4-6 Threatening Populations ......................................................... 4-8 Rapid Response to New Infestation .........................................4-13

5.0

COORDINATION.......................................................................................... 5-1

6.0

REFERENCES ............................................................................................... 6-1

November 2017 W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

i

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.) TABLES Table 2-1. Lake McCarrons averaged frequency of occurrence from annual sampling efforts and corresponding floristic quality index summary. .......................................... 2-3 Table 4-1. Infested Waters Species.......................................................................... 4-8 Table 4-2. Exposure risk index. ............................................................................... 4-9 Table 4-3. Habitat conditions index. ........................................................................4-10 Table 4-4. Similar species index. ............................................................................4-10 Table 5-1. AIS management framework tasks, responsible parties and timeframe. ......... 5-1 FIGURES Figure 2-1. Bathymetry of Lake McCarrons and main AIS vectors into the lake............... 2-1 Figure 2-2. Lake McCarrons historical annual average Secchi/TP/Chl-a comparison. Image copied (CRWD, 2016). ................................................................................. 2-1 Figure 2-3. Biotic community health continuum portrayed using submerged aquatic vegetation.................................................................................................. 2-2 Figure 2-4. Lake McCarrons total fish catch summaries by species or trophic guild.......... 2-4 Figure 3-1. AIS management framework for Lake McCarrons....................................... 3-5 Figure 4-1. Target habitats for AIS within Lake McCarrons. ......................................... 4-1 APPENDICES A B C

Vegetation Treatment Suitability Assessments Context to Risk Assessment

November 2017 W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

ii

1.0 Introduction 1.1

Project Purpose

Lake McCarrons is a 73-acre lake located in Roseville, Minnesota. Lake McCarrons is known to have established populations of three aquatic invasive species (AIS): Eurasian watermilfoil (Myriophyllum spicatum; EWM), curlyleaf pondweed (Potamogeton crispus; CLP) and common carp (Cyprinus carpio). As the only lake within the Capitol Region Watershed District (the District) with a public boat launch, Lake McCarrons is likely the most prone to further introduction of AIS as human boat traffic is a primary vector of AIS movement across the landscape. In 2014 and 2015 the District was involved with harvesting of aquatic plants (including AIS) for the sole purpose of increased recreation access. Through this involvement it became apparent to the District that consideration of AIS and their influence on Lake McCarrons should be an important aspect of active management on Lake McCarrons.

The District’s mission is to protect, manage and improve the water resources within the watershed. With growing concern of AIS within the state of Minnesota, the District identified a need to develop an AIS management plan for Lake McCarrons. The goal of this plan is to develop a framework to managing AIS that:    

Controls existing AIS populations within Lake McCarrons Prevents the introduction of new AIS into Lake McCarrons Includes current and unforeseen AIS Involves multiple stakeholder groups

Efforts to minimize the influence of AIS across the state are being researched with new techniques and methods being pursued, therefore this plan provides the current state of knowledge and is meant to be updated and complimented with new data and information as it becomes available. The sections of the plan include: 

Section 2.0 provides an overview of the current condition of Lake McCarrons, outlining the water quality and biological condition of Lake McCarrons. This section provides context to the importance of AIS management and protection initiatives for Lake McCarrons.



Section 3.0 outlines an AIS management framework developed specifically for this project. This section provides a general breakdown of the framework and how it will be used to manage AIS.



Section 4.0 discusses the evaluation and determination of appropriate actions for managing AIS populations pertaining to Lake McCarrons. This section follows the AIS management framework outlined in Section 3.0.

November 2017

1-1

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

2.0 Current State of Lake McCarrons Deep lakes of Minnesota persist across a continuum of water quality and biological health, from clear waters and highly diverse native biotic communities to turbid algal-dominated waters with little biotic diversity. A healthy lake ecosystem provides numerous ecosystem services from foraging, spawning and nursery habitats for fish, macroinvertebrates, and waterfowl, to the sequestering and recycling of nutrients, carbon, and pollutants, to various aesthetic and recreational opportunities. Water quality and biotic community conditions within the lake serve as surrogates to quantify the condition of these ecosystem services and the overall health of the lake. This section provides a general description of Lake McCarrons and the condition of water quality and biotic communities within the lake. Understanding the current health of Lake McCarrons provides context and value to restoration and protection initiatives.

2.1

Overview of Lake McCarrons

2.2

Water Quality

Lake McCarrons is a deep lake with sharp depth changes along the north and south shorelines, gradual depth changes along the east and west shorelines, and a deep open water area in the center of the basin (Figure 2-1). These bathymetric characteristics provide various habitat conditions across the basin. The western littoral (depth ≤ 15 ft.) area is comprised of soft sediments, heavy vegetation growth and a stream inlet. The eastern littoral area is comprised of harder sediments, limited vegetation growth, a public park, boat launch and fishing pier. The northern and southern littoral areas are comprised of residential landscape and a narrow band of aquatic vegetation growth. This diversity of habitats and substrate within the basin support various native species and, consequently, non-native AIS as well. Due to the lake’s diverse habitat, no single species is believed to be able to dominate the entire basin.

Water quality condition in Minnesota lakes is evaluated using three parameters: total phosphorus (TP), chlorophyll-a (Chl-a), and Secchi depth. TP is a limiting nutrient for algal growth in lakes, Chl-a correlates to algal biomass as it is the primary pigment in aquatic algae, and secchi depth is a physical measurement of water clarity. These parameters are interrelated and serve as proxies to describe water clarity and lake productivity, therefore, as nutrient and lake productivity increase we typically see an increase in TP and Chl-a concentrations and a decrease in Secchi depth and water clarity. The decrease in water clarity due to algal production equates to a decrease in light penetration through the water column causing a shading effect on the submerged aquatic vegetation (SAV) community.

SAV communities impacted by light limitation often have reduced species richness, a decreased vegetation coverage, biomass and maximum growing depth, and have growing conditions that favor turbid tolerant species. A loss in SAV also has cascading impacts up the food web to other communities (fish, invertebrates, waterfowl) within the lake.

November 2017

2-1

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

Figure 2-1. Bathymetry of Lake McCarrons and main AIS vectors into the lake.

November 2017

2-1

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

2.2.1 Lake McCarrons Water Quality Condition The water quality of Lake McCarrons has been a focus of monitoring since the late 1980s.

Early monitoring records documented elevated TP and Chl-a concentrations and poor Secchi depth suggesting a poor water quality condition. In response to impaired water quality conditions, the District pursued an aluminum sulfate treatment in 2004. Since 2004 the lake has significantly improved in water quality and no longer exceeds impairment threshold for Secchi, TP and Chl-a (Figure 2-2). Current water quality conditions of the lake are supportive of a healthy aquatic ecosystem.

Figure 2-2. Lake McCarrons historical annual average Secchi/TP/Chl-a comparison. Image copied (CRWD, 2016).

2.3

Biotic Communities

Biotic communities play an important role in maintaining water quality and ecosystem health. Healthy, native, and diverse vegetation, fish and invertebrate communities support greater ecosystem resilience to disturbances and promote water quality. AIS can diminish the services provided by a healthy ecosystem by displacing native organisms, altering food webs, and impairing recreational opportunities. However, drastic shifts in ecosystem functions do not always occur and AIS can coexist with native species below detrimental densities. The Minnesota Department of Natural Resources (MnDNR) has developed tools that utilize biotic community based information (AIS included) to monitor and evaluate the health of the lake ecosystems through an organism-disturbance framework. These tools provide a numeric score based on the community composition that can be compared to impairment thresholds to quantify lake health from a biotic perspective.

November 2017

2-1

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

2.3.1 Lake McCarrons Vegetation Community Condition Many people perceive SAV as “weeds” portraying a negative connotation to vegetation in lakes. While nuisance levels of AIS and other SAV can diminish lake health, understanding the importance of SAV as habitat, food, a nutrient recycler and a sediment stabilizer provides value to restoration and/or protection initiatives (Figure 2-3).

Figure 2-3. Biotic community health continuum portrayed using submerged aquatic vegetation.

The MnDNR’s Floristic Quality Index (FQI) is an assessment tool used to determine the biological health of the SAV community. The FQI utilizes species richness and the habitat specificity (C-score) of each species identified to score community health (Equation 1).

Scores are compared to a threshold for context and classification of biological impairment status. Greater scores typically are comprised of diverse native communities with decreased scores losing diversity and increasing monodominant communities to habitat patches void of species (Figure 2.3).

∗

Equation 1.

.

Point intercept surveys were conducted every summer month from 2014-2016 on Lake McCarrons. During a given survey year, 11-14 species of submerged and floating leaf species were observed within Lake McCarrons. The majority of the vegetation growth has been observed within the western littoral area of the lake and supported high occurrences of coontail and EWM. The vegetation community did not meet the biological impairment thresholds for FQI in 2014- 2016 and for species richness in 2014- 2015 (Table 2-1) suggesting impairment in aquatic life for vegetation within the lake.

Impaired FQI scores are the result of observing a reduced number of species and/or the current species observed having relatively low C-scores (common species). Lake McCarrons’ vegetation community would benefit from increased species richness and/or an increased presence of more habitat specific species. Impaired FQI scores are most often associated with external nutrient loading, internal nutrient loads, and/or other human disturbances (i.e. watershed disturbances, shoreline degradation, SAV treatments, AIS introductions) to the vegetation community. With recent improvements to the water clarity of Lake McCarrons, impaired vegetation communities are not believed to be the result of current water clarity conditions in the lake, therefore other factors are likely more limiting to the SAV community.

November 2017

2-2

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

Table 2-1. Lake McCarrons averaged frequency of occurrence from annual sampling efforts and corresponding floristic quality index summary.

FQI Score FQI Status Species Richness Species Richness Status Common Name Scientific Name Coontail Ceratophyllum demersum Muskgrass Chara sp.

Canada waterweed Elodea canadensis Lesser duckweed Lemna minor Eurasian watermilfoil Myriophyllum spicatum Slender naiad Najas flexilis White water lily Nymphaea odorata Sago Pondweed Potamogeton pectinata Large leaf pondweed Potomogeton amplifolius Curly‐leaf pondweed Potomogeton crispus Leafy pondweed Potomogeton foliosus Clasping pondweed Potomogeton richardsonii White‐water Crowfoot Ranunculus aquatilis Wild celery Valisneria americana Watermeal Wolffia spp

C‐Score 3 7 3 5 3 6 6 3 7 3 6 5 7 6 6

16.6 Impaired 11 Impaired 2014 49.8 9.8 1.7 ‐‐ 42.2 17.6 4.8 ‐‐ 3.3 1.7 4.9 6.3 ‐‐ 4.8 ‐‐

16.0 Impaired 11 Impaired 2015 44.7 ‐‐ 1.4 ‐‐ 69.9 17.1 7.9 ‐‐ 13.5 17.8 1.3 1.3 ‐‐ 5.4 1.3

18.2 Impaired 14 Supporting 2016 56.3 3.7 1.7 11.0 52.3 16.7 14.3 4.0 ‐‐ 4.0 12.7 8.0 4.3 10.3 6.3

*MnDNR deep lake impairment threshold for 2b Ecoregion FQI = 18.6, species richness = 12.

2.3.2 Lake McCarrons Fish Community Condition Indices of Biotic Integrity (IBIs) are currently being developed by the MnDNR to assess the health of fish communities in deep lakes throughout Minnesota. Lake McCarrons does not fit the minimum size requirement (>100 acres) to be considered an assessable lake with current IBIs. However, trap and gill net surveys have been conducted on the lake allowing inferential assessment of the fish community within the lake. A community comprised of many species from different trophic guilds is viewed as healthy and supporting of ecosystem services.

11 recorded trap and gill net surveys have been conducted on Lake McCarrons since the 1950s. Throughout these surveys a total 19 different species have been observed within the lake with swings in community balance (Figures 2-4). The most recent 2016 survey observed 11 species and a relatively balanced fishery between trophic guilds. A variety of total lengths were observed within these species classifications suggesting that multiple year classes also exist with the lake. Surveys observed a limited amount of benthivore species (i.e. carp, bullhead). These results suggest that the fishery on lake McCarrons is in relatively good condition.

November 2017

2-3

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

Figure 2-4. Lake McCarrons total fish catch summaries by species or trophic guild.

2.4

Summary of Current Conditions

Overall the current condition of water quality and biotic communities within Lake McCarrons suggest a relatively healthy ecosystem. Lake management activities should focus on protection and enhancement to continue promoting water quality and a healthy lake ecosystem.    

McCarrons provides various habitat conditions due to the lake bathymetry.

Overall water quality conditions within Lake McCarrons have improved significantly since the 2004 alum treatment.

McCarrons’ vegetation health is slightly below biological impairment thresholds due to lack of species and/or habitat specific species.

McCarrons’ fish community appears balanced with limited occurrence of undesirable species.

November 2017

2-4

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

3.0 AIS Management Framework A step-wise process and criteria based approach was developed in which AIS will be managed on Lake McCarrons (Figure 3-1). A step-wise process assists CRWD with making management decisions pertaining to AIS within or concerning to Lake McCarrons with relative ease and clarity. The framework is not limited to any species, sampling method, or treatment option, rather, its generality allows any AIS to be reviewed. The framework is adaptive and agile to accommodate species with limited information, yet, supports species specific indices as they become available or are developed to update the District’s management decisions. The framework is intended to be data driven from monitoring efforts, however, some subjective assignment was inevitable in developing this framework due to limited knowledge of current and future AIS.

Evaluation * return here

Population Type

Established

Population Status

Action

Degrading/ Nusiance

Treat & Monitor *

Co-existing

* Monitor * Wild Infestation

Evaluation

New

Threatening

Species of Localized Concern

Rapid Response *

High

Early Detection & Prevention *

Moderate

Prevention *

Limited

Awareness *

Figure 3-1. AIS management framework for Lake McCarrons.

The framework starts with an initial evaluation of the community and assignment of an AIS population to one of three population types: Established, New or Threatening. If an AIS is present in the lake, the use of historic monitoring efforts or date of infestation information can be used to determine whether the population is New or Established. AIS not present or documented in the lake are considered a Threatening population. Threatening is not used to imply harm, rather to acknowledge that further review and assessment is needed to determine the level of threat posed by the AIS. Following the evaluation and assignment of a population type, each AIS population is subject to a population status review. The review uses criteria to assign a population status which dictates the ensuing action appropriate to managing the AIS population.

November 2017

3-5

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

4.0 AIS Management 4.1

Established Populations

Established populations are those that have a historic record of occurring in the lake and no documentation that they have been eradicated. Established AIS populations are either a degrading/nuisance population or a coexisting population that is interspersed with the native species in the community. Populations status determination is made using density and coverage criteria. Greater density and coverage indicates greater AIS impact or nuisance potential.

4.1.1 Degrading/ Nuisance populations Degrading populations of AIS impact the health, recreational and/or aesthetic pleasure provided by Lake McCarrons. It is the intention of CRWD to evaluate the feasibility of AIS treatment when an established AIS population becomes degrading or a nuisance on Lake McCarrons. The population status criteria are intended to maximize the effectiveness of treatment activities, protect native biotic communities, and conserve resources for AIS populations that can be effectively managed. Degrading/ nuisance populations are considered to exist when: EWM and CLP populations:  Occur in an area at least five contiguous acres in size (Appendix A).

-And Occur in a monoculture (>75% of total observed biomass); (Langer et al. 2017) Common Carp populations:  When density estimates surpass 100kg/ha (89lbs/acre) across the basin (Bajer et al. 2009).

An established AIS population that does not meet the prior criteria will be classified as a coexisting population (see section 4.1.2).

If a new infestation AIS population (Section 4.3) is reclassified as an established species the following criteria will be used unless updated research for the species can provide more effective criteria for defining a degrading/nuisance population. Population status assignment for submerged aquatic vegetation AIS will follow above EWM and CLP criteria, fish AIS will follow common carp criteria, and no invertebrate population control/ eradication efforts have been conducted on a lake ecosystem to our knowledge, therefore, established invertebrate population criteria need to be evaluated and reviewed with the MnDNR AIS Specialist if they become established within the lake.

Treatment Treatment feasibility assessment will be pursued once a population reaches a degrading/nuisance population level. Treatment will be pursued if determined to be economically feasible and likely to have a net positive impact on lake health. Treatment activities are intended to control the population, not eradicate it, resulting in a population change from degrading/nuisance to co-existing. Eradication is welcomed but can be economically draining and may be biologically detrimental to do so. During the feasibility assessment, a review of the current treatment options and discussion with the MnDNR AIS

November 2017

4-6

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

Specialist will be conducted to determine the most effective and appropriate treatment. The treatment methods, rules and regulations governing AIS are subject to change in years to come. The District will pursue best management strategies that abide by regulation changes with the goal to protect or enhance the biotic community condition within Lake McCarrons.

The most current management guidance for the District pertaining to vegetation, fish and macroinvertebrate AIS as of April 2018 are: (http://www.dnr.state.mn.us/invasives/laws.html) Aquatic Plant Management The management of aquatic plants in public waters in Minnesota is regulated by Minnesota Statute, Section 103G.615, Chapter 6280. Public waters are described by the state as body of water 2.5 acres or larger within a city limit or 10 acres or larger in a rural setting. Certain management activities do not require a permit as they are intended for individual property owners to pursue on a relatively local scale. The District will only pursue management activities that require an Aquatic Plant Management (APM) permit as these efforts pertain to relatively larger ecosystem scale activities that have a greater overall impact on the lake. Greater detail to the rules, regulations and current methods for managing aquatic plants in Minnesota lakes and a description of common management techniques is provided in Appendix A. Invertebrate Management The management of invertebrate communities are managed by the MnDNR within public lakes. Historically, invertebrate populations are a less managed and sampled species by the MnDNR and have been evaluated within the research division of the agency. The most common form of invertebrate management is intended to treat swimmers itch in which pesticide applications are used to target the host (snails) of the parasite. Regulations that do exist are primarily related to specific transportation and treatment of invertebrate AIS. Minnesota prohibits placement (or the attempt to place) into state waters a watercraft, trailer, or plant harvesting equipment that has invasive species attached (i.e. zebra mussels); (Minn. Stat. ยง 84D.10). Minnesota requires a person leaving state waters to drain boating-related equipment before transporting the watercraft and associated equipment on to public roads (Minn. Stat. ยง 84D.10 and Minn. R. 6216.0500).

Fisheries Management The management of fish communities within public lakes is managed by the MnDNR fisheries division. The use of barriers, exclosure, enclosures or any methods that capture and collect fish in public waters requires permitted approval by the MnDNR. The transportation and stocking/dumping of fish into a waterbody also requires MnDNR approval. Certain instances where barriers or structures alter the flow of water will require additional permitting through the MnDNR Ecological and Water Resources division.

Treatment Monitoring If any treatment activity is pursued, specific evaluation protocols should be developed to collect pre- and post- treatment community information. This level of information will assist with determining the effectiveness of treatment activity(ies) and whether adjustments to treatment methods need to be made. In addition to a specific treatment evaluation protocol, the basin wide sampling protocol and sampling schedule should be maintained so that a change in the population status can be determined. When the population status is downgraded to one that is co-existing, treatment may need not be pursued.

November 2017

4-7

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

4.1.2 Co-existing Populations Co-existing AIS are not perceived to cause significant ecological degradation or nuisance impairments on a basin-wide scale. It is the intention of CRWD to monitor co-existing AIS populations with no treatment. A population will be considered co-existing if it does not meet the criteria to be considered a degrading/nuisance population (Section 4.1.1).

Monitoring A co-existing population of AIS does not require treatment as the efforts to eradicate the population are costly and may have negative and unintended consequences to the native communities within Lake McCarrons. Rather, continued monitoring will ensure that the District is vigilant to population changes and appropriate actions are implemented.

4.2

Threatening Populations

Many AIS could become established in Lake McCarrons, however, their ability to colonize and reach degrading/nuisance levels is species dependent and warrants species specific management consideration. Population status classifications were developed to simplify and organize threatening species for management purposes. A threatening population is classified as a species of high, moderate or limited concern.

Exposure and habitat suitability criteria are used to determine the correct population status and the ensuing management action. Context, criteria and management actions are provided in the following subsections.

4.2.1 Threatening Invaders The list of threatening and emerging AIS in Minnesota continues to grow as we begin to understand the ecology of AIS and assess our nation’s waterbodies. The MnDNR currently considers 16 species on its Minnesota infested waters species list (Table 4-1). Certain AIS that have a long historic presence in Minnesota (CLP and common carp), widespread distribution and/or are regulated by the MnDNR (i.e. Rusty Crayfish) are not placed on the infested waters list, yet, these species are AIS and will be managed as such by the District.

Any foreign species that can be introduced may be considered a threat, however, not all foreign species that are introduced become established. If an AIS does become established it may or may not reach densities that cause significant ecological or nuisance impairments.

The ability of a foreign species to invade a new area and proliferate is related to exposure events and habitat suitability of a given waterbody (Equation 2).

Equation 2. E

November 2017

Table 4-1. Infested Waters Species.

Organism Type Fish Fish Fish Fish Fish Fish Invertebrate Invertebrate Vegetation Vegetation Vegetation Vegetation Vegetation Invertebrate Invertebrate Invertebrate

4-8

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

Species

bighead carp grass carp round goby ruffe silver carp white perch faucet snail New Zealand mud snail Brazilian waterweed brittle naiad Eurasian watermilfoil flowering rush starry stonewort red swamp crayfish spiny water flea zebra mussel

Exposure risk indices predict the likelihood of new introduction, while suitability potential indices predict the likelihood of successful establishment and proliferation once introduced.

Since each AIS has its own exposure rate and suitability preference, predicting AIS establishment is highly variable. To assist with understanding the threat posed by an AIS to Lake McCarrons, a rapid assessment tool was developed to review any AIS with a limited base of information. This tool utilizes a rudimentary approach in assigning risk ratings to one exposure risk and two suitability potential indices for a given AIS. Under each index a species receives a rating of high, moderate, low or minimal. Once assigned a rating, achievement criteria are used to determine the establishment threat status of a given AIS population. A given threatening population is assigned a status of high, moderate or minimal which dictates the appropriate management action(s). The following subsections describe this tool in greater detail and how it is used to determine the threat status of an AIS population.

4.2.2 Exposure Risk Movement of AIS across the landscape is largely attributed to unintended movement via boat traffic. Modeling exposure risk associated with boat traffic movement requires highly detailed information about where boat movement is occurring, how frequently and from which lakes. It also requires knowing whether the boats moving between lakes carry viable AIS. This network of connections is complex and requires large sources of information which limits rapid assessment. However, Lake McCarrons is thought (assessed through boat launch inspection surveys) to receive the greatest amount of traffic from relatively local groups. AIS transported shorter distances have an increased likelihood that they can encounter suitable conditions sooner than species that are transported greater distances. An Table 4-2. Exposure risk index. exposure risk index was developed based on Exposure Risk Location proximity to Lake McCarrons (Table 4-2).

High In Watershed District Municipal boundaries were used rather than a Moderate In County direct radius measurement, as AIS efforts are Low In Adjacent County often managed at municipal limits, thus providing Minimal Greater Minnesota means to govern and manage boating traffic.

4.2.3 Suitability Potential Climatic conditions, in lake habitat, and biotic interactions influence suitability for AIS establishment. A species’ fundamental niche is often thought of as the environmental conditions that support a given species, whereas, a species’ realized niche is where it is observed. The realized niche is smaller than the fundamental niche as additional factors limit the species from occurring (i.e. competition, barriers, climate). Modeling suitability requires an understanding of both niche spaces requiring site specific information and an understanding of the biology for a given species which limits rapid assessment.

Suitability was modeled using two different indices: habitat condition and similar species indices. Both indices may not always be utilized due to unknown information. In cases where both indices are used and have differing potential classifications the higher of the two ratings (conservative approach) will be used to describe suitability.

November 2017

4-9

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

4.2.3.1.1 Habitat Conditions Indices Table 4-3. Habitat conditions index.

Habitat conditions are associated with Suitability Potential Available Habitat/Resources food/nutrient availability, habitat High Yes (widespread) conditions, and open niche space to Moderate Yes (moderate) become established. The current Low Yes (limited) understanding of suitable conditions is Minimal No (poor) highly variable among AIS and various suitability assessments can be considered. Specific indices do exist for certain AIS (Appendix B); however, their specificity limits their use to select species or systems. A general habitat conditions index was developed to provide rapid assessment of suitable conditions (Table 4-3).

4.2.3.1.2 Similar Species Index Many AIS have a similar native counterpart (i.e. northern watermilfoil and Eurasian watermilfoil) or come from a similar family (i.e. muskgrass and starry stonewort are charophytes) in which they often compete for similar resources and occupy similar niches.

Reviewing current and historic species lists and observed locations within a lake Table 4-4. Similar species index. provides context to whether and where Suitability Potential Similar species (abundance) conditions may persist to support a High Yes (widespread) specific AIS. Not all AIS may have an Moderate Yes (moderate) existing counterpart but still pose a Low Yes (rare) threat to the lake. A similar species index Minimal No was developed to provide additional suitability assessment (Table 4-4).

Establishment Threat The suitability potential and exposure risk indices were used to assign ratings for a threatening AIS. These are compared to different achievement criteria to determine a population status. Threatening populations are classified into one of three levels with specific management actions recommended for each. A species’ threat can be: 1. High High threat species pose the greatest concern to the ecological and recreational health of Lake McCarrons. It is believed that these species, if established, could quickly become a degrading/nuisance population within Lake McCarrons. A species will be considered a high threat if it has:  A moderate or higher suitability (habitat conditions or similar species) rating.

-And A moderate or higher exposure risk rating.

2. Moderate Moderate threat species pose a similar concern for the health of Lake McCarrons but are currently limited by either distance or suitability. Specifically, a threatening species of moderate concern differs from a high concern species in one of two ways: its proximity to Lake McCarrons is more distant or its suitability preference is limited within the lake. A species will be considered a moderate threat if it has:  A moderate or higher suitability (habitat conditions or similar species) rating.

-Or A moderate or higher exposure risk rating.

November 2017

4-10

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

Species that are considered a moderate threat due to meeting the suitability criteria are a concern because distance (exposure events) is the limiting factor for establishment in Lake McCarrons. If these species become established they would have the ability to co-exist within the community and possibly reach degrading/nuisance levels.

Species that are considered a moderate threat due to meeting the proximity criteria are a concern because they have a greater probability of being exposed to Lake McCarrons. These species have a reduced likelihood of becoming established if introduced due to the habitat conditions. If these species did become established would only persist at a co-existing population level. However, lake conditions are not stable over time and conditions could become more favorable to the species increasing the likelihood of establishment due to increased habitat suitability. If they became established they could reach degrading/nuisance population levels.

3. Limited Limited threat species pose a limited concern for the health of Lake McCarrons.

These species are not close in proximity and the current habitat conditions within the lake are believed to poorly support the species. A species will be a limited threat if it has: ď ° A suitability (habitat conditions or similar species) rating less than moderate.

-Andď ° An exposure risk rating less than moderate.

4.2.4 Management Actions Appropriate management action(s) will be dictated by the population status of threatening AIS species. Awareness and acknowledgement of limited concern AIS will be documented by the District but will not be the sole reason for greater management activities. These species are not perceived to cause an immediate threat to the lake and a conservation of resources is thought to be a greater need. Prevention efforts will be assessed for all AIS of high or moderate concern. These species pose a greater level of threat to the lake and are thought to be worth the resources needed to pursue preventative actions. Early detection monitoring will be assessed for all AIS of high concern. High concern species pose the greatest threat to the lake and a high level of preventative actions and early detection monitoring are worth the resources needed to pursue these actions. Greater detail of these actions are provided in the following subsections.

Prevention Preventing the spread of AIS is often thought to be the most effective AIS management technique. Prevention techniques are not limited to a specifically defined list of items, rather, they are intended to be variable and adaptive depending on target audience and available resources. The MnDNR has established regulations and a list of various prevention techniques and materials. The prevention techniques, renditions of these techniques or new and creative techniques can be pursued by the District. Prevention techniques consist of regulations, education and outreach. (http://www.dnr.state.mn.us/invasives/ais/outreach.html) 4.2.4.1.1 Transporting Species Regulations Minnesota has developed several state laws and a tiered system intended to minimize the introduction and spread of invasive species in the state. Species are classified into one of four categories: prohibited, regulated, unregulated nonnative species, or are unclassified and remain as unlisted nonnative species. The classification system establishes the level of regulation and allowable uses for each species. (http://www.dnr.state.mn.us/invasives/laws.html)

November 2017

4-11

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

4.2.4.1.2 Education & Outreach Outreach and educational opportunities provide individuals and community members the ability to contribute to AIS prevention efforts. These efforts can vary in their design, target audience and who participates, but all can fall under the prevention action item.

Suggestions from the MnDNR: Hands on Boat inspectors  Early detectors trainings  Youth events  Educational showcases  Field visits

Print materials  Brochures  Calendars  Fact sheets  Watch cards  Boat launch signs  Door hangers



Example The University of Minnesota based Minnesota Aquatic Invasive Species Research Center (MAISRC) has developed an AIS detection program that looks to train citizen scientists and professionals to monitor changes in populations of AIS over time and in specific locations (link to website). There is a minimum level of service required to become a certified AIS Tracker. The program provides a unique hands-on experience for people to learn how to identify and report information about AIS populations.

The Stop Aquatic Hitchhikers national education program began in 2002 and was designed to raise awareness and empower people to become part of the solutions to AIS management (link to website). The program’s primary message is Clean, Drain, Dry (and Dispose for anglers) which has been adopted in the state through local water groups. The MnDNR supports the clean, drain and dry program by mandating the following regulations to prevent the spread of AIS across waterbodies:  A person leaving waters of the state must drain all water from water-related equipment, including bait containers, live wells, and bilges, by removing the drain plug before transporting the watercraft and equipment from the water access or riparian property.  Drain plugs, bailers, valves, or other devices used to control the draining of water from ballast tanks, bilges, and live wells must be removed or opened while transporting watercraft and water-related equipment.  A boat lift, dock, swim raft, or associated equipment that has been removed from any water body may not be placed in another water body until a minimum of 21 days have passed.

Early Detection Early detection monitoring is a priority for threatening populations of high concern. Early detection efforts can reduce the probability of an introduction becoming an established population. Early detection efforts range in their expense and investigation depending on the AIS, available resources and knowledgeable identifiers. In some cases, early detection may require certain sampling equipment or the ability to access different areas of the lake.

Early detection monitoring is intended to target specific areas/locations where AIS may enter the lake or are most likely to establish a stronghold. Areas to include in early detection monitoring on Lake McCarrons include:  Public boat launch  Public fishing pier and beach  Inlet to the lake

November 2017

4-12

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

Additional sampling areas should be considered within the lake depending on the species.

Vegetation grows most heavily along the western littoral area but also along the northern and southern shorelines. Random patches in these locations could be selected for detection monitoring. Invertebrate and fish AIS pose a more difficult target organism as they are relatively mobile species. When implementing detection, it is important to look in areas where the species is most commonly observed during various life stages and at a given time of the year. Identification of these different habitat areas are outlined in Figure 4-1 and were developed from historic vegetation surveys. Specific sampling rigor should be vetted with groups conducting the assessment and/or depending on available resources.

Ramsey County District (RCD) currently conducts routine biological monitoring on Lake McCarrons. Monitoring includes basin wide point intercept surveys to assess the vegetation community, zebra mussel veliger tows, and inspection of the boat launch area for zebra mussels and invasive vegetation species.

Examples Minnehaha Creek watershed district has implemented an early detection monitoring plan which has initiated a rapid response in two different lake ecosystem: Christmas Lake (link to publication) and Lake Minnewashta (link to report). The success of these two ecosystems varied yet provide examples of how early detection monitoring plays an important role in AIS management of high concern AIS populations.

4.3

Rapid Response to New Infestation

In responding to new invasions time is critical. A timely response is the best predictor of eradication success. Acting fast will minimize the potential for the species to spread across the lake where cost, logistics and feasibility of treatment quickly become overwhelming, decreasing treatment success.

Responding to new invaders is dramatically influenced by the amount of monitoring conducted or execution of an early detection program.

The dynamics between a given AIS and Lake McCarrons is unique, therefore, no single response strategy can be predeveloped and applied in all situations. However, a general theme and approach can be applied to ensure timely and effective measures are taken. Initial response should: 1. Monitor – Make the detection 2. Report - Report the suspected detection 3. Confirm – state or private specialists can confirm the species identity 4. Communicate – Inform public of incident Suspected detections (step 1) will be handled by the District. These initial inquiries will be reviewed and directed to the MnDNR AIS specialist (step 2) as needed or to confirm the species (step 3). CRWD will work with the MnDNR on communicating new AIS occurrence within Lake McCarrons to the public (step 4). After confirming a positive identity, an assessment will determine what type of infestation has occurred and what the ensuing action will be. A new occurrence will be classified as either a localized species of concern infestation or a wild infestation. Coverage and suitability criteria will be used to determine the correct population status.

November 2017

4-13

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

RCD is preparing species specific rapid response plan frameworks, contractors and treatment options that will serve as supplemental guidance for CRWD and the McCarrons AIS Management Plan.

4.3.1 Localized Species of Concern A localized species of concern is a population that poses a significant ecological detriment or nuisance level threat, is spatially localized, eradication success is high, and any treatment will have a minimal impact on the native community. A species will be considered a localized species of concern if:  The species has a moderate or higher suitability rating (Section 4.2).

-And Initial infestation is localized to a contiguous area no greater than one acre in size.

4.3.2 Wild Infestation A new infestation of an AIS population will be considered a wild infestation on Lake McCarrons when the population is not localized or it is not a significant threat to the lake. A species will be considered a wild infestation if:  The species has a suitability rating less than moderate (Section 4.2).

-Or Initial infestation is greater than one contiguous acre.

4.3.3 Management Actions Appropriate management action(s) will be dictated by the population status of new infestations. New infestations are subject to one of two management actions: monitor the population or rapidly respond to the new occurrence. The rapid response scenario requires a high level of cost, time and effort. A feasibility and logistic assessment will be conducted as part of the initial response plan to ensure all required activities can be carried out to have the greatest likelihood of eradication.

Rapid Response (Treatment) Treating a new infestation is meant to target localized species of concern infestations.

Species identified as such in the lake will proceed with the following response strategy: 1. Feasibility Assessment – Review locations, control options, methods, funding 2. Execute the Plan – Execute response and control measures 3. Follow up Monitoring – Determine effectiveness of plan execution The District along with the MnDNR will conduct a feasibility assessment (Step 1). Local partners and stakeholder groups (MnDNR Communications, neighborhood association, City, and local partners) will be brought into the development and execution of the developed plan (step 2) If a treatment occurs then appropriate follow-up monitoring and evaluation will follow (step 3) to determine success of eradication efforts and that the species has not spread to other areas of the lake.

Monitoring Only Monitoring only will occur when a new infestation is considered a wild infestation. Wild infestation scenarios present concerns with the populations coverage, eradication feasibility or treatment that would result in significant impacts to the native community. Continued monitoring of the population will evaluate the impact it has on Lake McCarrons. Should a wild infestation become an established population, large scale treatment may occur if the population reaches degrading or nuisance levels within the lake (Section 4.1).

November 2017

4-14

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

Figure 4-1. Target habitats for AIS within Lake McCarrons.

November 2017

4-1

W:\06 Projects\McCarrons\AIS Plan\Drafts\2018-04-10 Lake McCarrons AIS Plan_D11.docx

5.0 Coordination Effective coordination among stakeholders is essential if AIS are to be managed successfully within Lake McCarrons. It is important to recognize the various stakeholders, their interest in the lake, and what their role may be regarding AIS management. With new infestations in particular, a timely response is important. It is essential that all parties understand and agree upon the role they will take from early detection, to potential treatment and beyond.

The primary identified stakeholders are listed below and specific roles are outlined in Table 5.1.

Ramsey County/Ramsey Conservation District (RCD) RCD has taken on the role of AIS coordination for Ramsey County.

The development of a county New Infestation Response Plan is underway that will outline the steps to be taken in the event of a new infestation including coordination with the DNR, lists of contacts for stakeholders, treatment resources, and potential contractors. In addition, CRWD contracts with RCD to perform aquatic vegetation surveys on Lake McCarrons. Ramsey county would be a major funding source in the event of a new infestation.

The county owns the boat launch at McCarrons, funds boat inspections, and has updated AIS related signage at the launch. The county also conducts lake monitoring which includes chemical and physical parameters as well as targeted AIS surveys.

Capitol Region Watershed District CRWD has developed the Lake McCarrons AIS management plan, and would therefore be the first point of contact for management of AIS in the lake. CRWD is a source of funding for current aquatic plant surveys and could provide funding for AIS control, new infestation rapid response, and follow-up monitoring.

Minnesota Department of Natural Resources Treatment of existing AIS species would require the involvement of the MN DNR to obtain a permit. All new AIS detections get reported to the MN DNR. They are an integral partner in any rapid response process. The MN DNR would provide funds, expertise, assistance with AIS confirmation, public communications, equipment, and legal authority.

City of Roseville Lake McCarrons is located within the City of Roseville. Lake shore owners are Roseville residents.

Lake Shore Owners and Frequent Lake Users Lake shore owners and lake users have an interest in the health or usability of the lake. This group is an important vector for both gathering and disseminating information on the lake.

There is an opportunity for both formal and informal monitoring of AIS in the lake. A member or members of this group could serve as an important AIS point of contact on the lake.

Table 5-1. AIS management framework tasks, responsible parties and timeframe.

Plan Component

Evaluate (Routine Surveys)

AIS Management Framework

Established AIS Populations

Threatening AIS Populations

Responsible Parties

Task

Description

CRWD, RC/RCD

Aquatic Vegetation Surveys

CRWD

Invertebrate Surveys

MnDNR

Fisheries Surveys

Survey the areal extent and composition of the aquatic vegetation community within the lake.

Survey and assess the composition of the invertebrate population within the lake.

Conduct trap, gill net, and near‐shore fish surveys.

CRWD

Classify known AIS

Classify all AIS in Minnesota as established, new, or threatening with respect to Lake McCarrons.

Yearly or as new AIS emerge

CRWD, MnDNR

Aquatic Plant Management Invertebrate Management Fisheries Management

Determine whether population meets treatment criteria, evaluate treatment options, and conduct cost‐benefit analysis. Treat the population if treatment is indicated by analysis.

Indicated by treatment information and follow‐up monitoring

CRWD

Follow‐up Monitoring

CRWD

Determine Threat Status

CRWD, RC/RCD

Early Detection Monitoring

Conduct regular monitoring aimed specifically at detecting AIS of greatest concern.

As indicated based on best available information for the AIS of concern

RC/RCD

Boat Launch Inspections

Inspect boats entering and exiting lake for compliance with AIS regulations.

At a minimum, weekends during peak boating season/hours

AIS Detector Training

Promote & facilitate citizen AIS Detector training.

Yearly

Educational Materials

Distribute and/or develop AIS educational materials.

Promote and/or facilitate public education events with a focus on AIS.

Ongoing

CRWD, RC/RCD, Lake Residents and Users

Community Events

Develop and execute a monitoring plan to evaluate post‐treatment effects.

Determine the threat status of MN AIS and periodically reevaluate using exposure and suitability indices.

Timeframe or Frequency Twice yearly TBD ~10 year intervals

As indicated by management plan Yearly or as new AIS emerge

Plan Component

Rapid Response to New AIS Infestation

Responsible Parties

Task

Description

Timeframe or Frequency

CRWD

Report Detection

Report the suspected detection to the MN DNR AIS specialist.

Immediately following detection

MnDNR

Confirm Detection

MN DNR will confirm the presence of AIS in the lake.

Following CRWD report of detection

CRWD, RC/RCD, MnDNR

Response Feasibility Evaluation Communicate New Infestation

Review AIS locations, controls, methods, and funding.

Communication to stakeholders regarding new infestation.

Following confirmation of AIS presence

CRWD, RC/RCD

Execute Response Plan

Execute response and control measures.

As indicated based on best available information for the AIS of concern and result of feasibility evaluation

CRWD

Follow‐up Monitoring

Develop and execute a monitoring plan to determine the effectiveness of plan execution.

As indicated by monitoring plan

6.0 References Bajer, P.G, G. Sullivan, and P.W. Sorensen. 2009. Effects of a rapidly increasing population of common carp on vegetative cover and waterfowl in a recently restored Midwestern shallow lake. Hydrobiologia 632: 235-245.

Bodamer, B.L. and J.M. Bossenbroek. 2008. Wetlands as barriers: effects of vegetated waterways on downstream dispersal of zebra mussels. Freshwater Biology, 53: 2051-2060.

Horvath, T. G., G. A. Lamberti, D. M. Lodge and W. L. Perry. 1996. Zebra Mussel Dispersal in Lake-StreamSystems: Source-Sink Dynamics. Journal of the North American Benthological Society, 15(4): 564-575.

Johnson, L. E., and A. Ricciardi, and J. T. Carlton. 2001. Overland Dispersal of aquatic invasive species: a risk assessment of transient recreational boating. Ecological Applications, 11(6): 1789-1799.

Johnson, J.A. 2010. Effects of carp on the survival and growth of aquatic plants in Rice Lake. Prepared for Rice Lake Area Association, Maple Grove (MN). Freshwater Scientific Services LLC, Maple Grove (MN).

Johnson, J.A., Jones, A.R., Newman, R.M. 2012. Evaluation of lakewide, early season herbicide treatmetns for controlling invasive curlyleaf pondweed (Potamogeton crispus) in Minnesota lakes. Lakes and Reservoir Management, 28: 346-363.

Jones, A.R., Johnson, J.A., Newman, R.M. 2012. Effects of repeated, early season, herbicide treatments of curlyleaf pondweed on native macrophyte assemblages in Minnesota lakes. Lakes and Reservoir Management, 28: 364-374.

Langer, T.A. et al. 2017. Water depth and lake-wide water level fluctuation influence ι- and β-diversity of coastal wetland fish communities. J. Great Lakes Res. LaRue, E.A., Zuellig, M.P., Netherland, M.D., Heilman, M.A., Thum. R.A. 2013. Hybrid watermilfoil lineages are more invasive and less sensitive to a commonly used herbicide than their exotic parent (Eurasian watermilfoil). Evolutionary Applications 6:462-471.

Karatayev, A.Y, L. E. Burlakova, and D. K. Padilla. 1998. Physical factors that limit the distribution and abundance of Dreissena polymorpha. Journal of Shellfish Research, 17(4): 1219-1235.

McComas et al. 2014. Aquatic Invasive Species Action Plan for Clear Lake, Le Sueur County, Minnesota.

Minnesota Department of Natural Resources. 2013. Guidance for selective treatment of invasive aquatic plants in Minnesota.

Minnesota Department of Natural Resources. Minnesota Infested Waters List, Downloaded 9/20/2017.

Nault, M.E., Netherland, M.D., Mikulyuk, A., Scorebook, JOG., Asplund, T., Hauxwell, J., Toshner, P. 2014. Efficacy, selectivity, and herbicide concentrations following a whole-lake 2,4-D application targeting Eurasian watermilfoil in two adjacent northern Wisconsin lakes.

Thum, R., Newman, R., Fieldseth, E. 2017. Occurrence and distribution of Eurasian, northern and hybrid watermilfoil in Lake Minnetonka and Christmas Lake: Genetic Analysis Phase II. Verhfstad, M.J.J.H., Nunez, M.M., Reich man, E.P., van Donk, E., Lamers, L.P.M., Bakker, E.S. 2017. Mass development of monospecific submerged macrophyte vegetation after restoration of shallow lakes: Roles of light, sediment nutrient levels, and propagule density. Aquatic Biology 141: 29-38.

Appendix A: Vegetation Treatment Vegetation Control This section describes the rules, regulations and current methods for managing aquatic plants in Minnesota lakes and a description of common management techniques.

Aquatic plant management (APM) permits may be issued to provide riparian access, enhance recreational use, control AIS, manage water levels, and protect or improve habitat.

Separate permits are required for controlling natives for recreational access and controlling AIS. A specific list of criteria is considered to determine if a permit should be granted. A permit will not be issued to improve the appearance of undeveloped shoreline or for aesthetic reasons alone. A permit also cannot be issued in areas given special designations, such as Scientific and Natural Areas or in areas posted as protected fish spawning areas.

Chapter 6280.0250 allows certain activities without an APM permit. Specifically, mechanical control of submerged aquatic plants is allowed by individual property owners in an area not to extend along more than 50 feet or one-half the length of the owner’s total shoreline, whichever is less, and not to exceed 2,500 sq. ft. plus the area needed to extend a channel no wider than 15 feet to open water. These rules also allow for the mechanical control of floating-leaf aquatic plants to obtain a channel extending to open water with the provisions that the channel is no more than 15 feet wide and follows the most direct route to open water, the channel is maintained by cutting or pulling, and the channel remains in the same location from year to year. The skimming of duckweed or filamentous algae from the surface of a water body is also allowed without a permit.

An APM permit is required for all other activities below the Ordinary High Water (OHW) level not mentioned above, including all herbicide control of aquatic plants, relocating or removing vegetation, and installing or operating an automated aquatic plant control device (weed roller).

Permitted Activities Herbicide Treatment A permit is required for all chemical control of aquatic plants. Herbicide control of aquatic plants is limited to an area that does not exceed 15% of the littoral area (typically ≤15 feet depth) of a lake. Only specific pesticides that are labeled for use in aquatic sites can be used, and they must be applied per the label instructions. Application can occur as frequently as the applicant desires; however, the frequency must be approved by the DNR. In herbicide applications, timing, concentration, herbicide used, target species, wind, water flow and water temperature are among the many factors to consider when applying herbicide to control AIS and SAV. Mechanical Treatment Mechanical control of aquatic vegetation typically involves the cutting, pulling, raking or otherwise removing or altering aquatic plants by physical means. Removal can occur as frequently as the applicant desires; however, the frequency must be approved by the MnDNR. Some of the conditions of permitted mechanical control of aquatic plants include:   

the vegetation must be immediately and permanently removed from the water; the mechanical control may not exceed 50% of the total littoral area of the lake control methods must not change the course of the water; and

ď °

mechanical control for recreational access must be conducted in the same location year after year; locations can vary year to year for AIS control based on pre-control surveys.

The combination of herbicide and mechanical removal is not to exceed a total littoral area of 50%. Therefore, if 15% of the littoral area is treated with herbicide only 35% can be harvested by mechanical methods.

Specialized Treatment Options There are additional forms of plant management (i.e. dredging, hydrovacing, biomats) that exist, however, these methods are only approved by the MnDNR in very rare and special cases. These methods attempt to alter or block the sediment with the goal to reset the seed bank and substrate conditions. These methods can be cost prohibitive, require extensive permitting and research assessments; therefore further insight or literature review of these methods was not investigated at this time.

Transplanting A permit is required for the relocation and transplanting of all native SAV. The transport and relocation of any AIS is illegal and is not permitted by the MnDNR. Transplanting is an effective technique when lake conditions are suitable for plant growth when the seed bank and/or abundance of native species in a lake has been depleted. The native vegetation species used in transplanting is typically acquired from areas within the lake and/or from neighboring lakes.

Current research is underway at the University of Minnesota that is monitoring transplanting success of various species through time. Preliminary results are promising, yet, controlling other limiting factors (i.e. light availability, nutrient loading, fisheries management) may need to occur in conjunction with transplanting activities. Transplanting alone has been shown to have little to no improvement in the SAV community. Verhfstad et al. (2017) suggested that once light is no longer limiting, seed propagules or the seed bank within a lake has a greater influence on which species will come back rather than lake sediment chemistry. Therefore, continued efforts to promote and facilitate seed bank restoration and/or transplanting of SAV may produce favorable SAV communities during water quality restoration efforts.

Current State of Milfoil and Curlyleaf Control Various control methods have been used to manage EWM and CLP populations in lake ecosystems. The success of controlling populations has varied but little to no follow up monitoring has been performed to effectively quantify and share knowledge. However, what information is available we summarize in the proceeding paragraphs. It is important to understand that 100% eradication is not likely and the continued presence of the species is likely within the lake. Therefore, treatment objectives should be considered before treatment activities are pursued.

Herbicide treatment of CLP is typically conducted in the early spring when water temperatures are between 50-60°F and warming. At this period in the growing season there is typically little to no native SAV growth, therefore, chemical treatments are meant to target CLP only. Effective chemical concentrations of endothall need to be sustained in target areas and can be greatly influenced by wind and water currents. Treatments are documented as being most effective when large (>5 acres) vegetation stands of CLP can be targeted with dosage concentrations persisting at 0.75 to 1.5 ppm for 12 – 24 hours. If large treatable plots do not exist, small areas may be treated but typically require greater concentrations (1.5 to 2.0 ppm or more) to have effective results (MnDNR 2013). Treatment

of CLP appears to have the greatest result at lowering reproductive success with repeated treatment for 2-3 years. Johnson et al. (2012) found that curlyleaf frequency, biomass and turion density were drastically reduced with repeated treatments, however, complete eradication of viable turions was not achieved suggesting that the population was at least short term controlled. Efforts by Jones et al. (2012) demonstrated that though PC treatment was effective at controlling CLP, there was little change in the native vegetation community.

Only select species were observed to increase in biomass after treatments, suggesting that other factors (i.e. water clarity, fish community, viable seed bank) were limiting the establishment and increase in native species and biomass.

Herbicide treatment of EWM is typically conducted in mid summer when EWM areas have been delineated. At this period in the growing season there can be many other SAV growing, therefore, chemical treatments need to be careful that dosing is conducted in a method that reduces the potential of negatively influencing non-targeted areas and species.

EWM is typically treated with an auxin-mimic, usually triclopyr or 2,4-D herbicides. Effective chemical concentrations need to be sustained in target areas for 12-24 hours and can be greatly influenced by wind and water flows. Treatments are most effective when large vegetation stands are dosed at concentrations persisting at 2 to 4 ppm. Dissipation of herbicides in small plots reduces effectiveness, while increasing dosage to achieve sustained concentrations can drift and harm non-target species (such as waterlilies); (Nault et al.

2014, MnDNR 2013). A growing concern among EWM infested waterbodies is the ability of the species to hybridize with native milfoil species. Hybridized milfoil has been shown to grow faster and may be more resilient to herbicides (LaRue et al. 2013) and hybridized milfoil is speculated to occur more frequently in herbicide treated lakes (Thum et al. 2017).

This growing concern warrants consideration in the use of herbicide treatment in EWM infested waters, as ineffective treatment may foster hybridization and greater difficultly in long-term management.

Technologies and research into mechanical harvesting are growing as the need and desire of lake managers continues to grow. Mechanical harvesting typically occurs when vegetation reaches the water’s surface and is visible. A project piloted by Minnehaha Creek Watershed District in 2013 assessed the effectiveness of cutting methods on CLP populations and found that the timing and depth at which the vegetation is cut had a significant influence on the amount of turions observed in the sediment. Turions are a seed like structure in which new CLP stems can sprout. The conclusions of this assessment acknowledge that traditional cutting methods likely will not control populations of CLP, rather they provide lake managers a method to improve recreation on infested waterbodies. This research also highlighted that conducting cuttings deeper and earlier may be more effective at controlling the population and turion densities but continued research is needed and should expand to other species.

In general, long-term control of EWM and CLP has not been overly assessed to date. It is uncertain if the species are completely killed or undergo seasonal injury, rebounding later in the year or in proceeding years. In addition, there is little information on the long-term effect and recolonization of native or desired SAV species. Follow up monitoring is not required to treatments and is often not pursued. Managers should consider current limitations if pursuing treatment of EWM and CLP populations as the results are often shortlived and continued treatments can deplete available resources.

Appendix B: Suitability Assessments This section contains species specific suitability assessments for curlyleaf pondweed, Eurasian watermilfoil and zebra mussels that could be used in Minnesota and was obtained from McComas et al. (2014).

Table B1. Curlyleaf pondweed nuisance potential and habitat indicators.

Growth Potential Light Moderate Heavy

pH (su) <7.4 7.4 ‐ 7.7 >7.7

Bulk Density (g/cm3 dry) >1.04 0.52 ‐ 1.03 <0.51

Organic Matter (%) 0.1 ‐ 5 6 ‐20 >20

Fe:Mn Ratio >4.5 1.6 ‐ 4.5 <1.6

Table B2. Eurasian watermilfoil nuisance potential and sediment habitat indicators.

Growth Potential Light Moderate Heavy

NH4 Conc. (ppm) Organic Matter (%) <4 <0.5 & >20 4 ‐ 10 0.6 ‐ 2 & 18 ‐ 20 >10 3 ‐ 17

Table B3. Zebra mussel nuisance potential and habitat indicators for shell formation.

Growth Potential Light Moderate Heavy

Calcium (mg/L) <15 15 ‐ 30 > 30

pH (su) <7.8 or 9.0 ‐ 9.5 7.8 ‐ 8.2 and 8.8 ‐ 9.0 8.2 ‐ 8.8

Alkalinity (mg/L) <55 55 ‐ 100 >100

Conductivity (umhos) <60 60 ‐ 110 >110

Table B4. Zebra mussel nuisance potential and habitat indicators for food availability.

Growth Potential Light Moderate Heavy

Chlorophylla (ug/L) <2.5 or >20 8 ‐20 2.5 ‐ 8

TP (ug/L) <10 or >35 10 ‐ 25 25 ‐ 35

Table B5. Zebra mussel nuisance potential and habitat indicators for substrate preference.

Growth Potential Light Moderate Heavy

DO (mg/L) <7 7 ‐ 8 >8

Substrate muck, sand sand, gravel, plants cobble, rock

Appendix C: Risk Assignment Flowering rush and zebra mussels are both found within Ramsey county and present a moderate level of exposure threat. Flowering rush is an emergent species that is often noted to overtake native bulrush stands. Since no emergent vegetation (i.e. bulrush) is present in Lake McCarrons it is viewed that conditions are likely limiting and the habitat is not suitable.

It is unclear whether native mussels exist within McCarrons Lake, however, submerged vegetation growth can provide attachment sites and a low level of habitat for zebra mussels.

Brittle naiad is viewed as a low exposure risk with the closest occurrence noted to occur within Dakota and Hennepin counties. A species of the same genius as Brittle Naiad also exists in low abundance within the lake and we know that the western littoral area is viable for SAV growth thus posing a moderate level of possible habitat.

Rusty crayfish present a low exposure risk due to its presence in Dakota county and the habitat conditions with Lake McCarrons due not appear favorable to support a large population as rocky or clay substrates are not apparent in the littoral areas. Starry stonewort presents a minimal exposure risk as it is currently found in greater MN, yet, it has a similar species that has been found at moderate levels within the basin and it has suitable conditions within the basin.

Table C is a summary of the text described above and the corresponding threat level for AIS located in adjacent counties or closer to Lake McCarrons, however, this assessment can be expanded to any AIS. No species were observed to have moderate or higher ratings in both exposure and in at least one of the suitability indices, therefore, no species are rated as a high concern. Species of high concern would be subject to both early detection and prevention actions. Flowering rush, zebra mussels, brittle naiad and starry stonewort were observed to have moderate or higher ratings in either the exposure or in at least one of the suitability indices, therefore, four species are rated as a species of moderate concern.

Species of moderate concern are subject to prevention action items. Rusty crayfish were observed at less than a moderate classification in both exposure and suitable habitat/ similar species indices, therefore, one species is rated as limiting concern. Species of limited concern are subject to awareness and no other management action.

Table C. Proximity and suitability assessment of AIS to Lake McCarrons.

Species

Exposure

flowering rush zebra mussels brittle naiad rusty crayfish starry stonewort

Moderate Moderate Low Low Minimal

Suitability (Similar Species) Minimal Unknown Low Unknown Moderate

*Greater MN AIS besides starry stonewort are not shown.

Suitability (Habitat Conditions) Minimal Low Moderate Minimal Moderate

Threatening Status Watching Watching Watching Limited Watching

Toll Free: 800-472-2232

Email: wenckmp@wenck.com

Web: wenck.com

April 18, 2018 Board Meeting

V. Action Item A) Approve Minutes of April 4, 2018 Board Workshop Meeting (Gardner) Special Board Meeting of the Capitol Region Watershed District (CRWD) Board of Managers, for April 4th, 2018, 5:00 p.m. at the office of the CRWD, 1410 Energy Park Drive, Suite 4, St. Paul, MN 55108.

Board Workshop Minutes I.

Call to Order at 5:00 p.m. (President Joe Collins)

A) Attendance Joe Collins Mary Texer Shirley Reider Rick Sanders

II.

Others Present Mark Doneux, CRWD Belinda Gardner, CRWD Anna Eleria, CRWD Jessica Bromelkamp, CRWD Keith Roberts, Zenman Thomas Vossler, Zenman

Open Forum A) Design presentation by Zenman

Ms. Bromelkamp provided an overview the website workshop goals and objectives and introduced Mr. Roberts and Mr. Vossler from Zenman. Mr. Roberts greeted the Board of Managers and Staff and provided a full presentation of the design elements for the new CRWD website. Mr. Roberts provided the overview of the entire website including best design practices that are used on new websites.

Mr. Collins opened the discussion about the new website. Mr. Collins asked about font size and color and Ms. Reider agreed that it was hard to see. Mr. Roberts replied that it was not as clear as it will be due to the projector. There was much discussion about the website. Mr. Collins asked about permits and the functionality of the permit page. Ms. Bromelkamp replied that the user will be able to upload documents and that the user experience will be seamless. Ms. Reider commented the more people can do online the better. The managers mentioned that they liked many of the modules. Mr. Collins asked about search features. Ms. Texer asked about the Metro MAWD links. Mr. Doneux replied that the Metro MAWD meeting links will eventually be moved to the MAWD website. Ms. Texer commented that changes will require notifying Emily Javens. Mr. Doneux replied that he will have that conversation with Emily. Mr. Roberts commented that Zenman will support the website quarterly with security updates. Ms. Texer asked about a page for community involvement. Mr. Collins asked about site maintenance and changes. Ms. Reider asked about blogs. Ms. Reider asked about access to other resources as a link, so people can get to other resources. The Board and staff thanked Zenman for their presentation.

III.

Adjournment

Motion 18-045: Adjournment of the April 4, 2018, Board Workshop at 7:10 p.m.

Reider/Texer 1

Unanimously Approved Respectfully submitted,

Belinda Gardner, Administrative Assistant W:\04 Board of Managers\Minutes\2017\April 4, 2018 DRAFT Special Meeting.docx

2

April 4, 2018 Board Meeting V. Action Item A) Approve Minutes of April 4, 2018 DRAFT Regular Board Meeting (Gardner)

Regular Meeting of the Capitol Region Watershed District (CRWD) Board of Managers, for Wednesday, April 4, 2018, 6:00 p.m. at the office of CRWD, 1410 Energy Park Drive, Suite 4, St. Paul, Minnesota.

REGULAR MEETING MINUTES I.

A)

Call to Order of Regular Meeting (President Joe Collins)

Managers Joe Collins Seitu Jones, absent Shirley Reider Rick Sanders Mary Texer

B)

Staff Present Mark Doneux, CRWD Anna Eleria, CRWD Elizabeth Hosch, CRWD Belinda Gardner, CRWD James Mogen, Ramsey County Attorney

Public Attendees

Review, Amendments and Approval of the Agenda

President Collins asked for any additions or changes to the agenda.

Motion 18-046: Approve the Agenda of April 4, 2018.

Reider/Texer Unanimously Approved II.

Public Comment â&#x20AC;&#x201C; For Items not on the Agenda

No Comments made.

III.

Permit Applications and Program Updates

A) Permit #18-002 Menards Transload Terminal, review period extension (Hosch) Ms. Hosch reviewed permit #18-002. The applicant requested an extension to the 60-day review period prior to the expiration. Additional time is needed to resolve how the applicant will meet the CRWD freeboard requirement.

Motion 18-047: Approve 60-day review period extension for permit 18-002 Menards Transload Terminal to expire June 14, 2018.

Reider/Sanders Unanimously Approved Our Mission is to protect, manage and improve the water resources of Capitol Region Watershed District

B) Permit #18-006 Wheelock 2018 (Hosch) Ms. Hosch reviewed permit #18-006 Wheelock 2018. The applicant, City of St. Paul is reconstructing Wheelock from Danforth to Western. The applicable rules are Stormwater Management (Rule C), Flood Control (Rule D), and Erosion and Sediment Control (Rule F). The disturbed area of this project is 3.64 acres with 3.64 acres impervious surface.

Motion 18-048: Approve permit #18-006 Wheelock 2018 with four conditions: 1. Provide plans signed by a professional engineer per the Minnesota Board of AELSLAGID. 2. Provide a copy of the NPDES permit.

3. Revise SWPPP or erosion and sediment control plan to include notes a.-g. in the permit report.

4. Revise rock specification for the underground infiltration trench shown on Sheet 14 in plans. Specification shall include the following according to the Minnesota Stormwater Manual: a. Double-washed, angular, uniform (uniformity coefficient of 2 or smaller) aggregate between 1.5 and 3.0-inch diameter. b. Acceptable rock types: igneous and crystalline metamorphic (granite, rhyolite, gabbro, basalt, quartzite). c. Unacceptable rock types: carbonate (limestone, dolomite, dolostone) and non-crystalline metamorphic (shale).

Reider/Texer Unanimously Approved IV.

Special Reports – 595 Aldine History Report Presentation

Administrator Doneux provided the background information on Bluestem Heritage Group and introduced Ms. Wagner who worked on the history projects for Trout Brook Nature Sanctuary, Willow Reserve History Project and 595 Aldine History Study. Ms. O’Brien Wagner presented to the group on the early history of 595 Aldine, beginning with the earliest settlers through the previous owner MacQueen Equipment Group. Ms. O’Brien Wagner’s report includes pictures and maps of the site.

Manager Texer recommended a few edits to the report and provided them to Ms. O’Brien Wagner for review.

The Board and staff thanked Ms. O’Brien Wagner for her presentation.

V.

Action Items A)

AR:

Approve Minutes of the March 21, 2018 Regular Meeting (Sylvander).

Motion 18-049: Approve Minutes of the March 21, 2018 Regular Meeting.

Reider/Texer Unanimously approved B)

AR:

Approve Stewardship Grant Program Updates (Eleria/Novak)

Our Mission is to protect, manage and improve the water resources of Capitol Region Watershed District

Ms. Eleria and Mr. Novak provided an update of the Stewardship Grant Program. The CRWD Stewardship Grant program offers financial and technical assistance to property owners interested in implementing stormwater BMPs on their property. Funding for these projects is based on the estimated BMP performance in terms of runoff volume and pollution reduction. Since 2014, grant awards for projects have been determined by our Stewardship Grant Calculator. Beginning in January of 2018, CRWD and Ramsey Conservation District (RCD) staff have been reviewing the Stewardship Grant program to identify potential improvements.

Two facets of the Stewardship Grant Program have been identified for updates including the Stewardship Grant Calculator and grant award policies. Stewardship Grant Calculator updates include: 1. Update base award rates in the Stewardship Grant Calculator using the average cost per pound of Total Phosphorous and Total Suspended Solids for a typical curb-cut rain garden. Additionally, the base award will be adjusted based on the percent of annual rainfall treated by the BMP (currently uses percent of the 1.1” rainfall event).

2. Incorporate additional treatment practices in the grant calculator for rainwater harvesting and reuse, filtration practices and conversion of impervious areas to pervious areas. a) The rainwater harvesting, and reuse grant award will include rates for water conservation ($0.50 per gallon of water saved per year) plus the water quality award per the grant calculator. b) Base awards for filtration practices will be adjusted using the filtration credit approach established in CRWD rules: 55% adjustment for standard filtration and 80% adjustment for enhanced filtration. c) A rate of $1.85 per square foot of impervious surface converted to pervious surface is recommended. This reflects the rate of treating directly connected impervious minus the rate for treating turf area. The grant award would be further adjusted by crediting the conversion with 0.25” rainfall treatment for conversion to turf and 0.4” rainfall treatment for conversion to native plantings.

Motion 18-050: Approve updates to the Stewardship Grant calculator and policies as described in the memo and enclosures.

Reider/Texer Unanimously approved C)

AR:

Approve Stewardship Grant for MN Landscape Association (Novak)

Mr. Novak provided an update on the Stewardship Grant for MN Landscape Association (MNLA). CRWD staff propose funding the rainwater harvesting portion of the grant through the Stewardship Grant Program, and funding for the rain gardens would come from CRWD’s Targeted Watershed BWSR grant since the project is in the Como subwatershed. CRWD and RCD have provided watershed analysis and construction plan review of MNLA’s Raingarden and Water Reuse project for their headquarters. The enclosed project plan proposes two rain gardens with curb-cuts, pre-treatment devices and underdrains. The rain gardens are sized to capture and infiltrate 1.1” rain events from the MNLA rooftop, parking lot and the public right-of-way along Lexington Ave and Garden Street. The site plan also includes an innovative underground 6,000-gallon cistern with a reuse system designed for irrigation of the diverse demonstration plantings located throughout the proposed grounds.

The reuse system will capture 48,877 gallons of water annually for a 42% reduction in potable water use for the irrigation system. It will also provide a 100% annual stormwater volume reduction from the roof since overflow will be directed to the rain gardens. The harvest and reuse system will include water-efficient components from each of four major manufacturers. The system will be fully computerized and managed using weather, communication and scheduling technology that far exceeds conventional SMART control systems. This system is designed to offer scientists, students, and observers an enhanced educational experience with data analysis and cutting-edge technology. The cost estimate for this project is $183,000. Staff have estimated a total CRWD grant of $62,000. The rainwater harvesting, and reuse system would be eligible for $26,000 based on the new grant rate of $0.50 per gallon saved per year, plus awards for water quality and education/visibility. The $36,000 Our Mission is to protect, manage and improve the water resources of Capitol Region Watershed District

grant award covering the two large rain gardens was estimated using our updated Stewardship Grant Calculator.

RCD has proposed covering $24,999 for the raingardens. MNLA would cover the remaining costs of the project totaling about $96,000.

Motion 18-051: Approve a grant award to the Minnesota Nursery and Landscaping Association for their Headquarters Rain Garden and Reuse Project for an amount not to exceed $62,000 and authorize the District Administrator to execute the grant agreement.

Reider/Sanders Unanimously approved D)

AR: Approve BWSR 2020-2021 Biennial Budget Request (Doneux)

Administrator Doneux presented on the BWSR 2020-2021 Biennial Budget. The Board of Water and Soil Resources (BWSR) issues grants to local units of government under Minnesota Statutes 103B.3369. These appropriations primarily include General Funds and Clean Water Funds. The purpose of BWSR Biennial Budget Request (BBR) is to provide information to BWSR about the scope and scale of future funding needs from local units of government. Staff will prepare and submit a BBR by the April 12, 2018 deadline. The BBR will include projects detailed in the Districtâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Watershed Management Plan as well as other planned projects beyond 2020.

Staff are requesting authorization to submit the BBR. Motion 18-052: Authorize staff to submit the BWSR Biennial Budget Request for fiscal year 2020-2021 Reider/Texer Unanimously approved E)

AR: Approve Six Month Lease Extension with JGM Properties (Doneux)

Administrator Doneux provided information to the Board on the six-month lease extension. The current lease period ends on June 30, 2018. The current estimated substantial completion/move in day is now November 6, 2018. Staff recommend that at this time we agree to the lease extension to December 31, 2018. The monthly lease rate for 2018 would be increased to unchanged at $5,008.17 (plus operating costs~$4,000/month).

Motion 18-053: Approve 7th lease amendment with 1400-1410 Energy Park Drive, LLC for the term of June 30, 2018 to December 31, 2018.

Reider/Sanders Unanimously approved VI.

Unfinished Business A) Building Update (Doneux)

Administrator Doneux reviewed the latest building update. There was much discussion about the contracts, demolition, and removal of asbestos. Administrator Doneux provided the latest updates on the timeline. We are waiting for the building permit and once we have that he will then work with Ms. Bromelkamp on scheduling a groundbreaking event.

Our Mission is to protect, manage and improve the water resources of Capitol Region Watershed District

B) Metro Watershed Updates (Doneux) Administrator Doneux reviewed the following Metro Watershed updates. Metro WRAPS - Cycle II, the MPCA is working towards rolling out the second round of monitoring and WRAPS for the Metro area. This has little to no effect on CRWD, but the Board should be aware of this larger MPCA effort both in the Metro and statewide.

Watershed Based Funding – Ramsey County, In December of 2017 the BWSR Board approved $5.9 million for Watershed Based funding in the Metro. $442,000 has been allocated for Ramsey County. Staff will review how this pilot program is working and how the funding is proposed for Ramsey County. Coordinated Watershed Management legislation, as a follow up to the CRWD resolution to MAWD last year, legislation is moving forward to help better coordinate watershed management statewide. Staff will provide an update on the legislation and how it may affect CRWD and other watershed districts. Water Reuse Report, MAWD and CRWD were very active in reviewing and commenting on the draft Water Reuse report that was issued in 2017. The State has issued the final report and staff will review what changed in the report and how the report responded to MAWD and CRWD comments.

C) MAWD Priorities Discussion (Doneux) Administrator Doneux reviewed the two-page summary of the 2016 Association wide survey and a tri-fold brochure for MAWD developed in 2017. The Board was asked to provide recommendations for the top three MAWD priorities for 2018 and the top three for the next three years.

Manager Texer commented on the language used in the document. There was discussion about how the request was worded. Mr. Doneux offered to draft the recommendations and send to Managers for future discussion.

D) Department Directors Follow up (Doneux) The Department Directors follow up with be discussed at a future meeting.

E) Snelling Midway Update (Eleria) Ms. Eleria reviewed the Snelling Midway Public Art memo drafted by City of St. Paul. Ms. Eleria mentioned that there will be a two-phase approach with concept design and development.

Manager Reider asked for a ballpark cost for concept development.

Manager Reider mentioned that the Board is in favor of education and art. Manager Reider mentioned that she was disappointed about the art done for CHS field.

The Board thanked Ms. Eleria for her update.

VII. A)

General Information

Board of Managers’ Updates

Manager Reider commented on two articles written in the Star Tribune on State Agencies and not protecting the water. Manager Reider read in Roseville’s paper that there’s redevelopment on Rice and Larpenteur. Mr. Sanders mentioned that he and his wife were on Channel 5 for an interview about that project. Mr. Doneux replied that Mr. Kelley could make a contact to the county and find out about the projects and make sure we are in the loop.

B) Administrator’s Report (Doneux) Administrator Doneux reviewed the contracts and agreements for the March 2018 Administrator’s report.

Our Mission is to protect, manage and improve the water resources of Capitol Region Watershed District

C) Upcoming Events (Schwantes) Administrator Doneux reviewed the upcoming events. Manager Collins will email Ms. Schwantes about one of the events.

VIII. A) B)

Next Meetings

Wednesday, April 11, 2018 CAC Meeting, Manager Reider will be attending Wednesday, April 18, 2018 Regular Board Meeting IX.

Adjournment

Motion 18-054: Adjournment of the April 4, 2018 Regular Board Meeting at 8:15 p.m.

Texer/Reider Unanimously Approved Respectfully submitted, Belinda Gardner W:\04 Board of Managers\Minutes\2018\April 4, 2018, Board Meeting DRAFT .docx

Our Mission is to protect, manage and improve the water resources of Capitol Region Watershed District

April 18, 2018 Board Meeting V. Action Items – B) Accounts Payable & Budget Update (Sylvander)

DATE: April 12, 2018 TO: CRWD Board of Managers FROM: Michelle Sylvander, Office Manager RE: March 2018 Accounts Payable/Receivable and Administrative/Program Budget Report _________________________________________________________________________________ Background Enclosed are the Accounts Payable/Receivable and the Administrative/Program Budget Reports for the Month of March 2018.

Issues Summary of Accounts Payable/Receivable Report: (Total All Expenses – Past, present and future months) Accounts Payable Accounts Receivable

$ $

414,990.63 27,249.00

Summary of Budget Report: (March Only Expenses) Administrative Budget (100’s) Program Budget (200’s) Project Budget (300’s) Total Operating Fund

$ $ $ $

58,774.26 113,726.56 30,409.47 202,910.29

Total Operating Fund Capital Improvement Budget (400’s) Debt Service (500’s)

$ $ $

202,910.29 134,784.56 0.0

TOTAL

$

337,694.85

Our Mission is to protect, manage and improve the water resources of Capitol Region Watershed District.

2018 Operations and CIP Monthly YTD Expenditures to Budget $14,000,000 $12,000,000 $10,000,000 $8,000,000 $6,000,000 $4,000,000 $2,000,000 $Jan

Feb

March

April

May

Jun

July

August

Sept

Oct

2018 Operations Budget

Operations Cumulative Expenditures

2018 CIP Budget

CIP Cumulative Expenditures

Nov

Dec

Request Action Approve March 2018 Accounts Payable/Receivable and Budget Report, direct Treasurer and Board President to endorse and disperse checks for these payments. enc:

March 2018 Accounts Payable March 2018 Budget Report

W:\02 Budget and Finance\Board Memos\Board Memos 2018\BD Memo AP Budget Report 4.18.18.docx

2

April 18, 2018 V. Action Item C) Approve Monetary Limits of Municipal Tort Liability (Doneux)

DATE: TO: FROM: RE:

April 10, 2018 CRWD Board of Managers Mark Doneux, Administrator Approve Monetary Limits of Municipal Tort Liability

Background Historically the Board has decided to NOT waive the tort liability limits. In a review of our insurance coverage it was determined that we must again determine if we are going to waive our tort liability limits.

Issues I have met with Mark Lenz, the Districtâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Insurance agent. Mr. Lenz reviewed the options regarding whether or not to waive tort liability limits, as the District has done in the past. I would recommend that the District NOT waive the monetary limits on municipal tort liability. The District will continue to purchase an insurance rider for accident coverage for volunteers.

Requested Action Accept the LMCIT liability coverage and NOT Waive the Monetary Limits on municipal tort liability.

enc:

LMCIT Liability Coverage â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Waiver Form

W:\04 Board of Managers\Insurance\Board Memo LMCIT Liability 4-10-18.docx

Our Mission is to protect, manage and improve the water resources of Capitol Region Watershed District.

April 18, 2018 V. Action Items D) Approve 2017 CRWD Annual Report

DATE: TO: FROM: RE:

April 10, 2018 Board of Managers Jessica Bromelkamp 2017 Annual Report

Background All metropolitan watershed management organizations are required by Minnesota Statute 103.B to submit an annual Activity Report, Financial Report and Financial Audit to the Minnesota Board of Water and Soil Resources (BWSR).

Issues Staff have requested feedback from the CAC about the general format and contents of the report as well as how best to share this information with residents by April 17, 2018. Staff will share the CACâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s recommendations with the Board at the April 18 meeting and request Board feedback as part of the discussion.

Attached is the Draft 2017 Annual Report. Please contact Belinda Gardner at belinda@capitolregionwd.org if you would like a hard copy of the Annual Report for the Board meeting. Staff will submit the final 2017 Annual Report on April 27, 2017. CRWDâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s 2017 Financial Statement and Audit and the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Program Annual Report will be sent upon completion later this year.

Request Action Approve the 2017 Annual Report for submission to BWSR.

enc:

Draft 2017 Annual Report (digital only)

W:\04 Board of Managers\Annual Report_2017/Board Memo_Approve 2017 Annual Report

Our mission is to protect, manage and improve the water resources of Capitol Region Watershed District.

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

2017

ANNUAL REPORT

LETTER FROM ADMINISTRATOR From the Administrator: On behalf of the Board Managers and staff at Capitol Region Watershed District (CRWD) I would like to share some of our highlights from 2016.

In a highly developed environment, large-scale redevelopment projects offer a unique opportunity to implement innovative solutions for stormwater management for CRWD and its partners. In 2016, CRWD collaborated with the City of Saint Paul to complete a Sustainable Stormwater Management Study of the Ford site. The study illustrates a way to re-create Hidden Falls while treating runoff for the entire site. This approach doubles the benefitto-cost ratio, allows the land to be developed with greater efficiency and flexibility and creates a new amenity for the community. In the Snelling Midway neighborhood, CRWD is working with the City of Saint Paul and Minnesota United FC to investigate the benefits of a comprehensive stormwater management approach for the new stadium and surrounding area.

E T A D P

CRWD is using technology to maximize project effectiveness. The District worked in partnership with the City of Roseville to build a system that collects, filters and reuses rainwater for irrigation at the softball fields next to the B-Dale Club at Upper Villa Park. The system consists of two underground features including a cistern to collect rainwater for use at the ballfield and a series of 10-foot pipes, with thousands of holes in them, which capture

U S ED

water and allow it to slowly soak back into the ground. An emerging technology called Optimized Real Time

Controls uses weather forecasting from the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration to create space in the cistern in advance of storms so more stormwater runoff can be treated. This smart control system provides

E N

50% more flood protection at only 10% more cost.

In 2016, the District partnered with schools in Roseville and Saint Paul to build stormwater management projects that clean water and connect with student learning. The projects at Central High School filter 1.4 million gallons of water each year and include signage as well as monitoring devices so students can study the water before and after it flows through the system. The rain gardens at Harambee Elementary School in Roseville are closely tied with the school’s environmental science curriculum. These projects and classroom connections are helping to develop the next generation of water stewards.

I am proud of the work we accomplished with our many partners in 2016 and would like to express my appreciation to CRWD’s Board of Managers and Citizen Advisory Committee; the cities of Saint Paul, Falcon Heights, Maplewood, Roseville and Lauderdale; Saint Paul’s District Planning Councils; Ramsey County; Ramsey Conservation District and residents for your continued support in helping protect and improve water quality in our lakes and the Mississippi River.

Respectfully,

Mark Doneux Mark Doneux, Administrator

CONTENTS Letter from Administrator....................... inside cover Our Organization.............................................................2 District Map................................................................... 4 Our People..........................................................................5 Awards & Recognition................................................... 6 Our Work Water Resources.......................................................... 8 Projects............................................................................11 Education and Outreach..........................................16 Grants..............................................................................19 Monitoring & BMP Maintenance.......................... 24 Permitting..................................................................... 28 Finance Summary......................................................30 Our Plans

Rain garden planting at Minnesota Governor’s Residence

2016 Year in Review.................................................... 31 2017 Workplan............................................................. 34 Appendix A: Financial Statement and Audit Appendix B: Stormwater Pollution Prevention Report Appendix C: Performance Review & Assistance Program

Bugs Night Out event at Como Lake

1410 Energy Park Drive • Suite 4 Saint Paul, Minnesota 55108 651.644.8888 • fax 651.644.8894 Cover and this page: Mississippi River in Saint Paul

www.capitolregionwd.org

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

1

OUR ORGANIZATION Mission To protect, manage and improve the water resources of Capitol Region Watershed District (CRWD).

Vision

CRWD achieves cleaner waters through strategic initiatives and partnerships, using: • research-based, informed decision making, • effective water quality rules and • education and outreach to promote changed attitudes toward water quality stewardship.

Background CRWD is a local, special-purpose unit of government that works to protect, manage and improve lakes, streams, rivers and wetlands of the District. The District covers 40 square miles and includes portions of the cities of Falcon Heights, Lauderdale, Maplewood, Roseville and Saint Paul. All the water in the District eventually drains to the Mississippi River.

In 1998, a small group of dedicated citizens, concerned about water quality in Como Lake, petitioned the Minnesota Board of Water and Soil Resources to create CRWD. Some of the founding members are still active in the organization today on the Citizen Advisory Committee and Board of Managers. This is a testament to how much residents care about our local water resources.

CRWD staff at 2017 Recognition & Awards Ceremony

2

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

OUR ORGANIZATION Watershed Management Plan

The District’s Artist in Residence, Christine Baeumler,

The District’s Watershed Management Plan (WMP) was

to incorporate art into CRWD programs and projects.

adopted on September 1, 2010. The WMP is the blueprint

Ms. Baeumler began hosting office hours in 2017 to

for the work of CRWD and includes goals and objectives,

strengthen the presence of art in the work of the District.

watershed data, standards, priorities and implementation

She has been intimately involved in plans to incorporate

plans. A Midterm Review Report was developed in 2015

art into CRWD’s new office space.

remains active in guiding conversations about how best

that included a list of 20 recommendations for CRWD’s work through 2020. The District made progress on several recommendations in 2017 as detailed below.

Recommendation #7: The District should focus on its goal to make monitoring and research data easily understood and accessible to the public. Specific focus should be on illustrations that depict water quality data.

The District continued development of an online user driven Data and Reporting Tool. Completion is expected

Two history studies were completed in 2017 including the 595 Aldine Street: A Midway History study and an Oral History Study about the creation of the District.

Finances State statutes 103B and 103D provide watershed districts with the authority to levy property taxes and this amount is included on property tax statements.

A budget is developed annually and approved after

in 2018.

Recommendation #8: The District should develop a research approach and program that can more efficiently and effectively ensure appropriate research is conducted for specific District needs as well as the needs of the larger stormwater community both regionally and nationally. This program could be modeled after the Special Grants process.

comments are received and a public hearing is held. The funds received through the property tax levy can be used for projects, grants, programs and administration as recommended in the WMP. More specific information on CRWD’s finances and a copy of the 2017 Financial Statement and Audit can be found in Appendix A.

The District helped initiate the Minnesota Stormwater Research Council in partnership with other watershed districts, cities, agencies and the University of Minnesota.

Recommendation #9: The District should determine the impact climate change may have on the way water resources and storm sewer infrastructure are managed and incorporate climate adaptation into its programs and projects.

The District updated its Trout Brook Interceptor Hydraulics & Hydrology model to reflect changed climate conditions by incorporating Atlas 14 data and analysis.

Recommendation #14: The District should move into a new facility that can better achieve its mission and accommodate its various programs.

The District purchased and completed designs for a new office space at 595 Aldine Street in Saint Paul.

Recommendation #17: Additional emphasis should be placed on incorporating art and historical context into the projects and programs of the District.

Purple coneflowers

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

3

OUR ORGANIZATION District Map

36

Roseville Lexington

B

Lake McCarrons

Maplewood

35e

Lauderdale

B

35e

Roselawn

36

MCCARRONS LAKE

25

Hamline

Larpenteur

Arlington

COMO

TROUT BROOK

Loeb Lake

Park

Pa y

d ela n

10

n Ir

s

te

Joh

URBAN

yet

Victoria

t

a Laf

t

12th

r be Ro

94

Marshall

r Fo

nd

52

University

94

Minnehaha

6th

ST. ANTHONY HILL

ou M

Va n

da

lia

St. Paul WEST KITTSONDALE

Earl

PHALEN CREEK Co mo

Prior

Transfer

Pierce Butler

ne

280

Dale

280

Energ y

Rice

ST. ANTHONY PARK

Arcade

Maryland

Horton

Edgerton

d

35E

on m

y Ra

Ivy

Wheelock

Como Lake

Jackson

Falcon Heights

DOWNTOWN

Wa rn

er

ss Mi

Mississippi

r ive i R ip p

iss

GOODRICH Grand WESTERN

Summit

EAST KITTSONDALE ith

Saint Clair

Jefferson

Edgcumbe

WEST SEVENTH

Randolph

Snelling

River

Fairview

Sm

MISSISSIPPI RIVER BLVD

Otto

CROSBY

Ford

in Sa

Montreal

au tP

HIDDEN FALLS

Cleveland

l e Sh

DAVERN

7th

r pa

d

Crosby Lake

Capitol Region Watershed District is home to more than 225,000 people and the land area CRWD Capitol 42% Region Watershed surfaces.

District is home to more than 225,000 contains impervious people and is 42% impervious surfaces.

I 4

0

0.5

1

2

3 Miles

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

City Boundary

Major Waterbodies

Major Highways

Parks

Roads

Subwatersheds

OUR PEOPLE Board of Managers CRWD is led by a five-person Board of Managers that guides the implementation of goals and objectives set forth in CRWD’s WMP. Board Managers are appointed by the Ramsey County Board of Commissioners and serve a three-year term.

Left to right: Back row ­— Mark Doneux, Administrator | Seitu Jones, Secretary | Joe Collins, President Front row — Mary Texer, Vice President | Shirley Reider, Treasurer | Rick Sanders, Education & Information

Citizen Advisory Committee

2017 Staff

The Citizen Advisory Committee (CAC) assists the Board of Managers with organizational development and strengthens connections between CRWD and its residents. Meetings are held the second Wednesday of each month and are open to the public. 2017 members include David Arbeit, Bill Barton, Pat Cavanaugh, Steve Duerre, Tom Elko, Mary Lilly, Mike MacDonald, Bob Simonet, Nicole Soderholm, Kathryn Swanson, Michelle Ulrich, Richard Weil and Gwen Willems.

Mark Doneux, Administrator Britta Belden, Monitoring Program Coordinator Jessica Bromelkamp, Communications & Outreach Specialist Anna Eleria, Planning, Projects & Grants Division Manager Bob Fossum, Monitoring & Research Division Manager Belinda Gardner, Administrative Assistant Elizabeth Hosch, BMP Inspector Forrest Kelley, Regulatory Division Manager Andrew Novak, Urban BMP Specialist

2017 Consulting Engineers Applied Ecological Services, 21938 Mushtown Road, Prior Lake, MN Barr Engineering, 4300 MarketPointe Drive, Minneapolis, MN Emmons & Olivier Resources, Inc., 651 Hale Ave N, Oakdale, MN Geosyntec, 100 South Washington Ave, Minneapolis, MN HR Green and Associates, 2550 University Ave W, Ste 400N, St Paul MN Houston Engineering, Inc., 6901 East Fish Lake Rd, Maple Grove MN MSR, 710 South 2nd Street, 8th Floor, Minneapolis, MN SRF Consulting Group, Inc., One Carlson Pkwy, Ste 150, Minneapolis, MN Wenck Associates, 1800 Pioneer Creek Center, Maple Plain, MN LimnoTech, 7300 Hudson Blvd., Suite 295, Oakdale, MN

Lindsay Schwantes, Community Outreach Coordinator Joe Sellner, Water Resource Technician Michelle Sylvander, Office Manager Maddie Vargo, Water Resource Technician Sarah Wein, Water Resource Technician Nate Zwonitzer, Water Resource Project Manager

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

5

RECOGNITION & AWARDS 2017 Recognition and Awards Ceremony CRWD recognized the contributions of residents, community

1

organizations and businesses as well as CAC members and staff at the 2017 Recognition and Awards Ceremony.

1

Watershed Citizen of the Year Lauren Colwell for her dedication to community engagement for clean water

2

Watershed Partner of the Year City of Roseville for their leadership and support of clean water projects that protect our water resources

3

Watershed Project of the Year Central High School for their leadership and dedication to student engagement for a cleaner Mississippi River

4

Young Watershed Stewards of the Year Urban Boatbuilders for their dedication to protect and improve the Mississippi River

5

Watershed Outreach Program of the Year Great River Greening for their commitment to engaging youth environmental stewards

6

Lifetime Steward Award Mike Thienes for his leadership and dedication to protect and improve our water resources

2

3

4

CAC, Board and Staff Recognition Shirley Reider: 5 years of service, Board of Managers Kathryn Swanson and Richard Weil: 5 years of service, CAC Bill Barton and Michelle Ulrich: 10 years of service, CAC Joe Sellner and Lindsay Schwantes: 5 years of service, CRWD staff member Forrest Kelley: 10 years of service, CRWD staff member

5

Mark Doneux: 15 years of service, CRWD staff member Britta Belden: CRWD Outstanding Employee of the Year

6

CRWD annual awards reception

6

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

Photos: Half Acre House Photography and Design

RECOGNITION & AWARDS State and National Project and Program Presentations In 2017, staff presented the work of CRWD at conferences throughout the country: Forrest Kelley

Anna Eleria

Upper Villa Stormwater Reuse Project

Green Line Project

•

Central States Water Environment Federation Association’s Annual Meeting

•

Central States Water Environment Federation Association’s Annual Meeting

•

Water Environment Federation’s Annual Technical Exhibition & Conference

•

National Adaptation Forum

Nate Zwonitzer

Bob Fossum

Urban School Retrofit Projects

Curtiss Pond Project

•

Central States Water Environment Federation Association’s Annual Meeting

• •

National Adaptation Forum

•

Maddie Vargo

William Street Pond

Water Environment Federation Stormwater Seminar

Nate Zwonitzer

CHS Field Project

•

Central States Water Environment Federation Association’s Annual Meeting

•

Water Environment Federation’s Annual Technical Exhibition & Conference

•

Minnesota Association of Watershed Districts Conference

StormCon: The Surface Water Quality Conference & Expo

• •

MN Water Resources Conference Minnesota Association of Watershed Districts Conference

Permitting Lessons

Sustainable Stormwater Management Study of the Ford Site National Adaptation Forum

•

Forrest Kelley

Bob Fossum

• •

StormCon: The Surface Water Quality Conference & Expo

StormCon: The Surface Water Quality Conference & Expo

•

Minnesota Association of Watershed Districts Conference

•

Board of Water and Soil Resources Academy

Mark Doneux

BMP Database

•

Water Environment Federation Stormwater Seminar

CRWD’s 2017 State, Regional and National Recognition Water Environment Federation National Municipal Stormwater and Green Infrastructure Phase II Award, Overall Highest Score

•

Capitol Region Watershed District

Central States Water Environment Federation Association’s 2017 Sustainability and Green Infrastructure Award

•

Mark Doneux Photo: credit?

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

7

OUR WORK CRWD Water Resources All of the water in CRWD eventually drains to the Mississippi River through a complex series of underground stormwater pipes. The District includes five lakes: Como Lake, Crosby Lake, Little Crosby Lake and Loeb Lake in Saint Paul, and Lake McCarrons in Roseville.

These lakes serve important recreational needs for CRWD residents and visitors, including fishing, boating and swimming. CRWD conducts water quality monitoring of

Como Lake Located in the City of Saint Paul, Como Lake is a relatively shallow (approximately 16 feet deep), 70.5 acre lake located in a highly urbanized watershed. Como Lake and its associated parkland are a major regional recreational amenity within the metro area. The lake drains 1,856 acres of land in Saint Paul, Roseville and Falcon Heights.

District lakes in collaboration with Ramsey County Public

Nonpoint source pollution in stormwater runoff is the

Works, Ramsey Conservation District (RCD) and the

most serious threat to the water quality of Como Lake

Minnesota Department of Natural Resources (DNR).

because it carries sediment and nutrients â&#x20AC;&#x201D; in the form

Groundwater is the water found below ground in the cracks and spaces in soil, sand and rock. In Ramsey County it is used for heating and cooling as well as manufacturing processes. Saint Paul Regional Water Services also augments water from the Mississippi River with treated

of phosphorus from decomposing organic material and nutrients from lawn fertilizers â&#x20AC;&#x201D; to the lake. Como Lake does not meet water quality standards for nutrients and is therefore listed as an impaired water body by the Minnesota Pollution Control Agency (MPCA).

groundwater to meet drinking water demands.

In 2002, CRWD developed the Como Lake Strategic

Only a few natural wetlands remain in the District

strategies and implementation activities to address

because they were filled or altered during urbanization

priority issues. It identifies four priority areas of concern:

and development over the past century. Today, the largest

water quality, aesthetics, recreation/lake use and

wetland tracts include: Woodview Marsh located near

natural resources. One of the key management goals

Larpenteur Avenue in Roseville, Willow Reserve located

from the plan is to reduce phosphorus loading to the

near Maryland Avenue in Saint Paul and Villa Park wetland

lake by 60%. In 2017, CRWD conducted the Como

located northwest of Lake McCarrons in Roseville.

Lake: Water Quality Drivers Analysis Study to better

Management Plan. The plan identifies management

Como Lake in Saint Paul

8

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

OUR WORK CRWD Water Resources (cont.) understand what factors are contributing to the poor

water-related issues for Loeb Lake and recommends

water quality observed in Como Lake. Based on the

management goals and activities to address the

results of this analysis, and in conjunction with additional

issues. The plan also considers goals and activities

monitoring, CRWD is in the process of developing a

for Willow Reserve, a wetland and wildlife preserve

new management plan for Como Lake to guide future

located northeast of Loeb Lake. In 2016, CRWD

management decisions.

staff began restoration activities at Willow Reserve

Loeb Lake

and finalized the Willow Reserve Restoration Plan.

Loeb Lake is a 9.7 acre lake with an average depth of

removal, continued in 2017.

Restoration of the site, including invasive plant/tree

nine feet and maximum depth of 28 feet. It is located in Marydale Park at the intersection of Maryland Avenue and Dale Street in Saint Paul. Loeb Lake is stocked with fish and is a Minnesota DNR Fishing in the Neighborhood program site. The most common species found in the lake is bluegill. Water quality is generally very good given its location in a highly urbanized subwatershed. While

Crosby Lake and Little Crosby Lake are located within the floodplain of the Mississippi River and are part of a complex of wetland and forested areas associated with the Mississippi River Valley. The land surrounding Crosby Lake is collectively known

nutrients are relatively low to moderate year-round, nutrients such as phosphorus are still a concern for lake water quality.

Crosby Lake and Little Crosby Lake

as Crosby Farm Regional Park and is managed by the City of Saint Paul Department of Parks and Recreation. Crosby Farm is also part of the National

In 2009, CRWD completed the Loeb Lake-Willow

Park Serviceâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Mississippi National River and

Reserve Management Plan, which defines critical

Recreation Area.

Crosby Lake in Saint Paul

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

9

OUR WORK CRWD Water Resources (cont.)

Crosby Lake is 45 acres in size with a maximum depth of 17 feet. Because the lake receives only a small amount of local drainage, the lakeâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s water quality has generally been good with very good lake clarity.

In recent years, however, the water quality in Crosby Lake has fluctuated due to extended inundations from Mississippi River flooding.

Lake McCarrons Lake McCarrons is a 75-acre lake located in the city of Roseville. With a maximum depth of 57 feet and a 34% lake littoral area, it supports a variety of activities including swimming, boating and fishing. Water quality in Lake McCarrons has generally been good since an alum treatment was completed on the lake in 2004. It has met all nutrient

Little Crosby Lake is eight acres in size with an average

(total phosphorus, chlorophyll-a, and Secchi disk depth)

depth of seven feet and a maximum depth of 34 feet.

water quality standards as defined by the MPCA since this

Little Crosby Lake is connected to Crosby Lake through

alum treatment occurred.

an 825-foot-long marsh and bog area. The water quality in Little Crosby Lake has also recently fluctuated due to extended inundations from Mississippi River flooding.

The Lake McCarrons management plan was developed in 2003 and sets a target goal for total phosphorus to minimize summer algae blooms. Therefore, nutrient management

In 2012, CRWD completed the Crosby Lake Management

continues to be a focus for maintaining and improving lake

Plan which includes management goals and

water quality. CRWD staff, along with partner agencies, are

implementation projects. The plan was reviewed by both

currently in the process of developing an Aquatic Invasive

technical and citizen advisory groups and approved by

Species plan to guide future management decisions for the

the CRWD Board in 2012.

lake with respect to invasive plants/aquatic life.

Loeb Lake in Saint Paul

10

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

OUR WORK CRWD 2017 Projects CRWDâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s New Office Space

Como Park Senior High School Underground Best Management Practice (BMP)

The Midway neighborhood in Saint Paul will soon be a focal point for sustainable design, development and

CRWD partnered with Saint Paul Public Schools (SPPS)

education, once CRWD moves into its new headquarters

and Saint Paul Public Works to build a project under a

at 595 Aldine Street.

new football field at Como Park Senior High School that

The renewed building will utilize green building

captures and cleans more than 6.5 million gallons of

principles including stormwater management practices and energy efficiency measures to conserve natural resources, create a healthy workplace and protect the Mississippi River. Gathering spaces will also be available for community and partner organizations to use.

polluted runoff annually. Construction was completed in the fall of 2017.

CRWD has worked closely on an individual basis with SPPS and Public Works to build numerous large-scale stormwater management systems in

CRWD will create a community watershed learning

the past. The effort at Como Park Senior

center and will offer on-site educational opportunities

High School was unique because it was

to showcase its work to protect, manage and improve

the first time all three organizations

water resources including Como Lake, Crosby Lake,

collaborated on a single project. By

Loeb Lake, Lake McCarrons and the Mississippi River.

working together, the partnership was

One of the community highlights will be a pocket park,

able to build a larger and more cost-

combining the natural and built environments with

effective stormwater management

interactive elements to draw in neighbors and visitors.

system that cleans more water.

Rendering of CRWDâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s new office building in Saint Paul

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

11

OUR WORK CRWD 2017 Projects (cont.)

The new system includes a series of large underground

invasive trees and plants and create more diverse plant

pipes with thousands of holes that capture runoff and

communities to support local wildlife including birds,

allow it to soak slowly into the ground. Public Works

amphibians and insects.

has successfully diverted stormwater to similar systems in the past, but moving stormwater across property lines to another landowner, in this case SPPS, required creative problem-solving to establish clear roles and responsibilities.

Project construction began in the winter of 2016-2017 with the removal of invasive trees at the reserve. Those trees were either chipped and used for new trails, burned onsite or hauled offsite. Invasive plants including reed canary grass, Japanese knotweed and burdock

CRWD received a $1.76 million grant award from the

were managed during the 2017 growing season with

Minnesota Board of Water and Soil Resources (BWSR),

follow-up treatments and/or removal planned through

with funds from the Clean Water, Land and Legacy

2019. Once the District is confident invasive species are

Amendment, to improve water quality in Como Lake

being managed effectively, native trees, shrubs and other

and Lake McCarrons. A portion of the grant, along with

plants will be added to the site through a combination of

contributions from all three partners, was used to cover

live plantings and seeding. Long-term management will

project costs

be required to ensure the plants are successful and the

Willow Reserve Restoration

invasive species do not return.

Willow Reserve is a 23-acre bird and wildlife reserve

Victoria Park Project

located along Maryland Avenue between Arundel

The Victoria Park Stormwater Feature Preliminary Design

and Virginia Streets. The reserve was established by a

Project was completed in 2017. This initiative falls under

neighborhood group and the City of Saint Paul in the

the District’s goal of “Bringing Water Back.” The project

1960s. The City owns and manages the property. CRWD,

included preliminary design of a stormwater/water

the City of Saint Paul and the District 6 Planning Council

feature; remaining park improvement designs will follow.

met with residents on several occasions to discuss the

The plan includes an enhanced stormwater treatment

project and gather input to develop the Willow Reserve

train as well as a new interactive stream channel that

Restoration Plan. The goals of the plan are to remove

connects the wetland to the rest of the new park.

Victoria Park Project

12

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

OUR WORK CRWD 2017 Projects (cont.)

Snelling-Midway Redevelopment Project

The system would treat runoff from multiple parcels

The 35-acre Snelling-Midway superblock along University Avenue in Saint Paul has long been viewed as a prime

with shared practices that utilize landscape features and/ or natural processes to provide environmental, social and economic benefits. The partners envision utilizing

site for redevelopment and, in the eyes of CRWD, an opportunity to incorporate innovative, sustainable green infrastructure practices on a brownfield site to help improve the water quality of the Mississippi River. In late 2015, Minnesota United FC, Minnesota’s professional men’s soccer team, selected the site as the home for its future 20,000-seat soccer stadium. Following stadium development that is slated for completion in 2018, the remainder of the site, owned by private developer, will be redeveloped in a phased manner for mixed uses including commercial, residential, institutional and open space.

“rainwater as a resource” on the site and demonstrating its value to the thousands of stadium visitors and future residents and tenants.

At the end of 2017, Minnesota United FC design team, with guidance from City of Saint Paul and CRWD staff, completed design of integrated tree trenches, rain gardens and underground filtration BMPs. Final design details for the rainwater harvesting and reuse system will be completed by early 2018. Site preparation and excavation began in summer 2017. By December 2017, placement of structural steel framing for the stadium

The City of Saint Paul and CRWD forged a partnership

began in the southeast corner of the site. Construction

in early 2016 to investigate the feasibility of building a

of green infrastructure practices and other stormwater

shared stormwater management system for the entire

BMPs will commence in spring 2018 and are anticipated to

35-acre site as part of the soccer stadium construction.

be completed by end of 2018 or early 2019.

Minnesota United FC Steel signing event

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

13

OUR WORK CRWD 2017 Projects (cont.)

Sustainable Stormwater Management on the Ford Site The Ford Site in the Highland Park neighborhood of Saint Paul represents a unique opportunity for redevelopment. A 21st Century Community will emerge on the over 122 acres of land situated along the Mississippi River. It will look to the future with clean technologies and high-quality design for stormwater, energy, buildings and infrastructure.

CRWD and the City of Saint Paul completed a Sustainable Stormwater Management Study to enhance potential outcomes for stormwater infrastructure on the Ford site. The study lays the groundwork for future stormwater infrastructure, which includes better protecting Hidden Falls Creek in Saint Paulâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Highland Park neighborhood as one of the goals. This innovative approach draws from the Cityâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s adopted Great River Passage plan. The plan outlines transformation of the Ford site by featuring a stormwater-

benefit-to-cost ratio and reduces the overall cost of

based amenity for the community that reconnects the

managing stormwater on the Ford site by as much

community to parks and the Mississippi River.

as 40% per acre treated, allowing for the land to be

The study illustrates a way to re-create the historic

developed with greater efficiency and flexibility.

origin of the creek while also collecting and treating

The Ford Site Zoning and Public Realm Master Plan,

stormwater runoff for the entire development

which includes the comprehensive stormwater

site. This comprehensive approach eliminates the

management approach, was adopted by the Saint Paul

need for individual underground treatment systems

City Council on September 27, 2017.

scattered across the site. This study outlines financial, environmental and social benefit comparisons of conventional and comprehensive innovative approaches.

Essentially, a comprehensive approach doubles the

14

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

OUR WORK CRWD 2017 Projects (cont.)

Trout Brook Storm Sewer Interceptor CRWD owns, operates and maintains the Trout Brook Storm

Trout Brook Storm Sewer System

Sewer System, a “trunk conveyor” or interceptor storm sewer that receives runoff from the cities of Saint Paul, Roseville, Falcon Heights and Maplewood as well as Ramsey County and the Minnesota Department of Transportation. The system was constructed between the 1880s and 1950s and served as a combined sanitary and storm sewer system. TBI ranges from five to 11 feet in diameter and tunnel shapes include circular, rectangular and horseshoe. In 1988, the systems were separated. Today, TBI carries rainwater and snowmelt from city streets, parking lots and other hard surfaces to the Mississippi River.

In 2017 CRWD completed repairs on a half-mile stretch of the oldest section of TBI that starts just south of Phalen Boulevard and ends north of I-94 in Saint Paul. Most of the repair section was a 10-foot by 10-foot horseshoe arch comprised of limestone blocks in the arch portion and brick pavers on the bottom. Repairs included replacing damaged or missing mortar between joints of the limestone blocks, installing a concrete liner in a 500-foot section where there were higher amounts of defects and removing calcium deposits in the pipe.

Unlike previous TBI repair projects conducted by CRWD, this 120-year old section of TBI was in better condition and did not warrant full replacement of any pipe sections.

Stormwater Pollution Prevention Program As mandated by federal and state environmental regulations, CRWD has a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Program to manage stormwater runoff in the Trout Brook subwatershed.

CRWD’s comprehensive, multi-faceted program involves six minimum control measures to improve water quality and minimize stormwater runoff: education and outreach, public involvement, illicit discharge detection and elimination, construction site erosion and sedimentation control, post-construction stormwater management and pollution prevention/good housekeeping of municipal operations.

In recognition of CRWD’s comprehensive stormwater management program, CRWD was awarded the overall MS4 award from the Water Environment Federation, a national trade organization. CRWD also received recognition for its program management and innovation in stormwater.

A Saint Paul resident helps prevent stormwater pollution.

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

15

OUR WORK 2017 Education and Outreach General Outreach The goals of the Education and Outreach Program are to reduce nonpoint source pollution, and to increase clean water knowledge, participation and action among CRWD residents to protect our water resources. The District organized outreach for adults and youth in partnership

the amount of material collected throughout the year.

The results are used to determine the program’s collective impact on water quality. In 2017, 763 Saint Paul residents adopted 1,222 storm drains, preventing more than 30,000 pounds of material from entering storm drains and flowing into the Mississippi River.

with numerous community organizations and CRWD’s

In fall 2017, the Adopt-a-Drain program was expanded to

member cities. Staff, partners and volunteers collab-

include the community surrounding Lake McCarrons in

orated with 3,000 residents as part of 50 public events,

the City of Roseville. In preparation for the pilot, Roseville’s

trainings, presentations, resource assistance, school visits,

storm drains were added to the Adopt-a-Drain website

field trips and tours within the District.

and 1,500 doorhangers were delivered. The program

Adopt-a-Drain

resulted in 41 residents adopting 58 drains and collecting

CRWD continues to partner with Hamline University’s

Lake McCarrons.

Center for Global Environmental Education and the City of Saint Paul to implement the Adopt-a-Drain program.

Participating residents adopt storm drains and keep them free and clear of debris. They are asked to report

over 1,500 pounds of debris that would have ended up in

CRWD will continue to work with program partners to improve and expand the reach of Adopt-a-Drain to new communities of the District.

Learning about aquatic insects and lake health

16

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

OUR WORK 2017 Education and Outreach (cont.)

Master Water Stewards

complete an education and outreach project. One of

CRWD completed its second year of the Master Water Stewards program in partnership with Freshwater

CRWD’s Stewards created a clean water tour in their neighborhood and another team began researching alternative turf messages for homeowners and local

Society. The program trains, certifies and supports community leaders to install clean water projects that educate community members, reduce pollutants from urban runoff and allow more water to soak into the

hardware stores. A third team installed a rain garden at a local church and organized a community workshop about rain gardens for residents.

Metro Watershed Partners

ground instead of flowing into storm drains and the Mississippi River.

CRWD is a member of Watershed Partners, a coalition

In 2017, 57 residents partnered with watershed districts,

of more than 70 organizations working to educate and

management organizations and cities throughout the

inspire residents to protect Minnesota lakes and rivers.

Twin Cities metropolitan area to participate in this

In 2017, Watershed Partners implemented year two of a

training program. CRWD sponsored seven Stewards

three-year campaign to more effectively engage residents

who live within our District. Classes concluded in April

in watershed protection efforts. Twelve new seasonally-

2017. After finishing the training curriculum, Stewards

appropriate stories about metro area residents taking

began their Capstone Projects. Examples include rain

action to keep Minnesota waters clean were published on

gardens on private property, community garden space

the updated Cleanwatermn.org website. The stories were

and at a local community organization. Stewards also

written for partners to use in communications via social media, websites and newsletters.

A system of trackable links allows partners to measure engagement.

The website also features an interactive “Find my Watershed” map tool.

Watershed Partners worked with Hamline University to host the Storm Drain Goalie photo booth and exhibit in the Eco Experience building at the Minnesota State Fair. The building hosted more than 200,000 visitors during the fair in 2017. Nearly 8,000 photos were taken as part of the Storm Drain Goalie booth. Fifty-two percent of the people who took photos shared them on social media. Another exhibit, Storm Drain Goalie foosball table, was available to visitors at the DNR building. Approximately 500,000 people visited the DNR building in 2016.

Master Water Stewards kick-off meeting

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

17

OUR WORK 2017 Education and Outreach (cont.)

Winter Roads, Turfgrass & Illicit Discharge Elimination System Workshops CRWD partnered with Fortin Consulting to host Winter Roads Maintenance Workshops to re/certify 63 Saint Paul Public Works snowplow operators. The District also hosted one-hour refresher sessions for all previously certified Saint Paul Public Works employees as part of their annual training day. The workshops highlight the importance of reducing the amount of salt used to keep our streets safe and application techniques to achieve chloride reductions.

CRWD contracted with University of Minnesota Extension to present a Turfgrass Maintenance and Illicit Discharge Elimination System Workshop for 30 Saint Paul Parks and Recreation staff. The first half of the workshop featured best practices for water resource protection in turf management, fertilizer and pesticide application, leaf management and erosion/sediment control. The second half of the workshop defined the types of illicit discharges, reviewed current regulations and highlighted common examples and the reporting process. Staff then completed a campus walkabout with the class to identify areas of concern and develop recommendations to address any problems.

Turfgrass Maintenance Workshop

18

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

OUR WORK CRWD Grant Programs Stewardship Grants

Installations included a series of large rain gardens with Rain Guardian pre-treatment structures at 1410 Energy

CRWD values collaboration with individuals and organizations, and sees the involvement of all residents as important to improving water resources in the

Park Drive, a community-led planting project at the Intersection of Snelling Avenue and Pierce Butler Route, and the continuation of our Hamline-Midway Boulevard

District. Through the District’s grant programs, we

Curb-Cut Project. We were also a key partner in the

hope to encourage a strong ethic of water resource

installation of a large rain garden at the Minnesota

stewardship among residents.

Governor’s Executive Residence in partnership with BWSR, RCD and the University of Minnesota College

Goals of the Stewardship Grant program are to:

of Design.

1. improve water quality, 2. increase groundwater recharge,

Pierce Butler Meadows

3. protect plant and wildlife communities and

The Pierce Butler Meadows Project was led by the

4. raise stormwater pollution prevention awareness

Hamline-Midway Coalition (HMC) in partnership with

among residents.

Hamline University. HMC was eager to enhance the area

Grants are available to residents of the District as well as

surrounding a stormwater pond by adding native plants

governmental agencies, businesses, schools and nonprofit

for pollinators. With technical assistance from CRWD, they

organizations that are located and/or conduct work in

were able to secure a $10,000 grant from the Minnesota

the District. CRWD also offers free technical assistance for

Department of Transportation as part of the Community

designing rain gardens and shoreline restoration projects.

Roadside Landscaping Partnership. CRWD also provided

In 2017, 32 grants totaling $163,716, were awarded through

$11,000 in financial assistance for the project.

the Stewardship Grant program for projects throughout

The project included a week-long series of educational

CRWD. Projects included rain gardens, planning projects,

events for elementary school students, college students

community-based native planting projects and boulevard

and community members. The project included

curb-cut gardens. Site evaluations and Clean Water

art workshops and volunteer planting events, and

Plans with proposed BMPs were completed for 94

culminated with a parade known as a Planton Movil,

participants and construction plans were developed

wherein participants artfully “…lend mobility to plants,

for 14 future projects. BMPs are activities, practices and

and plants lend their patience to people.”

structures that reduce the impacts of stormwater runoff.

Pierce Butler Meadows Planton Movil event. Photos: Pavlica Photography 2017

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

19

OUR WORK CRWD Grant Programs (cont.)

1410 Energy Park Drive 1410 Energy Park Drive is home to CRWD. The District leases office space from JGM Properties, who was granted a Stewardship Grant to construct three large rain gardens. The project included the construction of Rain Guardian pre-treatment structures for each garden, which filters sediment before runoff can overflow into the planting area. These three rain gardens infiltrate polluted stormwater runoff from over 55,000 square feet of parking lot. CRWD provided a $34,000 grant towards the installation, with an additional $25,000 funding from RCD. Minnesota Governor’s Executive Residence

Governor’s Residence. A large rain garden was designed to capture stormwater runoff from most of the mansion, the large back patio and the courtyard. University of Minnesota students studying restoration of Minnesota’s native plant communities assisted staff of the Facilities and Grounds crew with excavation and planting of the garden.

Hamline-Midway Boulevard Curb-Cut Rain Gardens Grant agreements were executed for 11 participants to construct 10 boulevard curb-cut rain gardens throughout the Hamline-Midway neighborhood of Saint Paul.

Residents have been engaged in the development of this project since 2014. CRWD anticipates that these

CRWD, in partnership with the BWSR and RCD, provided

rain gardens will remove an estimated 2.4 pounds of

technical assistance and design services to the Minnesota

phosphorus, 1600 pounds of sediment, and 550,000

Governor’s Executive Residence Facilities and Grounds

gallons of stormwater runoff.

crew for a rain garden project located at the Minnesota

Rain garden installation at Minnesota Governor’s residence

20

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

OUR WORK CRWD Grant Programs (cont.)

Partner Grants CRWD Partner Grants range from $2,000 to

2017 Grants

$20,000 and are awarded to organizations that share our mission to reduce polluted runoff and provide clean water education to residents

Thirty-two Stewardship Grant awards totaled $163,716 Eleven Partner Grant awards totaled $87,000

of the District. The District gives priority to

Five Special Grant awards totaled $226,550

projects that help meet goals outlined in CRWDâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Education and Outreach Plan.

Organization

Project Name and Description

Grant Award

Asian Economic Development Association

Little Mekong Night Market and Asian business outreach

$8,000

Frogtown Green

Bringing the frogs back to Frogtown

$12,000

Great River Greening

Engaging youth at CRWD project sites

$15,000

Macalester Groveland Community Council

Urban water management education

$5,000

Parkview Center School

Parkview water project

$5,500

Public Art Saint Paul

Rain garden at Western Sculpture Park and environmental artmaking workshops

$8,500

Saint Paul Natural Resources

Connecting underrepresented groups to urban waterways

$16,000

Summit Hill Neighborhood Association

Water Wise

$3,000

Harambee Elementary School

Harambee Water Project

$3,500

Urban Boatbuilders

Watershed education and rain garden maintenance

$2,000

Urban Roots

Urban Roots youth internships

$12,000

Partner Grantee Great River Greeningâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Field Learning for Teens Program

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

21

OUR WORK CRWD Grant Programs (cont.)

2017 Special Grants

Development Company. The study identified several

Special Grants are awarded to public and private landowners for large-scale project construction and planning. Special Grant program goals are: to decrease polluted stormwater runoff, protect plant and wildlife communities adjacent to water resources, educate residents about water resources and/or provide demonstration opportunities for innovative clean water projects. Typical recipients are cities, neighborhood associations and large businesses whose projects provide a high level of water quality improvement and public visibility. For 2017, CRWD received five applications and awarded a total of $226,550.

options to provide shared management and treatment of stormwater for a proposed combined residential and commercial redevelopment site in an area with known high groundwater. A feasibility study for two redevelopment sites on Selby Avenue near the intersections of Milton and Victoria Streets was completed by the Rondo Community Land Trust. Stormwater treatment options were identified for each site that provide treatment even though it is not required. At the completion of the study, CRWD provided an additional grant award for implementation of underground stormwater management systems and educational signage at both sites. Finally, construction was completed in the fall of 2017 for the Model Cities

Several previous Special Grant projects were completed

BROWNstone site on University Avenue near Victoria

in 2017. A stormwater management feasibility study for a

Street. The project included an underground infiltration

pocket neighborhood at Maryland and Payne Avenues in

system and a semi-public pocket park with rain gardens,

Saint Paul was completed by the East Side Neighborhood

native plantings and permeable pavers.

Project Name

Description

Grant Award

Highland Park Senior High

Create an outdoor classroom in the plaza between Highland

$69,500

Park High School and Middle School that incorporates tree trenches and permeable paving to infiltrate runoff from approximately 20,000 square feet of rooftop.

Adams Spanish Immersion

Two tree trenches will be installed near the entry of building to

$56,500

reduce runoff from 11,500 SF of roof and 8,190 SF of pavement and landscaping. Tree trenches will go above-and-beyond CRWDâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirements and provide educational opportunities for students and the community.

The Union on Grand

This three-story condo building is located on Grand Avenue

$57,550

just west of Lexington. An underground infiltration system is planned to capture the 100-year storm.

Jimmy Lee Play Area

Impervious (parking) reduction, erosion stabilization and to-

$25,000

be-determined innovative stormwater treatment. Stormwater improvements will coincide with other planned improvements.

Wilder Square Inc. Cooperative

Identify and install innovative stormwater management to

Stormwater Improvements

capitalize on planned improvements. Project will address soil contamination, poor drainage and water quality issues in the community spaces, including a playground.

22

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

$18,000

OUR WORK CRWD Grant Programs (cont.)

Inspiring Communities Program

and educational support for home buyers. CRWD also

In 2011, the City of Saint Paulâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Department of Planning and Economic Development and CRWD began a partnership to enhance residential landscapes and achieve

provides a $1,000 reimbursement for the construction of stormwater BMPs on each property and consultation during construction.

water quality benefits at foreclosed homes acquired by

In 2017, plans and cost estimates were developed for four

the city for rehabilitation. The Inspiring Communities

ICP properties. One previously-designed property was

Program (ICP, previously Neighborhood Stabilization

identified as having a unique and complicated stormwater

Program) rehabilitates foreclosed and vacant housing

runoff concern. The drainage area for the property

in some of the most racially diverse and economically

delivered a large amount of water from the alleyway and

challenged areas of Saint Paul.

adjacent properties, creating the potential for serious

Landscape designs incorporate features that treat nearly all runoff onsite and include downspout redirections to rain gardens, rain barrels or green space. CRWD provides expert advice and design services to create a landscape

water damage to a neighboring property downhill. Our project rehabilitated this site with a new clean water landscape that protects the property owner and their neighbors from detrimental water damage.

plan, and both partners provide resources for installation

Tiger swallowtail butterfly

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

23

OUR WORK Water Quality Monitoring Since 2005, CRWD has monitored stormwater quantity

Lake McCarrons from roughly April through November.

and quality from its 41-square-mile watershed in

Lakes were sampled by RCPW bi-monthly April through

Saint Paul, Roseville, Maplewood, Falcon Heights and

October for nutrients, water clarity, chlorophyll-a,

Lauderdale, which eventually drains to the Mississippi

phytoplankton and zooplankton. RCD worked with

River. CRWD is highly urbanized with 225,000 residents

CRWD to conduct macrophyte and biovolume surveys

and approximately 42% impervious land cover.

of each lake, which included plant species identification

Monitoring locations

and estimations of relative plant abundance. CRWD also

Of the 16 major subwatersheds in CRWD (see map below), seven are currently monitored for water quantity and quality (St. Anthony Park, Hidden Falls, East Kittsondale, Phalen Creek, Trout Brook, McCarrons and Como). Within the monitored subwatersheds, CRWD collected water quality and quantity data at 18 monitoring sites in 2017. At eight of these stations, samples were collected during baseflow and stormflow periods. Samples were only collected during stormflow periods at the remaining ten stations, as these do not contain any baseflow. Water quality samples from all monitoring stations were analyzed for nutrients, sediment, metals and bacteria, which are used to

conducted a fisheries survey on Como Lake in 2017.

CRWD monitored 10 District wetlands in 2017 for plants. Previously, the plant and macroinvertebrate data collected was used to determine an Index of Biological Integrity for each wetland, which evaluates and indicates general wetland health on a numerical scale based on other large depressional wetlands in Minnesota. In 2015, CRWD began monitoring only aquatic plants in order to use the Floristic Quality Assessment (FQA) method of monitoring and assessing District wetlands. The FQA was developed by the MPCA in 2012 and is currently used as the agencyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s main wetland monitoring and assessment approach.

calculate total pollutant loading.

Additionally, CRWD monitored water quality in the five District lakes (Como Lake, Crosby Lake, Little Crosby Lake, Loeb Lake, Lake McCarrons) in partnership with Ramsey County Public Works Department (RCPW), RCD and the Minnesota DNR. CRWD collected continuous level data on Como Lake, Crosby Lake, Loeb Lake and

Staff surveys Loeb Lake level

24

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

OUR WORK Water Quality Monitoring (cont.)

2017 Climatological Summary The 2017 calendar year was an average year for rainfall in the Twin Cities, with 31.57 inches of precipitation. This was only +0.97 inches above the 30-year normal. Of note was one week in May with multiple consecutive days of precipitation which contributed 15% to the annual total. While both June and July exhibited below-normal rainfall, the month of August was especially rainy with 8.44 inches of rain, nearly twice as much as the 30-year monthly normal. Overall, the winter of 2017 was mild, and all five months of the typical snow cover period (November 1, 2016 to March 31, 2017) were warmer than the 30-year normal. February was exceptionally warm, with multiple days reaching 60 degree highs.

Additionally, the calendar year snowfall total of 25.9 inches was 28.5 inches lower than the 30-year normal of 54.5 inches. Because of high early spring temperatures and minimal snowfall, there was no snowpack for the majority of late February and early March, and no recordable snowpack for the season after March 16 following a small snow event on March 13.

Water sampling on Como Lake

Lakes Results Summary In 2017, water quality varied in each of CRWDâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s five lakes. Como Lake failed to meet the state eutrophication standards for total phosphorus, chlorophyll-a or Secchi disk depth, and is therefore considered impaired. Como Lake has never met the eutrophication standard for total phosphorus, rarely met the standard for chlorophyll-a, but generally met the standard for Secchi disk depth for the history of monitoring. Crosby Lake and Little Crosby Lake did not meet the state eutrophication standard for total phosphorus in 2017. Both lakes have generally not met the total phosphorus standard in recent years, but historically have met the standards for chlorophyll-a and Secchi disk depth. Loeb Lake and Lake McCarrons met all eutrophication standards in 2017. Loeb Lake has met the eutrophication standards for its entire monitoring history, and Lake McCarrons has met the standards since alum treatment occurred in the lake in 2004.

Monitoring continues during winter months

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

25

OUR WORK BMP Maintenance and Monitoring CRWD owns and/or operates many stormwater BMP

storage and infiltration facility, a regional stormwater

structures throughout the watershed, including 18

pond, eight rain gardens and eight underground

constructed in the Como Lake Subwatershed and 14

infiltration trenches. The underground stormwater

along the Green Line on University Avenue in Saint Paul.

facility and infiltration trenches have pretreatment

Regular inspection and maintenance of all the BMPs and pretreatment units is coordinated by CRWD. Maintenance is crucial to ensure the BMPs are functioning properly. CRWD receives assistance with maintenance of some of the BMPs from citizen volunteers and other government entities. In 2017, most of the maintenance was completed by a private

devices (a hydrodynamic separator, sumped catch basins and manholes) incorporated into their design to provide treatment of stormwater runoff by capturing trash, debris, oils and sediment before they flow into the BMP. These pretreatment units help maintain the performance of BMPs by removing pollutants and infiltrating stormwater runoff.

contractor who is experienced with the construction and

Since 2007, CRWD has collected water quality and

maintenance of stormwater BMPs.

quantity data on several BMPs constructed for the

Arlington-Pascal Stormwater Improvement Project

Arlington-Pascal project. BMPs are monitored to

The BMPs constructed in the Como Lake Subwatershed

stormwater runoff and pollutant loads. Monitoring

were built as part of the Arlington-Pascal Stormwater

data was used to calibrate a water quality model

Improvement Project â&#x20AC;&#x201D; in collaboration with the

that simulated the amount of stormwater runoff and

cities of Falcon Heights, Roseville and Saint Paul and

pollutants flowing to and from all 18 of the Arlington-

Ramsey County â&#x20AC;&#x201D; that aimed to reduce localized

Pascal Project BMPs. Modeling efforts are necessary

flooding and improve the water quality of Como Lake.

because Minnesota winters prohibit monitoring data

BMPs constructed include an underground stormwater

from being collected year round.

determine their overall effectiveness at reducing

Fish surveys on Como Lake

26

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

OUR WORK BMP Maintenance and Monitoring (cont.)

This data, in addition to construction, design, operation and maintenance costs, was used to determine the cost-benefit ratio (the cost per pound of pollutants removed and the cost per unit of volume reduction) of each BMP. This data is presented in CRWDâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s BMP

Performance and Cost-Benefit Analysis: ArlingtonPascal Project 2007-2010, published in spring 2012.

CRWD undertook additional monitoring efforts to determine the amount of gross solids (trash, organic matter, sand and gravel) that accumulated within the Arlington-Pascal Project BMPs as well as the gross solids captured by BMP pretreatment units.

The amount of phosphorous contained in the gross solids was also determined. The results of this study were incorporated into the BMP performance analysis mentioned above. Detailed results can be found in CRWDâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Arlington-Pascal Project: Gross Solids Accumulation Study, published spring 2012.

Green Line Project CRWD, the City of Saint Paul, the Metropolitan Council and Ramsey County forged a partnership with a commitment to improve stormwater management, enhance the urban tree canopy and transform the aesthetics of the Green Line corridor using highly

visible green infrastructure practices. Four types of green infrastructure practices were constructed from 2010 to 2013 along University Avenue: an integrated tree trench system, rain gardens, stormwater planters and infiltration trenches.

These practices incorporate natural landscape features and hydrologic processes to treat stormwater by allowing it to soak into the ground. They also integrate with the character and values of the surrounding community and serve as educational tools that help raise community awareness of stormwater.

CRWD has estimated that annually the entire project will reduce post-construction stormwater volume by over 50% or 134 acre-feet, sediment load by nine tons and phosphorus load by 109 pounds to the Mississippi River.

This project contributes to the overall pollutant load reductions required by the state for this section of the Mississippi River. In 2014, CRWD developed a long-term monitoring plan of the Green Line BMPs to validate the estimated pollutant reduction projections. The Green Line monitoring plan will be ongoing for up to five years. In 2017, staff collected monitoring data for two stormwater sewers, three rain gardens, four stormwater planters, two tree trenches and three rain gauges within the Green Line Project. Eventually, the data will be compiled and analyzed to determine BMP performance and the cost-benefit of each BMP.

Urban Boatbuilders helps maintain Green Line rain gardens

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

27

OUR WORK 2017 Watershed Rules and Permitting Watershed Rules Water quality and stormwater management rules (Rules) were adopted by CRWD in September 2006. The Rules require stormwater management permits for projects disturbing more than one acre of land. Most of CRWD is fully developed, making it necessary to utilize stormwater improvement practices as part of redevelopment projects to reduce pollution flowing into CRWD’s lakes and wetlands and the Mississippi River. To achieve CRWD’s goal of cleaner water resources, the Rules require volume

reduction practices that capture 1.1 inches of rainfall over newly constructed impervious surfaces. This is most often achieved by infiltration of runoff into the soil. The Rules were revised in April 2015 to include the current volume reduction standard along with new filtration and enhanced filtration standards, address stormwater harvesting and reuse, and incorporate the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration’s Atlas 14 rainfall data. The Joint Technical Advisory Committee convenes regularly to review the rules and permitting process.

Minnesota United FC stadium under construction

28

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

OUR WORK 2017 Watershed Rules and Permitting (cont.)

Permitting Program

verifies that construction supervisors comply with permit conditions, to minimize the impact of sediment-laden

CRWD reviews applications and issues permits to ensure

discharge. Permitted sites are also inspected to ensure

compliance with the standards outlined in the Rules.

that permanent stormwater BMPs are correctly installed.

Regulatory Division staff work with CRWD’s consulting

It is particularly important that infiltration practices are

engineer to review applications and make recommen-

protected from turbid runoff and soil compaction during

dations to the Board of Managers. The Board votes to

construction, and that vegetation is properly established.

approve or deny permit applications based on their

CRWD’s Permitting Program processed 25 permit

compliance with the Rules.

applications in 2017. Approximatley 32% of the acreage

During construction, sites are inspected for compliance

included in the applications consisted of impervious

with erosion and sediment control regulations. When

surfaces such as roads, sidewalks and buildings. Runoff

vegetation and topsoil are removed at construction

leaving those surfaces is accounted for and treated by

sites, soil is exposed and can be transported to storm

stormwater BMPs that meet the standards specified in

drains and water bodies during rainstorms. To ensure the

CRWD’s Watershed Rules.

proper BMPs are installed and maintained, the District

CRWD Permits By Year 2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

Applications Received

30

33

31

33

30

30

36

41

41

33

25

Acres Disturbed

94

85

110

358

142

331

210

125

118

144

69

Acres Impervious

68

64

65

194

90

109

82

77

66

99

25

Alternative Compliance Sites

12

13

5

15

14

12

17

21

18

17

14

Standard Compliance Sites

15

18

26

18

13

17

19

20

23

16

11

Linear Projects

4

5

9

9

6

4

11

8

13

11

3

Total Linear Impervious (ac)

37

34

32

156

49.83

75.93

49.78

36.5

24.9

51

5.6

Total Linear Treatment (cf)

72,180

20,969

75,201

431,597

118,110

435,928

223,433

35,441

39,502

67,164

13,880

Infiltration Approved (cf)

120,349 148,131

163,297

425,289

275,781

91,100

124,856

96,889

220,236 102,599

Filtration Approved (cf)

73,861

65,959

35,649

198,844

179,448 474,887 348,543 176,183

Total Treatment Volume

194,210

214,090 198,946 624,133

455,229 565,987 473,399 273,072 339,019

310,355

147,560

Variances Requested

2

2

2

2

1

0

3

2

4

5

1

Variances Approved

1

2

1

2

1

0

3

2

4

5

1

Incomplete/Withdrawn Applications

3

2

0

0

3

1

2

2

3

0

1

117,065

21,564

207,756 117,010

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

29

OUR WORK 2017 District Finance Summary

2017 Operations Revenue (actual) Total $3,250,375

This is a summary and overview of CRWDâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s financial activities for the fiscal year ending in December 31, 2017. The complete 2017 Annual Financial Report and Audit can be found in

Fees/Grants $104,281 | 3%

Other (Interest Income) $33,234 | 1%

Appendix A.

Operations Tax Levy $3,112,860 | 96%

2017 budgeted revenue decreased $187,355 from a budgeted revenue of $3,437,730 and actual revenue of $3,250,375.

Expenditures in 2017 were under budget. Budgeted expenditures were $3,437,730 while actual expenditures were $3,091,833, a difference of $345,897. The decrease in

2017 Operations Expenditures (actual) Total $3,091,833

expenditures was due to several programs and projects that were under budget or projects not starting until 2018.

Administration $625,386 20%

Projects $679,364 22%

Capital Improvement Program (CIP) 2017 budgeted revenue was $1,483,024 and actual revenue was $1,534,034. The increase of $51,010 in revenue was due

Programs $1,787,083 58%

to receiving delinquent tax revenue. Expenditures in 2017 decreased from the budgeted amount of $5,082,263 to an actual amount of $3,767,149. This reduction in expenditures was primarily due to three main projects coming in under budget.

2017 CIP Revenue (actual)

Those projects include Como Lake BMPS, Mississippi River Subwatershed BMPs and Special Grants.

Financial Highlights

Total $1,534,034

Grants $87,500 | 6%

Other (Interest Income) $68,002 | 4%

2017 ended with the District spending approximately 77% of its overall budget. The difference is due to the District not beginning construction of its new facility until 2018. The fund

Tax Levy $1,378,532 90%

balance decreased to $3,296,701 on December 31, 2017 from $5,371,276 on January 1, 2017.

2017 CIP Expenditures (actual) Total $3,767,149

Special Projects/Grants $527,775 | 14% Mississippi River Subwatershed $58,005 | 2%

Lake McCarrons BMPs $78,549 | 2%

30

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

Shore/Stream/ Wetland Restoration 4,866 | <1% Como/Crosby Lakes BMPs $24,790 | 1%

Trout Brook BMPS $959,601 25%

Future Trends: Implementation $2,023,149 54% Loeb Lake BMPs $89,930 | 2%

OUR PLANS 2017 Year In Review Below is a complete list of 2017 CRWD projects: Fund Name

Project Name

Administration

General Administration Administrative Allocation

Groundwater

Groundwater Protection — Well Sealing

Permitting

District Permit Program Construction Inspection Permit Closure and Post Construction Inspection and Maintenance

Stewardship Grants

Stewardship Grants Partner Grants Inspiring Communities Progam RSVP Rain Garden Projects TWP ­— Boulevard Rain Gardens

Monitoring and Data Collection

Baseline Monitoring and Data Collection Lake Monitoring and Data Collection Villa Park Monitoring and Data Collection Wetland Bio-monitoring Long-term Monitoring Database Development Remote Data Access and Set Up BMP Monitoring Upper Villa Exfiltration Monitoring Data Analysis and Reporting Tool (DART)

Education and Outreach

General Litter and Leaf Clean-ups Municipal Training Website Master Water Stewards Sponsorships and Partnerships Events Awards Program Youth Outreach Media Training Adopt a Drain

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

31

OUR PLANS 2017 Year In Review (cont.)

Fund Name

Project Name

Education and Outreach (cont.)

Strategic Communication Plan TWP — Adopt a Drain TWP — Leaf and Litter Clean-ups Social Media

Technical Resources and Information Sharing

Local and Agency Plan Review and Tech Committee BMP Database Maintenance/Updates

Future Trends: Research and Positioning

District Research Program Public Art Program

Geographic Information System

GIS Program Development Data Acquisition

Safety Program

Safety Training Safety Program Updates/Audits Safety Equipment

Shoreline and Streambank Maintenance

Saint Paul Natural Resources Intern Program

Como Lake Subwatershed

Como Regional Park Stormwater Plan Como BMP Maintenance and Inspection Curtiss Pond Opti RTC O&M TWP — Como Lake Aquatic Project Development North and East Subwatershed Study Como Lake, In-lake Management Assessment

Lake McCarrons Subwatershed

AIS Management Aquatic Invasive Management Plan Lake McCarrons Internal Loading Assessment Upper Villa Maintenance TWP — Lake McCarrons Project Development

32

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

OUR PLANS 2017 Year In Review (cont.)

Fund Name

Project Name

Trout Brook Subwatershed

Inspection and Annual Maintenance TBI Easement Verification and Documentation TBI Hydraulic/Hydrologic Model Calibration and Update NPDES MS4 Stormwater Program Illicit Discharge Detection and Elimination Program East Branch Subwatershed Study

Crosby Lake Subwatershed

Highland Ravine BMP Maintenance

Mississippi River Subwatershed

Green Line Redevelopment SSGI Design Snelling Midway Redevelopment Ford Site Planning Green Line BMP Maintenance

Shoreline and Streambank Restoration

Ravine Stabilization Projects

Como Lake BMPs

TWP — Como BMP — McMurray

Lake McCarrons BMPs

Upper Villa Park Stormwater Improvement Project TWP — McCarrons BMP — Parkview

Loeb Lake BMPs

Willow Reserve Restoration Project

Trout Brook BMPs

TBI Repairs — St. 0+00 to 28+49

Wetland, Stream and Ecosystem Restoratiom — Implementation

Victoria Park Water Features

Mississippi River Subwatershed BMPs

Snelling Midway Redevelopment Lauderdale Subwatershed Stormwater Improvement Project

Special Projects and Grants

Special Grants TWP — Grant Administration Central High School

Future Trends: Implementation

New Office Facility

Debt Service

Debt and Loan Service ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

33

OUR PLANS 2018 Workplan Fund Name

Project Name

Priority

Project Description

Adminstration

General Administration 1410

Critical

General administration of District operations for 6 mos

595 Aldine Operations

Critical

General administration of District operations for 6 mos

1736 Thomas Operations

Critical

General administration of District operations

Administrative Allocation Ongoing

Annual cost allocation to projects and programs

Rulemaking / Rule Revisions

Evaluate Rules, hold TAC meetings

Critical

Conduct TAC process to update Rules

Groundwater

Groundwater Protection â&#x20AC;&#x201D; Well Sealing

Beneficial

Provide grant reimbursements for well sealing

Permitting

Stewardship Grants

Monitoring and Data Collection

34

District Permit Program

Critical

Continue Implementing District Permit Program

Permit Tracking and Database Management

Critical

Implement BMP database for previous permits

Construction Inspection

Critical

Inspect active permits sites for compliance

Closure and PostConstruction Inspection

Critical

Inspect completed permit projects for compliance and maintenance

Stewardship Grants

Important

Administer, promote and conduct outreach on Stewardship Grants

Partner Grants

Important

Provide grants to partners for Education/Outreach programming

Inspiring Communities Program

Important

Provide design and project funds for City ICP program

Rain Garden Projects

Important

Assist City and residents with boulevard rain gardens

TWP - Blvd Rain Gardens Critical

Assist with boulevard rain gardens in Como and McCarrons subwatersheds

MN Greencorps Member

Critical

Support, manage and train Greencorps member

Baseline Monitoring and Data Collection

Critical

Monitor 7 baseline sites, 14 level logger sites and 4 rain gauges

Lake Monitoring and Data Collection

Critical

Monitor 5 lakes for chemical, biological and qualitative parameters

Villa Park Monitoring and Critical Data Collection

Monitor 2 FWQ sites in Villa Park, 2 level loggers and Lake McCarrons flow-only station

Wetland Bio-monitoring

Important

Monitor wetlands, IBI assessments, water quality and data analysis

Long-term Monitoring Database

Critical

Long-term monitoring database for effective data management

Remote Data Access and Set Up

Important

Implement Remote Data Access Program

BMP Monitoring

Important

Monitor BMP sites â&#x20AC;&#x201D; Como 7, Green Line, Upper Villa

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

OUR PLANS 2018 Workplan (cont.)

Fund Name

Priority

Project Description

Monitoring, Data Upper Villa Exfiltration Collection (cont.) Monitoring

Beneficial

Exfiltration monitoring of an underground infiltration BMP

Data Analysis and Reporting Tool (DART)

Important

Phase I of web-based analytical and reporting tool

Midway Office Warehouse Monitoring

Important

Monitor Midway office warehouse

General Education and Outreach

Critical

Provide general District-wide education and outreach

Education and Outreach

Technical Resources and Information Sharing

Project Name

General Communications Critical

Provide general District-wide communications

Leaf and Litter Clean Ups

Critical

Implement a Leaf and Litter Clean Up Program

Municipal Training

Important

Provide training for municipalities staff

Website

Important

Maintenance and improvement of CRWD website

Master Water Stewards

Important

Participate in Master Water Stewards Program

Sponsorships and Partnerships

Beneficial

Sponsorship and support to partner organizations

Events

Beneficial

Events: Community and CRWD-sponsored events and activities

Awards Program

Important

Support CRWD Recognition Program

Youth Outreach

Important

Develop and implement outreach programming to District youth

Communications Training Important

Provide communications, diversity and media training for staff, board and partners

Adopt-a-Drain

Beneficial

Promote and implement Adopt-a-Drain Program

Strategic Communications Plan

Important

Implement Strategic Communications Plan

TWP â&#x20AC;&#x201D; Adopt-a-Drain

Critical

Adopt-a-Drain Program in Como and McCarrons subwatersheds for TWP

TWP â&#x20AC;&#x201D; Leaf and Litter Clean Ups

Critical

Leaf and Litter Clean Ups in Como and McCarrons subwatersheds for TWP

Social Media

Important

Maintain and update District social media accounts

595 Education and Outreach

Important

Provide education and outreach at 595 Aldine

Plan Review and Tech Committee

Critical

Review plans and serve on committees as appropriate

BMP Database

Critical

Update and maintain BMP database

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

35

OUR PLANS 2018 Workplan (cont.)

Fund Name

Project Name

Priority

Project Description

Future Trends: Research and Positioning

District Research Program

Important

Develop and implement comprehensive research program

Public Art Program

Important

Develop public art policy work with Watershed Artist in Residence

595 Aldine Art

Beneficial

Plan, design and implement art at 595 Aldine

Climate Change Impacts â&#x20AC;&#x201D; Research and Action

Important

Research climate change impacts on design standards (Atlas-14)

Geographic Information Systems (GIS)

GIS Program Development

Important

Manage GIS needs for CRWD

Safety Program

Safety Training

Critical

Provide safety training for staff

Safety Program Updates

Critical

Update safety program, protocols, procedures and equipment

Safety Equipment

Critical

Purchase, maintain and repair safety equipment

Shoreline and Streambank Maintenance

Saint Paul Natural Resources Intern Program

Important

Sponsor intern with Saint Paul for BMP maintenance or other activities

Como Lake Subwatershed

Como Regional Park Stormwater Plan

Important

Complete a Como Regional Park Stormwater Plan

Como BMP Maintenance and Inspection

Critical

Maintain and Inspect Arlington-Pascal BMPs

Curtiss Pond Opti RTC O&M

Important

Operate, maintain and inspect Opti RTC system

TWP â&#x20AC;&#x201D; Como Lake Project Development

Critical

Develop projects for the Como Lake TWP

Como Lake Management Plan

Important

Develop Como Lake Management Plan

Beneficial

Manage aquatic invasive plants

Internal Loading Assessment

Important

Conduct an assessment of internal loading

Upper Villa Maintenance

Critical

Upper Villa Maintenance

TBI Inspection and Maintenance

Critical

Manage, operate, inspect, maintain and repair TBI

TBI Easement Verification and Documentation

Critical

Complete TBI easement verification, acquisition and documentation work

TBI Model Update

Critical

Update TBI model with Atlas 14 Data

Lake McCarrons AIS Management Subwatershed

Trout Brook Subwatershed

36

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

OUR PLANS 2018 Workplan (cont.)

Fund Name

Project Name

Priority

Project Description

Crosby Lake Subwatershed (cont.)

NPDES MS4 Stormwater Program

Critical

Implement MS4 Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan

Illicit Discharge Detection and Elimination

Critical

Implement IDDE program

Crosby Lake Subwatershed

Highland Ravine BMP Maintenance

Critical

Maintain gully stabilization BMPs

Mississippi River Subwatershed

Snelling Midway Redevelopment

Important

Plan and design green infrastructure at Snelling Midway site

Ford Site Planning

Important

Provide design and planning assistance for former Ford site

Green Line BMP Maintenance

Critical

Maintain and repair CRWD's green infrastructure along Green Line

2020 Watershed Management Plan

Critical

Prepare and adopt 2020 WMP

Strategic Plan

Critical

Prepare a strategic plan in advance of 2020 WMP

Shoreline and Streambank Restoration

Ravine Stabilization Projects

Important

Complete design and installation of ravine stabilization projects

Como Lake BMPs

TWP — Como BMP

Critical

Implement stormwater BMPs in Como subwatershed

Lake McCarrons BMPs

TWP — McCarrons BMP — Parkview

Critical

Design Parkview Elementary BMP

Loeb Lake BMPs

Willow Reserve Restoration Project

Critical

Conduct ecological restoration project

Trout Brook BMPs

Trout Brook Nature Sanctuary

Important

Provide final $250,000 for pump system

Mississippi River Subwatersheds BMPs

Snelling Midway Redevelopment

Important

Construct Snelling Midway BMPs

Lauderdale Stormwater Project

Important

Design and construct stormwater improvements

Watershed Management Planning

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT

37

OUR PLANS 2018 Workplan (cont.)

Fund Name

Project Name

Priority

Project Description

Special Projects and Grants

Special Grants

Critical

Implement Special Grant Program

TWP â&#x20AC;&#x201D; Grant Administration

Critical

Administer TWP Grant Program

Future Trends: New Office Facility Implementation

Critical

Purchase, due diligence, design and remodel of new office

Debt Service

Critical

Annual Payment for 2007A, CWF Loan and 2013A Debt

38

Debt and Loan Service

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

APPENDIX A Financial Statements and Audit

APPENDIX B Stormwater Pollution Prevention Annual Report

APPENDIX C Performance Review & Assistance Program

METRO WATERSHED DISTRICT PERFORMANCE STANDARDS Capitol Region Watershed District

Communication & Coordination

Execution

Planning

Administration

Performance Area

Performance Standard

H n

High Performance standard Basic practice or statutory requirement (see instructions for explanation of standards)

Level of Review I Annual Compliance II BWSR Staff Review & Assessment (1/5 yrs)

Rating Yes, No, or Value YES

NO

n

Activity report: annual, on-time

I

n

Financial report & audit completed on time

I

n

Drainage authority buffer strip report submitted on time

I

n

eLink Grant Report(s): submitted on time

I

x

n

Rules: date of last revision or review

II

4/1/2015

n

Personnel policy: exists and reviewed/updated within last 5 yrs

II

x

n

Data practices policy: exists and reviewed/updated within last 5 yrs

II

x

n

Manager appointments: current and reported

II

x

n

Consultant RFP: within 2 yrs for professional services

II

x

n

WD/WMO has resolution assuming WCA responsibilities and appropriate delegation resolutions as warranted (N/A if not WCA LGU)

II

x

n

WD/WMO has knowledgable and trained staff that manages WCA program or has secured a qualified delegate. (N/A if not WCA LGU)

II

x

H H H H H

Administrator on staff

II

x

Board training: orientation & cont. ed. plan and record for each board member

II

x

Staff training: orientation & cont. ed. plan and record for each staff person

II

x

Operational guidelines for fiscal procedures and conflicts of interest exist and current

II

x

Public drainage records: meet modernization guidelines

II

n

Watershed management plan: up-to-date

I

x

n

City/twp. local water plans not yet approved

II

0%

n

Capital Improvement Program: reviewed every 2 yrs

II

x

H H

Biennial Budget Request submitted on time

II

x

Strategic plan identifies short-term priorities

II

x

n

Engineer Reports: submitted for DNR & BWSR review

II

x

n

WCA decisions & determinations made in conformance with all WCA requirements (if delegated WCA LGU)

II

x

n

WCA TEP reviews & recommendations appropriately coordinated. (if delegated WCA LGU)

II

x

n

Total expenditures per year (past 10 yrs)

II

see below

H H

Water quality trends tracked for priority water bodies

II

x

Watershed hydrologic trends monitored / reported

II

x

n

Website: contains information as required by MR 8410.0150 Subp. 3a, i.e. as board meeting, contact information, water plan, etc.

II

x

n

Functioning advisory committee(s): recommendations on projects, reports, 2-way communication with Board

II

x

n

Communication piece: sent within last 12 months

II

x

x n/a

n/a

residents

Communication target audience:

H H H

x

Track progress for I & E objectives in Plan

II

x

Coordination with County Bd, SWCD Board and City/Twp officials

II

x

Partnerships: cooperative projects/tasks with neighboring organizations, such as counties, soil and water districts, watershed districts and non-governmental organizations

II

x

CAPITOL REGION WATERSHED DISTRICT ANNUAL REPORT 2017

April 18, 2018 Board Meeting V.E. Approve 2018 Quality Assurance Program Plan (Belden)

DATE: TO: FROM: RE:

April 12, 2018 CRWD Board of Managers Britta Belden, Monitoring Coordinator 2018 Quality Assurance Program Plan (QAPP)

Background In 2016, CRWD staff developed and implemented a Quality Assurance and Program Plan (QAPP) to guide the CRWD monitoring program. The QAPP guides the CRWD monitoring program by: a) defining data quality assurance goals and procedures; and b) summarizing the program design, sampling methods, analytical procedures, and data review protocols.

The contents of a QAPP ensure that quality assurance objectives and regulatory needs are being met.

Monitoring data collected using an approved QAPP have strong credibility with outside parties and allow the District to confidently utilize the data to make regulatory decisions.

The first version of the CRWD QAPP was presented at the September 7, 2016 meeting and accepted by the Board of Managers. The QAPP is updated annually to reflect any changes that have been made to the CRWD monitoring program as it relates to staffing, monitoring stations, monitoring procedures, and laboratory protocols.

Issues The revised CRWD QAPP (enclosed) was updated to reflect changes that have been made to the monitoring program since the last update of the QAPP in 2017. CRWD staff are requesting acceptance of 2018 QAPP by the Board of Managers to formally endorse its use in the Monitoring Program.

If you would like a printed copy of the QAPP please contact the CRWD office staff.

Requested Action Accept the 2018 Quality Assurance Program Plan. enc:

CRWD Quality Assurance and Program Plan, draft dated 04/11/2018 (digital only)

"W:\07 Programs\Monitoring & Data Acquisition\Monitoring Protocols\Quality Assurance Program Plan (QAPP)\2018 QAPP\Board Mtg\Board Memo_QAPP Update_04-12-18.docx"

Monitoring Quality Assurance Program Plan Capitol Region Watershed District â&#x20AC;&#x201C; St. Paul, Minnesota

Approved: September 2016 Updated: April 11, 2018

By my signature below, I attest that I am familiar with the requirements of this document and agree to fulfill the responsibilities specified herein.

_____________________________________________ Bob Fossum, CRWD Monitoring Program Manager,

____________________ Date

_____________________________________________ Britta Belden, CRWD Monitoring Coordinator

____________________ Date

1

Table of Contents 1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 5 1.1 Program Background .................................................................................................................. 5 1.2

Program Description ................................................................................................................... 6

1.3 Quality Objectives and Criteria ..................................................................................................... 10 1.4 Monitoring Variables and Frequency............................................................................................ 10 2.0 Program Organization and Responsibilities .......................................................................................... 12 2.1 Capitol Region Watershed District Responsibilities ................................................................. 12 2.2 2.3

Laboratory Service Responsibilities ......................................................................................... 13 Stakeholders, Partners, and Agencies Responsibilities ............................................................. 13

2.4 Relationship of QAPP to Other Guidance Documents ................................................................. 13 3.0 Field Measurement Equipment ............................................................................................................. 14 3.1 ISCO 6712 Automated Sampler ............................................................................................... 14 3.2 ISCO 2100 Flow Modules ........................................................................................................ 15 3.3 ISCO Model 750 ........................................................................................................................... 16 3.4 Field Equipment Maintenance and Calibration ............................................................................. 16 4.0 Field Sampling Methods ....................................................................................................................... 17 4.1 Field Activity Preparation and Field Decisions ........................................................................ 17 4.2

Sampling Procedures ................................................................................................................ 17 4.2.1 Flow-Weighted Composite Sampling Procedure ......................................................... 18 4.2.2

4.3

4.4

Grab Sampling Procedures .......................................................................................... 19

Sample Bottle Preparation and Equipment Cleaning ................................................................ 21 4.3.1 4.3.2

ISCO Sampler Bottles and Equipment Cleaning ......................................................... 21 MCES Laboratory Submission Containers and Preservatives ..................................... 22

4.3.3

Private Laboratory Submission Containers and Preservatives..................................... 22

QA/QC Sampling Methods ....................................................................................................... 22 4.4.1

Equipment Blank Sampling Method ............................................................................ 23

4.4.2

Composite Duplicate Sampling Method ...................................................................... 23

4.4.3 Grab Replicate Sampling Method.................................................................................... 24 5.0 Quality Assurance Objectives ............................................................................................................... 25 5.1 Precision.................................................................................................................................... 26 5.2

Accuracy ................................................................................................................................... 27

5.3

Completeness ............................................................................................................................ 27

5.4

Sensitivity ................................................................................................................................. 28

5.5

Comparability ........................................................................................................................... 28

5.6

Representativeness .................................................................................................................... 28

6.0 Field and Sample Custody Documentation ........................................................................................... 30 6.1 Field Forms ............................................................................................................................... 30 6.2

Analytical Data Review ............................................................................................................ 31

2

6.3

Sample Identification ................................................................................................................ 31

6.4 6.5

Chain of Custody ...................................................................................................................... 32 Sample Handling and Transport ............................................................................................... 32

7.0 Quality Assurance Procedures .............................................................................................................. 33 7.1 Laboratory Quality Assurance Procedures ............................................................................... 33 7.2 CRWD Quality Assurance Procedures ........................................................................................ 33

7.3

7.2.1

Data Management ........................................................................................................ 33

7.2.2

Data Review and Validation ........................................................................................ 34

Corrective Action ...................................................................................................................... 38

8.0 Data Assessment and Reporting ........................................................................................................... 38 8.1 Internal Quality Assessments .................................................................................................... 38 8.2

Electronic Data Reporting......................................................................................................... 39

8.3

Annual Reporting of Monitoring Data ...................................................................................... 39

9.0 References ............................................................................................................................................. 40

3

List of Tables Table 1

2018 CRWD Monitoring Station Locations

Table 2

Monitoring Parameters, Minimum Frequencies, and Typical Frequencies.

Table 3

2018 CRWD Monitoring Personnel

Table 4

Types of Equipment Blanks Performed by CRWD

Table 5

2018 Duplicate and Replicate Naming Conventions for CRWD Full Water Quality sites

Table 6

QA/QC Methods Employed to Reach QAOs

Table 7

Laboratory Sample Parameters, Analytical Method, and Holding Times

Table 8

WISKI Quality Codes and Standard Remarks

Table 9

Steps for various flow data editing scenarios in WISKI List of Figures

Figure 1

2018 CRWD Monitoring Station Location Map

Figure 2

Flow chart of monitoring seasons, flow event types, and sample collection methods

List of Attachments Appendix A

CRWD Organizational Chart

Appendix B

Field Standard Operating Procedures

Appendix C

Sample Chain of Custody

Appendix D

Laboratory Quality Assurance Manual and Standard Operating Procedures Distribution List

Name

Title/Organization

Mark Doneux

Administrator, CRWD

Bob Fossum

MRM Division Manager, CRWD

Britta Suppes

Monitoring Coordinator, CRWD

Joe Sellner

Water Resource Technician, CRWD

Sarah Wein

Water Resource Technician, CRWD

Mark Houle Anna Eleria

Water Resource Technician, CRWD Planning, Projects, and Grants Program Manager CRWD

Forrest Kelley

Regulatory Division Manager, CRWD

4

Address 1410 Energy Park Drive, St. 4, St. Paul, MN 55108 1410 Energy Park Drive, St. 4, St. Paul, MN 55108 1410 Energy Park Drive, St. 4, St. Paul, MN 55108 1410 Energy Park Drive, St. 4, St. Paul, MN 55108 1410 Energy Park Drive, St. 4, St. Paul, MN 55108 1410 Energy Park Drive, St. 4, St. Paul, MN 55108 1410 Energy Park Drive, St. 4, St. Paul, MN 55108 1410 Energy Park Drive, St. 4, St. Paul, MN 55108

E-mail mark@capitolregionwd.org bob@capitolregionwd.org britta@capitolregionwd.org joe@capitolregionwd.org sarah@capitolregionwd.org mark@capitolregionwd.org anna@capitolregionwd.org forrest@capitolregionwd.org

1.0 Introduction This Monitoring Quality Assurance Program Plan (QAPP) guides water quality and quantity monitoring for the Capitol Region Watershed District (CRWD). It outlines sample collection and analysis procedures.

1.1

Program Background

CRWD is a special purpose unit of government in Ramsey County, Minnesota that manages and protects water resources within its watershed boundaries. CRWD is a 41-square mile watershed nested in the Upper Mississippi River basin that contains portions of five cities, including Falcon Heights, Lauderdale, Maplewood, Roseville, and Saint Paul. CRWD is highly urbanized with a population of 245,000 and 42% impervious surface coverage. All runoff from CRWD eventually discharges to the Mississippi River from 42 outfall locations along a 13-mile reach.

The water resources within the District (streams, lakes, wetlands, and stormwater) are monitored by CRWD in addition to other partnering entities. CRWD monitors streams, stormwater, and best management practices (BMPs) within the District. Lakes water quality monitoring is completed by Ramsey County Public Works (RCPW).

The Mississippi River is monitored by Metropolitan

Council Environmental Services (MCES), the United States Geological Survey (USGS), the Army Corps of Engineers, and the Minnesota Pollution Control Agency (MPCA). The City of St. Paul also monitors stormwater water quality and BMP performance at several locations throughout the District.

The primary objectives of the CRWD monitoring program are to identify water quality problems, quantify the subwatershed runoff pollutant loadings to the Mississippi River or other receiving water bodies, evaluate the effectiveness of BMPs, provide data for the calibration of hydrologic, hydraulic, and water quality models, and promote understanding of District water resources and water quality.

CRWD also conducts stormwater monitoring to assist the City of St. Paul in meeting the monitoring requirements for the Phase I Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) Permit (MPCA, 2016).

5

1.2

Program Description

CRWD operates several monitoring stations to collect data that helps meet the goals of the monitoring program. Each monitoring station is strategically located throughout the District to gather meaningful data needed to meet the monitoring program goals. Data collected may also be needed to support a specific CRWD project. The types of data CRWD gathers includes: 1) Continuous flow data in storm sewers, stream channels, and BMPs; 2) Water quality data in storm sewers, streams, BMPs lakes, and wetlands; 3) Continuous level data in lakes, stormwater ponds, and BMPs; and, 4) Precipitation data from rain gauges.

Table 1 and Figure 1 show all monitoring station locations operated by CRWD in 2018. Stations categorized as “Full Water Quality” indicate that both flow (continuous) and water quality samples are measured and that the station is located in either a storm sewer, stream channel, or BMP. Stations listed as “Flow Loggers” measure the volume of water continuously flowing through a system. The “Level Logger” stations are measuring continuous water level in a lake, stormwater pond, or BMP. The “Rain Gauges” are measuring precipitation data from either (or both) manual or automated rain gauges during non-winter months. The “Grab Sample” stations are locations where only a water quality grab sample is taken during a targeted hydrologic event.

In 2018, the CRWD monitoring program includes 16 full water quality monitoring stations (Table 1; Figure 1). At full water quality stations, flow is conveyed as either event flow (stormwater, snowmelt, or illicit discharge) or baseflow through either a storm sewer, stream channel, or BMP. The majority of the full water quality stations monitored in 2018 are located in storm sewers.

Baseflow, or dry weather flow, is present in storm sewers at many full water quality monitoring stations. Baseflow at these stations is constant with continuous flow throughout the entire year and is generally driven by groundwater and surface water connections.

At all full water quality monitoring stations, flow data (level, velocity, discharge) is collected for both event flow and baseflow. Stations with baseflow are monitored year-round whereas stations that do not have baseflow are monitored seasonally from April to November when active runoff from precipitation is occurring. Water quality samples are also taken at these stations during both event flow and baseflow periods (if baseflow is present) via automated samplers and/or grab sample methods. Samples are analyzed for a suite of water quality parameters by an analytical laboratory.

The sample results are utilized in conjunction with the flow data to calculate loads of various

6

pollutants, such as total phosphorus (TP) and total suspended solids (TSS). Data are summarized and analyzed in an annual monitoring report and online in the CRWD Water Data Portal.

Flow logger stations are installed at 11 locations in 2018 to record water discharging through a storm sewer or from a surface water (Table 1; Figure 1). At these stations, continuous flow data (level, velocity, discharge) is measured and recorded seasonally from April to November. From the measured flow data, a volume of water discharged is calculated. Water quality samples are not taken at these locations.

Continuous water level data is collected at 27 level logger stations in 2018 (Table 1; Figure 1). Level loggers measure and record 15-minute data to observe water level fluctuations in lakes, stormwater ponds, and BMPs. Level logger stations are installed seasonally from April to November during open water periods. Water quality samples are not taken at these locations.

Precipitation stations measure rainfall amount and intensity using manual and automatic rain gauges at 6 locations in CRWD (Table 1; Figure 1). Precipitation stations are distributed across CRWD in order to capture the spatial variation in rainfall across the District. Rainfall is measured seasonally from April through November. Winter snowfall data is not collected by CRWD precipitation stations and is instead supplemented by external climate observation groups.

Water quality grab samples are taken at 15 stations in 2018 generally within 24 hours of a rain event (Table 1; Figure 1). The stations listed in Table 1 for grab samples each have a unique monitoring plan that requires a water quality grab sample to fulfill the requirements of the program or project in question. Grab samples may also be taken at stations that have an automated sampler installed during the monitoring season if the sampler is either not working or is not installed. Baseflow and event flow grab sampling procedures are described in Section 4.2.2.

7

Table 1: 2018 CRWD Monitoring Station Locations.

CRWD 2018 Monitoring Stations Flow Loggers

Full Water Quality a, b

St. Anthony Park

Hidden Falls Outlet East Kittsondale Phalen Creek

a, b

a, b

a, b

Trout Brook Outlet

a, b

Trout Brook-East Branch a, b

Level Loggers

b

Grab Sample

AHUG Level

CRWD Office

GC Clubhouse Pond

Como Outlet

Alameda Pond

MMCD Office

GC Parking Lot Pond

Hidden Falls 30" Pipe

Arlington-Jackson

St Paul Firestation

MOW - Central Deep

McCarrons Outlet

Como Lake Level

TBEB

MOW - Central Shallow

TBNS - Magnolia

Crosby Lake

Villa Park

MOW - East Deep

TBNS - Jenks

GC Clubhouse Pond

Western District Police

MOW - East Shallow

Trout Brook-West Branch a, b TBNS - Rose Overflow Villa Park Outlet b TBO - SP Tunnel Villa Park Inlet

Precipitation

AHUG Inlet

Upper Villa Bypass

GC East Pond

MOW - West Deep

GC Parking Lot Pond

MOW - West Shallow

Golf Course Pond

Sims-Agate Outlet

Como 3 a

VP - Out Overflow Channel McMurray Well

Upper Villa Cistern

Como 7 a

VP - In Overflow Channel

Midway Office Piezometer

Upper Villa Pipe Gallery

Lake McCarrons

Upper Villa-West

North Como 3 a

Loeb Lake

Upper Villa-Center

TBNS-Rose a

Sims-Agate

Upper Villa-East

TBNS-Stream Upper Villa Inlet

Victoria Park Pond

William St. Pond

Midway Office Inlet

a

a

Westminster-Mississippi William Street Pond Willow Reserve Albert SWP - EAST Aldine SWP Griggs SWP - NORTH Marion RG - NORTHWEST Oxford SWP - SOUTH Pillsbury RG - NORTH Syndicate RG Lexington Tree Trench Western Tree Trench 16

a

Station location is in a storm sewer

b

Station location observes continuous baseflow

11

27

8

6

15

Figure 1: 2018 CRWD Monitoring Station Location Map.

9

1.3 Quality Objectives and Criteria The primary goal of this QAPP is to define the data quality assurance goals and quality assurance procedures that are applicable to the CRWD monitoring program. The CRWD monitoring program strives to produce consistent and reliable data; however, non-routine situations may arise for rapid response monitoring (e.g. illicit discharge detection and elimination (IDDE)) or monitoring a new location. This plan includes best practices that can be applied to both routine and non-routine monitoring circumstances.

Water quality sample results collected through this monitoring program may indicate environmental and/or human health concerns that require corrective actions and/or long-term management decisions. Therefore, sampling and analysis must meet specified quality assurance and quality control objectives to accurately characterize the conditions within the district. This QAPP reflects the need for data of acceptable quality, while recognizing financial and technical constraints. The detailed data quality assurance objectives are discussed later in this plan.

1.4 Monitoring Variables and Frequency The types of water quality samples collected by the CRWD monitoring program are determined by the time of year, the flow event type, and the method of sample collection (automated versus grab) (Figure 2). At â&#x20AC;&#x153;full water qualityâ&#x20AC;? stations, automated samplers are installed for the duration of the field season, roughly April to November. Event samples are collected by the automated samplers during and/or after storm events, either as flow-weighted composite samples or as grab samples. At full water quality stations that have continuous baseflow, the automated samplers are programmed to take baseflow samples on a monthly basis during the field season as conditions allow. At these stations, baseflow samples are also taken during winter months (December-March) as grab samples because the automated samplers are not deployed during that time. Snowmelt grab samples are also taken at all full water quality stations if there are two consecutive days above freezing, and flow is entering the storm sewer.

The suite of water quality parameters that samples are tested for under the CRWD monitoring program are listed in Table 2. Water quality samples are analyzed for specific parameters generally at a minimum frequency defined in the City of St. Paulâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s MS4 Permit. Parameter analysis is also dependent on the amount of time that has passed since the sample was collected (holding time), the total sample volume, and the specific water quality concerns or sampling plan for a station.

10

Composite, after event Event flow Grab, during event

Field Season (April- November)

Winter

Baseflow (baseflow sites only)

Composite, monthly

Baseflow (baseflow sites only)

Grab, monthly

Snowmelt

Grab, as available

(December-March)

Figure 2: Flow chart of monitoring seasons, flow event types, and sample collection methods.

Table 2: Monitoring Parameters, Minimum Frequencies, and Typical Frequencies.

Parameter

Frequency (required by

Sample Type

Ammonia Nitrogen

Composite

BOD - Carbonaceous 5-day Cadmium Chloride Chromium Copper

Composite Composite Composite Composite Composite

E. coli Flow (from level and velocity)

Grab Measurement

Fluoride Hardness Lead Nickel

Composite Composite Composite Composite

Nitrite Plus Nitrate, Total (as N) Ortho Phosphate pH

MS4 permit)

Typical Frequency

Quarterly

35 per year

Grab Grab Grab Grab Grab

Quarterly Not Required 15 per year Not required Monthly

Quarterly 35 per year 35 per year 35 per year 35 per year 22 per year Every 15 minutes w/ sampler

Grab Grab Grab Grab

Quarterly Every 15 minutes w/ sampler Not Required Monthly Monthly Not Required

Composite Composite Composite or Grab

15 per year Quarterly Quarterly

35 per year Quarterly Quarterly

Potassium

Composite or Grab

Not Required

4 per year (For illicit discharge)

Sulfate Surfactants Total Dissolved Solids Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen Total Phosphorus Total Suspended Solids

Composite or Grab Composite or Grab Composite Composite Composite Composite

2 per Year Not Required Quarterly 15 per year 15 per year 15 per year

Quarterly 4 per year (For illicit discharge) 35 per year 35 per year 35 per year 35 per year

Volatile Suspended Solids Zinc

Composite Composite or Grab

15 per year Monthly

35 per year 35 per year

or or or or or

or or or or

11

4 per year (For illicit discharge) 35 per year 35 per year 35 per year

2.0 Program Organization and Responsibilities Personnel associated with the CRWD monitoring program and their contact information are presented in Table 3. Monitoring is overseen by the Program Manager and Monitoring Coordinator.

Water Resource Technicians are responsible for the majority of the field work, with occasional help from other CRWD staff. Technicians are also responsible for reviewing data and assessing the QA/QC practices outlined in Section 4.4. The complete CRWD organizational chart can be found in Appendix A.

Table 3: 2018 CRWD Monitoring Personnel.

Position

Name*

Organization

Phone Number

Program Manager

Bob Fossum

CRWD

651-644-8888

Monitoring Coordinator

Britta Belden

CRWD

651-644-8888

Quality Assurance Manager

Anna Eleria

CRWD

651-644-8888

Water Resource Technician

Joe Sellner

CRWD

651-644-8888

Water Resource Technician

Sarah Wein

CRWD

651-644-8888

Water Resource Technician

Mark Houle

CRWD

651-644-8888

Water Resource Intern

TBD

CRWD

651-644-8888

* Staff are subject to change

2.1

Capitol Region Watershed District Responsibilities

CRWD staff are responsible for coordinating and conducting field operations for the monitoring program and meeting the quality assurance objectives outlined by the QAPP. District staff install, operate, and maintain monitoring equipment at each of the monitoring stations, collect water quality samples, download hydrologic data, select new stations for monitoring, and remove stations no longer needed. District staff are also responsible for reviewing analytical laboratory and hydrologic (level, flow, and discharge) data for quality assurance. CRWD staff are responsible for preparing annual work plans and scoping documents, filling out laboratory sample chain of custody (COC) documents, preparing annual reports, and submitting data to the City of St. Paul, and other partners and stakeholders.

12

2.2

Laboratory Service Responsibilities

Water quality samples are currently submitted to Metropolitan Council Environmental Services (MCES) for analysis. The analytical laboratory is responsible for receiving samples from CRWD, receiving and processing chain of custody documents, analyzing samples based on the method specification, and providing sample results. The analytical laboratory is also responsible for ensuring all QA/QC procedures are in place and followed for all laboratory functions. The analytical laboratoryâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s QA/QC procedures, including organizational structure, laboratory procedures and qualifications, can be referenced in the Laboratory Quality Assurance Management Plan (QAM) in Appendix C. Other qualified analytical laboratories may be contracted to perform the routine analytical work or work beyond the scope of this QAPP. Prior to contracting with other laboratories for analytical services, CRWD staff will review their Quality Assurance Manual and ensure it is consistent with the CRWD QAPP. Laboratory reports containing results of submitted water quality samples are accessed by CRWD from the MCES online database once per month. Records of laboratory results are saved electronically to the CRWD server and are imported into the WISKI database.

2.3

Stakeholders, Partners, and Agencies Responsibilities

CRWDâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Board of Managers, Citizen Advisory Committee, other District staff, and the general public provide input on CRWD monitoring activities. Other units of government and consultants can suggest possible areas of collaboration or express areas of environmental concern, which also helps direct the CRWD monitoring program. Citizen groups, neighborhood groups, and city councils have historically been sources of direction for monitoring priorities. The MPCA, research institutions (e.g. the University of Minnesota), and MCES review annual reports and data. The cities of St. Paul, Falcon Heights, Roseville, Lauderdale, and Maplewood review annual reports as well.

2.4 Relationship of QAPP to Other Guidance Documents This QAPP is one of several documents that guide the CRWD monitoring program. Contained in this QAPP are summaries of the program design, sampling methods, analytical procedures, and data review protocols. The CRWD monitoring program Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) provide a 13

more in-depth description of sampling procedures, field analysis laboratory analysis, and data review (Appendix B). This QAPP and the CRWD monitoring program SOPs are available to staff for electronic review on the CRWD server and in printed form. SOPs are compiled annually into a printed handbook and are available to staff in monitoring trucks and the shop area.

3.0 Field Measurement Equipment This section outlines the field measurement equipment used in CRWDâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s monitoring program. At each monitoring station, equipment is either housed in a steel box enclosure above-ground or hung in a manhole by a suspension bracket. Each full water quality monitoring station consists of an automated sampler with intake tubing and sieve, a flow logger with a sensor, and a power source (i.e. deep-cycle battery, 6-volt batteries, or a solar panel). CRWD uses two different sizes of ISCO 6712 automated samplers: compact and full-sized. For measuring and recording level and flow data, ISCO 2150 flow modules or ISCO 750 flow modules are used. At each station, level and velocity are measured by the sensor that is mounted on a plate in the center of the channel or pipe and then recorded by the flow logger in 5 or 15-minute intervals. From the level and velocity measurements, discharge (Q) is calculated by multiplying the water level by the channel shape or pipe diameter using Equation 1: đ?&#x2018;¸đ?&#x2018;¸ = đ?&#x2018;¨đ?&#x2018;¨ Ă&#x2014; đ?&#x2018;˝đ?&#x2018;˝

(Equation 1)

Other standard equipment for each monitoring station includes a power source (12-volt marine battery or solar setup) and connection cables for ISCO 6712 units. Periodic inspections of field measurement equipment and their components will be performed to assure their use as specified in their respective manuals and this QAPP.

3.1

ISCO 6712 Automated Sampler

ISCO 6712 automated samplers are used to collect flow-weighted composite samples during the monitoring season. Discrete 200-mL samples are extracted by the automated sampler at a preprogrammed flow-paced rate into a 24 bottle carousel and then combined into one composite sample to be submitted for analysis. Sample volume calibrations are done when the sampler is

14

installed, and as needed (Section 3.4). The procedure for flow-weighted composite sampling is described in Section 4.2.1.

Two different sizes of ISCO 6712 automated samplers are used: â&#x20AC;˘

ISCO 6712 Full-Size Portable Sampler: 24 1000-mL ISCO sampler bottles. Collects four 200-ml samples per bottle, for a total of 96 discrete samples.

â&#x20AC;˘

ISCO 6712c Compact Portable Sampler: 24 500-mL ISCO sampler bottles. Collects two 200-ml samples per bottle, for a total of 48 discrete samples.

Each automated sampler has internal desiccant packets placed inside the electronic control panel to absorb moisture. The ISCO 6712 sampler instruction manual is available in the CRWD office and online and provides directions for operating, maintaining, and calibrating samplers (ISCO, 2015).

3.2

ISCO 2100 Flow Modules

ISCO 2100 area-velocity sensors and 2150 flow modules are programmed to continuously measure water level and velocity at 15-minute intervals. During events with increased flow, measurements are taken at 5-minute intervals. Most stations with the ISCO 2100 setup are equipped with a series of modules, including the ISCO 2150, 2105, and 2191 modules. ISCO 2150 modules log flow data measured by an area-velocity (AV) sensor that is mounted in the center of the channel or pipe. Water levels are measured by the AV sensor using a pressure transducer and velocity is detected by the sensor transmitting a continuous ultrasonic wave, and then measuring the frequency shift of returned echoes reflected by air bubbles or particles in the flow. The ISCO 2105 modules interface between the ISCO 6712 sampler and the 2150 area velocity module, triggering the sampler to collect samples based on a pre-programmed water level, velocity, or flow threshold as measured by the sensor. ISCO 2191 modules house battery units to power the all of the 2100 modules.

Each module has internal an desiccant cartridge to prevent moisture inside. Desiccant indicators located inside the ISCO 2150, 2105, and 2191 modules are inspected regularly and exchanged as needed. The ISCO 2150 module instruction manual is available in the CRWD office and online and provides directions for operation, maintenance, and calibration (ISCO, 2012a & ISCO 2012b).

15

3.3 ISCO Model 750 ISCO area-velocity sensors and 750 flow modules are programmed to continuously measure water level and velocity at 15-minute intervals. Flow is measured using submerged sensors that are mounted in the flow stream. ISCO 750 modules have no temperature coefficient calibration. Water levels are measured by the AV sensor using a pressure transducer and velocity is detected by the sensor transmitting a continuous ultrasonic wave, and then measure the frequency shift of returned echoes reflected by air bubbles or particles in the flow.

The ISCO 750 modules have an internal desiccant cartridge to prevent moisture inside. Desiccant cartridges are inspected at each site visit, and exchanged as needed. The ISCO Model 750 instruction manual is available in the office and online and provides directions for operation, maintenance, and calibration (ISCO, 2013).

3.4 Field Equipment Maintenance and Calibration CRWD staff monitor the performance of equipment and instruments in the field during routine site visits. CRWD staff will work to resolve deficiencies as they are discovered, and replace components as needed. If necessary, equipment can be tested in the CRWD shop using a controlled level testing apparatus and/or a velocity testing flume. Equipment may be sent back to the manufacturer if deficiencies cannot be resolved by CRWD staff. The Monitoring Coordinator will provide the final decision on the usability of damaged equipment.

ISCO 6712 samplers require frequent attention to assure their intended use. Intake tubing is replaced annually to prevent sample contamination. Pump tubing is replaced after 1,000,000 turns of the sampler pump or if wear or damage is visible.

ISCO 6712 samplers and attached flow modules and AV sensors need to record accurate level measurements and pump precise sample volumes. To ensure accuracy, these mechanisms must be calibrated at the time of installation and as needed throughout the field season. To calibrate sample volumes, the sampler is manually triggered to pump a set volume (typically 200-mL). The pumped volume is measured in a graduated cylinder. The process is repeated until the desired sample volume is attained. ISCO AV sensors are calibrated once per month while installed. To calibrate the level, a reference stage is manually measured in the flow in front of the sensor with a ruler. This is compared against the real-time measurement logged by the 2150 module. If the module measurement and the reference measurement differ by more than 0.1 foot, the difference is noted in the field notes to be 16

later adjusted during the database QA/QC data editing process in the WISKI database. No adjustments should be made to the instrument in the field.

4.0 Field Sampling Methods This section defines procedures to be used for collecting and handling water quality samples.

Unforeseen circumstances may require deviations from these procedures. Such deviations will be approved by the Monitoring Coordinator prior to sampling. If prior approval cannot be obtained, deviations from the established procedures will be recorded and the need for resampling will be evaluated at that time.

4.1

Field Activity Preparation and Field Decisions

Upon arrival at each monitoring location, field conditions are noted in the electronic field form. Any unusual condition will be recorded on the electronic field form. Conditions that may interfere with obtaining representative analytical results will be rectified before sampling proceeds and noted in the field form.

Minor changes to the field protocol can be made by the field technicians if prior approval cannot be obtained. Changes will be reviewed with the Monitoring Coordinator retroactively to decide whether or not locations need to be re-sampled. For significant changes to this protocol, approval will be obtained in advance from the Monitoring Coordinator. The Monitoring Coordinator will review any changes to the protocol that may adversely affect results before proceeding. Any deviations, minor or significant, are reviewed by the Monitoring Coordinator during the writing of the annual report.

4.2

Sampling Procedures

CRWD collects two different types of samples: flow-weighted composite samples and instantaneous discrete grab samples. Composite samples can only be taken by automated samplers and are generally taken for baseflow, storm, and illicit discharge events during the monitoring season while samplers are installed (April-November). Grab samples are taken when automated samplers are not

17

installed or if they are malfunctioning during the monitoring season. E. coli samples are always taken as grab samples.

4.2.1

Flow-Weighted Composite Sampling Procedure

Composite sampling by an automated sampler is conducted to collect a representative sample of a baseflow, storm, or illicit discharge event. The following equipment is used to collect composite samples: •

ISCO 6712 Full Size Portable Sampler or 6712c Compact Portable Sampler

•

24 sterilized 1000-mL or 500-mL plastic ISCO sampler bottles and caps arranged in a ISCO carousel configuration

•

8-L or 14-Liter churn, clean

•

Clean, labeled, 4-Liter laboratory submission container, or various laboratory submission containers with preservatives for private laboratory (if needed)

•

Cooler

The automated samplers are programmed to collect a discrete sub-sample for a given volume of water that passes through a channel at a flow-paced rate. Discrete 200-mL sub-samples are collected into 500-mL ISCO sampler bottles in compact samplers (48 sub-samples maximum per sampler), and into 1000-mL ISCO sampler bottles in standard samplers (96 sub-samples maximum per sampler).

To collect storm composites, samplers are programmed with a trigger and a pacing to collect discrete sub-samples of the event. Trigger and pacing values may vary throughout the season, depending on flow conditions, antecedent moisture conditions, expected rainfall amounts, and other factors. If an illicit discharge is suspected, a sampler can be programmed with an adjusted trigger and pacing in an attempt to collect a representative sample of that event.

Technicians retrieve full or partially full carousels from sites with automated samplers following a sampling event. Staff place ISCO sampler bottle caps on each sample bottle and transport them to the CRWD office to be composited in a churn.

A churn is used to composite discrete samples from individual bottles into one homogenous sample.

To composite, each ISCO sampler bottle in a carousel is vigorously shaken to agitate any sediment

18

that has settled out. The contents of each bottle are dumped into an 8-L or 14- L churn and then mixed for 30 seconds using the agitator. While being continuously mixed, the now composited sample is poured into a 4-L laboratory sample container. Composited samples are labeled by station name and sample date/time and then placed in a refrigerator at about 4 degrees Celsius. Within 24 hours of compositing, samples are placed in coolers, and transported to the analytical laboratory for analysis with a chain of custody accompanying each sample.

If a carousel of samples exceeds the 14-L churn volume, sample bottles are divided into two sample sets. The above process is followed for each sample set; but, only 2,000 mL of each composited sample sets are distributed into the 4,000 mL submission containers.

Base composite samples are collected monthly while ISCO samplers are installed during the field season. Sampler programs are paced in order to collect a full carousel (24 bottles) in approximately 24 hours at base flow levels. Samples are collected after the 24-hour cycle and taken back to the CRWD office to be composited using the same procedures for compositing storm samples.

4.2.2

Grab Sampling Procedures

Grab sampling is done in conjunction with composite sampling or as a standalone procedure. The following equipment is used to collect grab samples: •

Sampling bucket and rope, clean

•

Clean, labeled, 4-Liter laboratory sample container, or various laboratory sample containers with preservatives for private laboratory (as needed)

•

ISCO 6712 Full Size Portable Sampler or 6712c Compact Portable Sampler pump, or other external pump (Pump Collection method only)

•

Cooler and ice

If no composite sample is taken during an event due to equipment failure, a grab sample can be taken instead. At stations without an ISCO 6712 sampler installed, grab samples are collected. Outside of the monitoring season, base grab samples are taken once per month. Snowmelt grab sampling and illicit discharge grab sampling are also conducted when possible. E. coli grab sampling is conducted once per month during base grabs or as needed during storm or snowmelt events.

19

Grab samplers are taken from the middle of the flow to collect well-mixed, representative samples.

The sample is then poured directly into a clean laboratory sample container. The container is capped, stored in a cooler, and sent directly to the lab for analysis. Alternatively, samples can be transported back to CRWD, placed in the refrigerator, and brought to the lab within 24 hours for analysis (depending on the holding time of the parameter being analyzed). Three variations of full water quality grab sampling and one version of E. coli grab sampling methods are discussed below.

4.2.2.1

Bucket and Rope Sampling

Bucket and rope sampling is the most common way to collect full water quality grab samples, since many sites are below ground and most easily accessed from the surface. A sampling bucket with rope is lowered from the surface and triple-rinsed with the water being sampled. Following the triple rinse, a sample can be collected and poured directly into clean laboratory sample containers. Sample containers are labeled by station name and sample date/time.

4.2.2.2

Direct Grab Sampling

Samples are occasionally collected directly from the water source if the water body is at the surface or staff has used confined space entry to access an underground storm sewer. Similar to bucket and rope sampling, the sampling bucket should be triple-rinsed and poured into the clean laboratory sample containers. If taken from a stream, samples should be taken facing upstream, from the center, while ensuring that the stream bottom is not disturbed in the process. If taken from a pond, samples should be taken from a consistent location, slightly below the surface, with floating vegetation moved away, and while ensuring no pond bottom debris is disturbed in the process. If taken from an outlet structure, samples should be taken as they flow over the outlet structure. Occasionally, the laboratory sample container may be filled directly from the outlet structure. In this instance, the sample can be collected directly into the laboratory sample container; no triple-rinse is required.

4.2.2.3

Pump Collection

If the above grab sampling methods are not possible, a grab sample can be collected using the ISCO 6712 pump or other external pump. To use this method, the sampler is set to pump in reverse and the sampling line is purged for 30 seconds. Then, the sampler is set to pump forward for 30 seconds before filling a laboratory sample container. This method is often employed at East Kittsondale and the exfiltration monitoring sites.

20

4.2.2.4

E. coli Grab Sampling

E. coli grab samples are taken in conjunction with base composites, base grabs, storm composites, storm grabs, snowmelt grabs, and illicit discharge samples. The following equipment is used to collect E. coli grab samples: •

E. coli Sampler and Rope

•

NASCO Whirl-Pak® Sample Bags, or other E. coli laboratory submission containers

•

Small cooler with ice pack

A sealed, sterile, 18-ounce NASCO Whirl-Pak® is opened on-site and placed in a sampler. Care is taken to ensure the Whirl-Pak® is not contaminated by field staff fingers, sewer side walls, or other contaminants. In some circumstances, the Whirl-Pack® can be filled without the sampler. If this is the case, the Whirl-Pak® is directly filled with sample water while being held at the tabs, with care taken to ensure it is not contaminated by field staff fingers or other contaminants. The sample must be taken directly from the water source. The sample is put in a small cooler with ice packs immediately and transported to the laboratory within 6 hours.

4.3 4.3.1

Sample Bottle Preparation and Equipment Cleaning ISCO Sampler Bottles and Equipment Cleaning

Flow-weighted composite samples are collected into either 500-mL or 1000-mL ISCO automated sampler carousel bottles. To decontaminate used bottles, they are washed in a Liqui-Nox and hot water solution, scrubbed with a nylon brush, rinsed with hot water, and loaded into the dishwasher for sterilization. Unused bottles that shared a carousel with bottles containing samples are also loaded into a dishwasher for sterilization, but do not require the Liqui-Nox and hot water pre-wash.

Bottle caps are also dunked in a Liqui-Nox and hot water solution. They are then placed in the dishwasher in silverware containers, not to be more than ¾ full. The shop dishwasher is run without soap on the “Pots and Pans” cycle to sterilize the bottles.

Once all bottles have been removed from the sampler carousel bases, the bases are rinsed with tap water, scrubbed (if needed), and placed out to air dry. Clean bottles are loaded into carousels and stored on a shelf in the CRWD equipment shop. Clean caps are separated by size and stored in clean containers.

21

Churns may be reused between the compositing of multiple sample carousels. Between each composite, churn components are triple-rinsed in hot tap water after each sample is composited.

After all samples have been composited for the day, churns are washed with Liqui-Nox and hot water, rinsed, and loaded into the dishwasher. The dishwasher is run without soap on the “Pots and Pans” setting to sterilize the churns.

4.3.2

MCES Laboratory Submission Containers and Preservatives

Composited samples and grab samples are filled in 4-Liter containers to be submitted to Metropolitan Council Environmental Services (MCES) laboratory. MCES neither requires CRWD to preserve samples nor to transport samples on ice (with the exception of E. coli samples). Prior to delivery, samples may be stored in a refrigerator at approximately 4 degrees Celsius for up to 24 hours.

At the laboratory, MCES preserves some samples in order to process certain parameters. The MCES Quality Assurance Manual (QAM) includes specific procedures for the following: laboratory submission container cleaning, testing, labeling and storage, and preparation (Appendix D).

4.3.3

Private Laboratory Submission Containers and Preservatives

CRWD primarily uses the MCES laboratory for sample analysis; however, private laboratories may be used periodically for various sample analyses. Private labs may be used for the following reasons: •

CRWD intent to investigate alternative labs

•

Need for specialized sampling parameters for which MCES is not equipped to perform analysis

•

MCES is temporarily unable to process samples due to logistical constraints

The private laboratory QAM shall include specific procedures for the following: sample container cleaning, testing, labeling and storage, preparation, and addition of preservatives. All chemical preservatives added to containers in the laboratory will meet the criteria of the laboratory’s QA/QC program as reflected in the QAM.

4.4

QA/QC Sampling Methods

This section defines specific quality control samples that will be collected in the field. Equipment blanks, field blanks, and field duplicate samples are submitted to the analytical laboratories to provide the means to assess the quality of the data resulting from the field sampling procedures.

22

How these samples are used to meet the quality assurance objectives is discussed further in Section 5.0.

4.4.1

Equipment Blank Sampling Method

Equipment blanks verify the effectiveness of the equipment decontamination procedures. Equipment blanks are conducted after various pieces of equipment used by the CRWD monitoring staff are cleaned. To collect an equipment blank, analyte-free, deionized water is poured into or through the container or equipment in question. Information regarding the types of blanks, associated frequency, and when the blank will be conducted can be found in Table 4. Blank samples must account for 10% of all samples submitted, which equates to the frequencies listed in Table 4 for an average sampling year. Equipment blank samples will be identified according to a table of aliases listed in the “Equipment Blank SOP,” which can be found in Appendix B.

Table 4: Types of Equipment Blanks Performed by CRWD. Blank Type

Frequency

When to Complete

ISCO Sampler Blank

3 sites,3 times/year

Grab Sampler Blank

5 times/year

During level calibrations In the field after a suite of grab samples, after a triple rinse of DI water

Churn Blank

10 times/year

In the shop after triple rinse of tap water

Sampler Bottle Blank

10 times/year

After cleaning process and dishwashing cycle

MCES Bottle Blank

10 times/year

Anytime

Equipment blanks are analyzed for the target parameters in Table 4. Blank laboratory sample containers will be identical to the 4,000 mL sample containers used for general sample analysis for these parameter groups. All containers shall be pre-cleaned within the laboratory’s QA/QC program in the same manner as primary sample bottles for laboratory submission. Equipment blank results greater than the reporting limit for a parameter will be flagged for blank contamination. Field notes and sampling procedures will be reviewed to determine possible sources for contamination.

4.4.2

Composite Duplicate Sampling Method

Composite duplicate samples are samples collected in order to evaluate the sampling procedure and laboratory precision. Duplicate samples should theoretically represent the parameter(s) of interest at a given point in space and time equally. Duplicate samples are collected from the same sampling device and split into two separate laboratory sample containers. Duplicate samples will be submitted to the laboratory as blind or masked samples using a sample alias name (see Table 5 for naming 23

conventions). The true identity of the sample will be recorded in the field form. Field duplicate samples will be collected and submitted at the minimum 10% of total samples per year (approximately one per composite sampling trip).

Table 5: 2018 Duplicate and Replicate Naming Conventions for CRWD Full Water Quality stations.

Site

Duplicate Alias

Replicate Alias

St. Anthony Park

CRWD100

CRWD200

Hidden Falls Outlet

CRWD101

CRWD201

East Kittsondale

CRWD102

CRWD202

Phalen Creek

CRWD103

CRWD203

Trout Brook Outlet

CRWD104

CRWD204

Trout Brook-East Branch

CRWD105

CRWD205

Trout Brook-West Branch

CRWD106

CRWD206

Villa Park Outlet

CRWD107

CRWD207

Villa Park Inlet

CRWD108

CRWD208

Upper Villa Inlet

CRWD109

CRWD209

Como 3

CRWD110

CRWD210

Como 7

CRWD111

CRWD211

AHUG Inlet

CRWD112

CRWD212

TBNS-Rose

CRWD113

CRWD213

TBNS-Stream

CRWD114

CRWD214

Midway Office Inlet

CRWD118

CRWD218

North Como 3

CRWD119

CRWD219

4.4.3 Grab Replicate Sampling Method Grab replicates are defined as independent samples collected as close as possible to the same point in space and time as another scheduled grab sample. Grab sampling equipment is used to extract two separate samples from the same source. Replicate samples are stored in individual laboratory sample containers and are analyzed independently.

Field replicate samples will be collected and submitted at the minimum frequency of 10% of samples throughout the sampling season (approximately one per grab sampling event). Replicate sample labels will be masked with an alias (Table 5) on both laboratory sample container labels and COCs, with the true identity noted in the field forms.

24

5.0 Quality Assurance Objectives The overall objectives of the CRWD QAPP is to develop and implement procedures for sample collection, laboratory analyses, and data reporting that will provide a high level of data. Six specific Quality Assurance Objectives (QAOs) are defined below. This section provides goals to meet the QAO of precision, accuracy, representatives, completeness, comparability, and analytical sensitivity, along with the means by which they are measured. Table 6 lists all QA/QC methods employed by CRWD and the MCES laboratory to ensure that QAOs are being met.

Table 6: QA/QC Methods Employed to Reach QAOs. Sample Type

Description

Function

Method Blank

Reagent-grade water carried through sample preparation and analytical procedural method

To assess contamination from the laboratory preparation and analytical procedure

Laboratory Control Sample

Reagent-grade water spiked with known concentrations of analytes of interest

To determine the accuracy and consistency of instrument calibration

Quality Control Sample

A second source sample evaluated for analytes of interest

To verify purity and preparation of the calibration standards

Matrix Spike/Spike Duplicate

Separate aliquot of sample spike with known concentrations of the analytes

To determine the ability to recover the known analyte or compound in that sample matrix

Surrogate Spikes

Analytes, similar to those being evaluated, added at known concentration (organic analysis only)

To measure the performance of the analysis and to measure any matrix interferences

Internal Standards

Analyte, similar to those being evaluated, added to a sample at a constant concentration

To measure the relative responses of other method analytes and surrogates in the solution

Equipment Blank

Reagent-grade de-ionized water subject to sample collection, processing, and analysis

To evaluate contamination resulting from successive use of sampling equipment

Composite Duplicate

Duplicate of event sampling procedures

To estimate laboratory and sampling procedure precision

Grab Replicate

Two discrete samples taken concurrently from the same source

To estimate laboratory and sampling procedure precision

25

5.1

Precision

Precision measures the reproducibility of measurements under a given set of conditions. Laboratory precision is determined by replicate analysis on a single sample, such as laboratory blank samples, laboratory spiked samples, field samples, or spiked field samples. Laboratory precision frequency is dictated by the laboratoryâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s QAM. Total precision, which combines both laboratory precision and field precision, is measured using masked field duplicate samples. Field duplicate samples provide precision information for the entire measurement system, including sample acquisition, handling, shipping, storage, preparation, and analysis.

Relative percent differences (%RPD) will be calculated for each pair of duplicate samples (laboratory replicates or field duplicate samples). When both values are reported as detected values, Equation 2 is used to determine precision:

% RPD =

Where:

S-D x 100 (S + D) / 2

(Equation 2)

S = First sample value D = Second sample value

CRWD upholds a target RPD value of 20%. If this threshold is exceeded, data will be flagged for that particular parameter.

26

5.2

Accuracy

Accuracy measures the bias in a measurement system. Laboratory accuracy is measured using the analytical results of matrix spike/matrix spike duplicates (MS/MSD), laboratory control samples/laboratory control sample duplicates (LCS/LCSD), as well as by instrument and method blank samples. To analyze MS/MSD samples, CRWD water samples are spiked with a known concentration of the analyte and compared against base levels in the original water sample.

LCS/LCSD utilizes the same process, but instead uses spiked pure water rather than sample water.

The percent recovery (%R) will be calculated using Equation 3:

%R =

Where:

A-B x 100 C

(Equation 3)

A = the analyte concentration determined from the spiked sample B = the native sample concentration of the unspiked sample C = the concentration of the spike added

Field accuracy is assessed conducting equipment blank samples. These samples are used to assess possible contamination in the sample collection procedures or sample bottle preparation processes. If samples are found to be contaminated, additional blank samples may be taken to identify the source of contamination.

5.3

Completeness

Completeness is a measure of the amount of valid data obtained from a measurement system compared to the amount expected to be obtained under normal conditions. For laboratory completeness, it is expected that the contracted laboratory will provide useable and acceptable data for at least 95 percent of all samples collected using the specified analytical method.

Field completeness is calculated using Equation 4 from the number of samples required by the city of Saint Paulâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s permit and CRWD project goals in a calendar year. đ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??śđ??ś =

đ?&#x2018;Łđ?&#x2018;Łđ?&#x2018;Łđ?&#x2018;Łđ?&#x2018;Łđ?&#x2018;Łđ?&#x2018;Łđ?&#x2018;Łđ?&#x2018;Łđ?&#x2018;Ł đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018; đ?&#x2018;&#x153;đ?&#x2018;&#x153;đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;? đ?&#x2018;Ąđ?&#x2018;Ąđ?&#x2018;Ąđ?&#x2018;Ąđ?&#x2018;Ąđ?&#x2018;Ąđ?&#x2018;Ąđ?&#x2018;Ąđ?&#x2018;Ąđ?&#x2018;Ą đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018; đ?&#x2018;&#x2019;đ?&#x2018;&#x2019;đ?&#x2018;&#x2019;đ?&#x2018;&#x2019;đ?&#x2018;&#x2019;đ?&#x2018;&#x2019;đ?&#x2018;&#x2019;đ?&#x2018;&#x2019;đ?&#x2018;&#x2019;đ?&#x2018;&#x2019;đ?&#x2018;&#x2019;đ?&#x2018;&#x2019;đ?&#x2018;&#x2019;đ?&#x2018;&#x2019;đ?&#x2018;&#x2019;đ?&#x2018;&#x2019;

27

(Equation 4)

All full water quality stations should have at least 12 storm samples submitted per year as well. The goal for stations with baseflow is 20 samples per year. Continuously recorded level, velocity, and temperature data should be collected at 15-minute increments for the duration of the monitoring season, approximately 260 days. CRWD upholds a target field completeness goal of 95%.

5.4

Sensitivity

The achievement of reporting limits depends on instrument sensitivity and matrix effects. Instrument sensitivity will be monitored by the laboratory. It is expected that the laboratory will meet the sensitivities as required by the sample matrix and composition. To ensure that the analytical data are useful, the reporting limit for a given analyte should be well below the lowest expected ambient environmental concentrations or below any applicable regulatory action levels. The laboratory target reporting limits and methods of the monitored parameters are presented in Table 7. The actual reporting limits achieved may depend on available sample volume, sample matrix interferences, and target and non-target parameter concentrations.

5.5

Comparability

Data comparability is the confidence with which one set of data from a particular site can be compared with another set from the same site. CRWD aims to use consistent field and laboratory methods for all sites from year to year, except where improvements are required for data quality.

Comparability will be evaluated by documenting that the sampling plan is followed or whether any deviations from the plan have been made. It will also be evaluated by comparing analytical results from QA/QC samples, such as matrix spikes, equipment blanks, field blanks, method blanks, field duplicates.

5.6

Representativeness

Representativeness expresses the degree to which a sample or analytical result accurately and precisely represents a characteristic of a population, parameter variations at a sampling point, a process condition, or an environmental condition. Representativeness is a qualitative parameter that is dependent upon the proper design of the sampling program and proper laboratory protocol.

28

In the case of the CRWD monitoring program, representativeness is assessed with respect to the watershed pollutant concentrations and loads. Pollutant concentrations and loads differ with space, time and flow conditions. Spatial representativeness is assured by monitoring multiple subwatersheds within the District. It is also assured at baseline sites by taking samples as close to the subwatershed outlet as possible, making the sample more representative of the entire subwatershed. To assure samples are representative with respect to time and flow conditions, samples are taken throughout the year across varying flow conditions. Storm composite samples should collect both the rising and recession limbs of the hydrograph. Representativeness will be assessed by the analysis of the field duplicate samples.

Table 7: Laboratory Sample Parameters, Analytical Method, and Holding Times.

Parameter Ammonia Nitrogen BOD â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 5 Day Carbonaceous Cadmium

Hold Time 28 Days

Analytical Method EPA 350.1 Rev 2.0

Method Detection Limit 0.005 mg/L

Reporting Limit 0.06 mg/L

0.2 mg/L

0.2 mg/L

48 Hours

SM 5210 B-2001, Hach 10360 Rev. 1.1

6 Months

EPA 200.8, Rev. 5.4

0.0002 mg/L

0.0005 mg/L

28 Days

SM 4500-Cl-E-1997

0.5 mg/L

2 mg/L

Chromium

6 Months

EPA 200.8, Rev. 5.4

0.00008 mg/L

0.00016 mg/L

Copper

6 Months

EPA 200.8, Rev. 5.4

0.0003 mg/L

0.0006 mg/L

N/A

1 MPN/100 mL

Chloride

SM 9223B-1997 (Colilert-18 Quanti

E. coli

6 Hours

Fluoride

28 Days

Hardness

28 Days

SM 2340B

N/A

5 mg/L

Lead

6 Months

EPA 200.8, Rev. 5.4

0.0001 mg/L

0.0005 mg/L

Nickel

6 Months

EPA 200.8, Rev. 5.4

0.0003 mg/L

0.0006 mg/L

Nitrate

28 Days

SM 4500-NO3 H-2000

0.01 mg/L

0.05 mg/L

Nitrite

28 Days

USGS I-4540-85A

0.003 mg/L

0.03 mg/L

Ortho-Phosphate

48 Hours

SM 4500-P F-199

0.005 mg/L

0.01 mg/L

Potassium

180 Days

EPA 200.8, Rev. 5.4

0.03 mg/L

1 mg/L

28 Days

EPA 300.0 Rev. 2.1

0.2 mg/L

0.5 mg/L

Sulfate Surfactants

Tray)

0.02 mg/L

48 Hours

0.10 mg/L

Total Dissolved Solids

7 Days

SM 2540 C-1997

5 mg/L

10 mg/L

Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen

28 Days

EPA 351.2 Rev 2.0

0.03 mg/L

0.1 mg/L

Total Phosphorus Total Suspended Solids Volatile Suspended Solids Zinc

28 Days

EPA 365.4, 1974

0.02 mg/L

0.05 mg/L

7 Days

SM 2540E-1997

1 mg/L

3 mg/L

7 Days

SM 2540E-1997

1 mg/L

2 mg/L

6 Months

EPA 200.8, Rev. 5.4

0.0008 mg/L

0.0016 mg/L

29

6.0 Field and Sample Custody Documentation It is vital to record notes on field conditions such as weather, deviations from written standard operating procedures, equipment condition, and other unusual conditions. Understanding the sample’s path from collection to analysis may address issues which may arise, such as sample contamination. Thus, field documentation is essential to assure data quality for the CRWD monitoring program.

6.1

Field Forms

Field forms are the primary means for documenting field activities of staff. Electronic field forms are filled out at each site visit and all sampling events. Field forms are created in Google Forms, and are stored in a cloud server. Field forms are backed up onto the CRWD server on a weekly basis.

The field form contains the following information: •

Date and time of site visit

•

List of field personnel present

•

Station name and activity

•

Instantaneous level, velocity, and discharge readings

•

Check boxes: system downloaded, site data checked, and desiccant changed

•

Sampler battery and programming information

•

For each composite sample:

•

-

Type of composite

-

Composite sample start date/time and end date/time

-

Number of samples, volume and bottle numbers filled

For each grab sample: -

Grab sample date/time

-

Number of grab samples

-

Type of grab sample(s) 30

•

Maintenance performed on-site

•

Notes

A quality control field form is also used to document information related to a duplicate, replicate, or blank sampling event. It contains fields to designate the type of quality control sample taken, the time and date a sample was taken, the alias given to the sample, and a field to make any notes. The quality control field forms are created in Google Forms and the response data is stored in a cloud server. The quality control field forms are backed up on the CRWD server on a weekly basis.

6.2

Analytical Data Review

Laboratory data is available to CRWD from MCES through the MCES online data portal on a continuous basis. Private laboratories send analytical data in an automated electronic report after analysis. CRWD staff review the data upon receipt. If any analytical data are initially flagged as outliers or otherwise erroneous, they are compared against the field form for that sampling event and historic sampling records. The laboratory reports are reviewed and processed in preparation of the data editing, data review, and compilation of the annual report.

6.3

Sample Identification

Water samples will be identified by the station location. Laboratory sample containers are typically labeled with the station name prior to use. Each laboratory sample container will be labeled with the following information using a waterproof marker on firmly affixed, water-resistant labels: •

Sample location

•

Sample collection date(s)

•

Sample collection time(s)

•

Parameter names/groups to be analyzed (Private Lab only)

•

Preservation method (Private Lab only)

QA/QC samples will be identified with alias names denoted in the “Equipment Blank SOP” and “Duplicate/Replicate SOP” found in Appendix B. The alias names will also be identified in the Quality Control field form.

31

6.4

Chain of Custody

CRWD staff will begin filling out the Chain of Custody (COC) in the field as samples are collected.

The COC will be finalized by the Monitoring Coordinator during the compositing process. CRWD will make a copy of the completed COC upon arrival to MCES. An example of the COC is provided in Appendix C. All COC signatures related to sample custody will be made in ink. When sample custody is transferred to MCES lab staff, a signature, date and time will be entered at the time of transfer to document the transfer. A sample will be in custody if it is in any one of the following states: •

In actual physical possession by laboratory staff.

•

In view, after being in physical possession.

•

In physical possession and locked up so that no one can tamper with it.

•

In a secured area, restricted to authorized personnel.

A secured area such as a locked storage shed or locked vehicle may be used for temporary storage.

When using such an area, the time, date, and location of the secured area will be recorded on the COC next to the relinquisher’s signature. The time at which an individual regains custody will then be recorded in the “received by” space.

6.5

Sample Handling and Transport

CRWD staff accompany coolers containing samples from either the field of CRWD office to the MCES lab for analysis. CRWD staff will also transport a completed chain of custody form to the MCES lab. The samples will be kept at approximately 4 degrees Celsius during transport to laboratories. Before transporting samples, field personnel will perform the following tasks: 1. Verify that laboratory personnel will be present to receive the samples when they arrive.

2. Check labeling and documentation to ensure sample identity will be clear to laboratory personnel.

3. Hand deliver or ship samples in a manner that ensures samples will remain cool (about 4 degrees Celsius) until received by laboratory personnel.

4. Maintain possession of the samples and chain of custody, or note the current possessor.

5. Verify that laboratory personnel have received samples in good order and understand COC. 32

7.0 Quality Assurance Procedures 7.1

Laboratory Quality Assurance Procedures

MCES laboratory has a written comprehensive QA/QC program which provides rules and guidelines to ensure the reliability and validity of work conducted at the laboratory. Compliance with the QA/QC program is coordinated and monitored by the laboratory’s QA department, which is independent of the operating departments. The quality assurance officer shall do routine checks of the analytical procedures to ensure that the laboratory technicians are following the laboratory’s SOPs. The laboratory’s SOPs shall reflect the methods and procedures for measuring, calibrating, and maintaining equipment outlined by the equipment’s manufacturer and analytical methodologies (EPA, Standard Methods, ASTM, etc.) specified in Table 7. The laboratory shall utilize the following quality control checks: sample spikes, surrogate spikes, reference samples controls, method blanks, instrument blanks, and laboratory duplicates of field samples. The laboratory shall specify the frequency, the compounds to be used for sample spikes and surrogate spikes, and the QA acceptance criteria for these checks.

The laboratory will flag any data sent to CRWD that do not meet instrument and analytical QA procedures. Any samples analyzed and determined to be in nonconformance with the QA criteria will be reanalyzed by the laboratory, if sufficient sample volume is available and sample is within holding time.

7.2 CRWD Quality Assurance Procedures All laboratory and continuous monitoring data collected through the CRWD monitoring program are reviewed by CRWD staff for quality before data analysis and inclusion in the annual report. This section provides an overview of the data and protocol review procedures for the monitoring program.

Most data management and data review happens within Kisters WISKI (WISKI) database. WISKI is a data management software specifically designed for continuous and discrete water quality data.

7.2.1

Data Management

The CRWD monitoring program manages two types of data: flow data collected by in-situ flow loggers and water quality data from samples submitted to the MCES laboratory. SOPs have been 33

created for the management of both data types to ensure consistent and accurate data management and transfer between devices, programs, and databases.

7.2.1.1 Flow Data Management

Flow data is downloaded from field instruments regularly, either during water quality sample collection, on routine site visits, or through remote access. ISCO FlowLink 5 software is used to download data stored on the ISCO data logger to a CRWD field laptop. Once stored on the laptop, automated backup schedules are run for each site to export the data from FlowLink to the laptop drive. Once on the laptop drive, a file synchronization software is used to export data from the laptop to the WISKI database. Site name labels within FlowLink must match labels within WISKI in order for the WISKI KiDAT software to import the data in the appropriate time series. Once the data is in the WISKI database and appropriate time series, all further changes and edits to the data will be logged within the program. Data is synced from the CRWD field laptops to the WISKI database on weekly basis. Data that is downloaded using remote access is imported daily to the WISKI software.

7.2.1.2 Water Quality Data Management

Water quality data from the MCES lab is exported from the MCES database on a monthly basis. Lab data is retrieved from the MCES online portal and saved to the CRWD server. The downloaded output is reformatted to match the requirements for the WISKI database importer. The WISKI importer scans the data for any potential errors for the user to review prior to importing. Once imported, the data is saved on the WISKI server and all further changes and edits to the data will be logged within the program.

7.2.2

Data Review and Validation

CRWD staff reviews, flags, and approves laboratory and continuous monitoring data for a given calendar year. SOPs dictate the proper protocol for reviewing and editing laboratory and continuously monitored data. The data review process draws upon the review of a number of QA/QC methods described in this QAPP including, but not limited to: â&#x20AC;˘

Laboratory QC data (e.g. instrument and method blanks, spikes and calibration data)

â&#x20AC;˘

CRWD QA/QC samples (e.g. equipment blanks, field blanks, and field duplicate samples)

â&#x20AC;˘

Field notes and metadata to determine problems or deviations from written SOPs

All data review and validation occurs within the WISKI software. Any edits or changes to data will require confirmation and notation by the user. WISKI will prompt the user to assign a quality code

34

and a standard remark to data that has been edited in order to prevent loss and unintended edits. All edits can be reviewed and reversed within WISKI. 7.2.2.1 Continuous Flow Data Editing

Flow data is edited in WISKI on a weekly basis. CRWD staff makes all edits to the data directly within the WISKI software using a set of quality codes and standard remarks in order to maintain consistent data processing (Table 8). Additionally, all the data editing documentation will be stored in one location for future re-review if necessary. Quality codes are saved within WISKI and can be used to remove a level of data quality from an analysis. Standard remarks are standardized notes that can be assigned to a section of data to describe how it was modified.

The goal of reviewing continuous flow data is identify any measured data points that may not be accurate or representative or potentially missing. The edited flow data is used to calculate pollutant loading by applying pollutant concentrations measured in the laboratory to discharge measurements.

The continuous flow data editing process consists of the following steps: •

Compiling data for the entire year in WISKI software

•

Editing and reviewing annual data to account for missing or poor data points (Table 8): o

Assigning quality codes to data (e.g. Excellent, Good, Fair, Poor, Suspect, Unknown, Missing), or flagging bad data periods

o

Linearly interpolating between points where data is lost

o

Shifting data points where level has drifted

o

Recreating storm events using rating curves derived from the historical period of record

•

Separating baseflow from event flow using a script developed by CRWD staff in WISKI software. The script considers the following four discharge variables: o

Rate of change of slope on hydrograph—to identify event start

o

Rate of change in minutes—to identify the time span that change in the hydrograph has to occur in

o

Percent of flow—the percent of baseflow that must be reached before the event can stop (based on the time period preceding the storm)

o

Max storm duration—the maximum amount of time that event can last

35

Table 8: WISKI Quality Codes and Standard Remarks.

Code Excellent Good Fair Suspect Poor Unknown Missing

Number 0 40 80 120 160 200 255

Meaning Highest quality data - generally don't use this code Default for data that has been deemed OK after QA/QC process (unmodified) Any data that has been autocorrected, offset, slightly modified etc.

Data recreated from regression relationship Bad data. Needs recreation or deletion Default for all imported data - signifies that no QA/QC has been done Missing Data

WISKI Standard Remark

Previous CRWD Editing Description

Values copied

N/A

Values copied and proportionally fit to both sides

N/A

Range filled with constant

Set to constant

Range filled with linear interpretation

Autocorrected - bad/negative value

Gap filled with constant

Set to constant

Gap filled with linear interpretation

Autocorrected - missing

Gap inserted

Set to zero

Manually edited

Additional edit, add free comment

Manually inserted

Additional edit, add free comment

Range vertically shifted with constant

Fixed offset

Range vertically shifted by linear transformation

Proportional offset for level drift

Spikes removed

Autocorrect noisy data

WISKI Color Code

CRWD scans the data to look for missing periods, negative values, bad levels during storm, level drifts, and abnormal level increase. Issues with lower levels of complexity can be resolved with single data point editing. More complicated issues on a week or month timescale can be edited on a section basis. Table 9 indicates the most common data editing scenarios encountered in the continuous flow data.

36

Table 9: Steps for various flow data editing scenarios in WISKI. Problem with Data

Edit

Site does not have baseflow but contains standing water in pipe (where Q depends on L, i.e.: CCLRT sites)

Add validator in the Edited Level Time Series for the site and select KiScript script corrector N/A (choose Velocity Cut-off and base the cut-off on the Raw time series and the appropriate level)

N/A

There is data shown that occurs before install/after uninstall

Insert Data Gap

Missing

N/A

Missing data

None - leave the data as missing

Missing

N/A

Negative values during baseflow/non-storm periods

Edit the data using linear interpolation

Fair

Range filled with linear interpolation

Noisy data during baseflow/non-storm periods

Edit the data using the "Edit Values" icon and Fair manually reset data points of selected points or

Manually edited, free comment ("Removed noise")

Bad level data during storm and/or non-storm event

Insert Data Gap

Missing

Free comment (e.g.:"Sensor ripped out")

Abnormal level values between two dates: - Clear start/stop points where level goes bad, i.e. as what happens between poor level cals where the first is off and the second corrects it so that a section of data is all off by the same (or relatively the same) amount.

- Unclear start/stop points where level goes

Edit the data using the Shift range vertically option. Use either Parallel shift or Linear transformation depending on what the data looks like.

Fair

Range vertically shifted with constant x.xx OR Range vertically shifted by linear transformation

bad, i.e. the start of a section of data appears good, and then the level drifts down until there is a point where the data appears good again.

Quality Code Standard Remark

Edit the data using Drift Correction (1st data point should be previous known valid point. 2nd is the data point where drift was corrected by Fair field calibration (Isco equipment) or the field observed reading (Global water level loggers)

Manually edited

7.2.2.2 Water Quality Data Editing

Water quality data is subject to visual review upon retrieval from the MCES online portal. This review serves as a preliminary screening to identify any blatant outliers. The data is then imported into WISKI using a pre-configured importer, which scans the water quality data and prompts the user to review errors found in the program (e.g. missing units).

Upon completion of the monitoring season, CRWD staff conduct a second review to identify outliers in the water quality dataset in WISKI. This review evaluates the total phosphorus (TP) and total suspended solids (TSS) parameters and their comparison to other nutrient parameters. CRWD staff identified thresholds of 1.5 mg/L of TP and 2000 mg/L of TSS as boundaries above which data would be of concerning quality. These thresholds were informed by reviewing data in the historical period of reference. Samples exceeding these thresholds will be noted with the date and time. These samples will be plotted with the total Kjeldahl nitrogen (TKN) and orthophosphate (Ortho-P) parameters to provide a context for whether or not a data point could be plausible. If the elevated TP and/or TSS values fit in context in relation to TKN and Ortho-P values, then the value is determined to be valid. If the high TP and/or TSS value is not explained in context of other parameters, the data point for all parameters is flagged as an erroneous data point and assigned a quality code of â&#x20AC;&#x153;Poor.â&#x20AC;?

37

Field form records are also used to determine whether or not sampling procedure, field conditions, or other factors could provide context for the exceeded TP or TSS value.

7.3

Corrective Action

Corrective action for this program is the responsibility of CRWD during both the data management and data review processes. Corrective action will be implemented if it is determined that the data generated does not fulfill the program objectives.

When the QC data exceed the acceptance criteria, corrective actions may be implemented. Possible problems requiring corrective action include: 1. Sample contamination 2. Equipment malfunction 3. Non-compliance with quality control system 4. Errors in sampling procedure 5. Laboratory error

8.0 Data Assessment and Reporting Data assessment and reporting are two oversight elements that ensure that the QA Project Plan is implemented as prescribed in this document. Additionally, annual data reporting is the primary method of providing stakeholders in the CRWD monitoring program with monitoring results.

8.1

Internal Quality Assessments

The Program Manager, or designee, shall review the procedures used by the monitoring program periodically, or at least once per year. This review will ensure written procedures remain consistent, clear, and current. During this review, the reviewer shall participate in field activities to ensure that field staff is following established SOPs, that deviations from the SOPs are documented, and that 38

field documentation is complete and accurate. Data flagged by MCES for not meeting QA requirements shall also be revaluated, as described in Section 7.2.2.2. Data will also be analyzed for patterns that may reveal possible problems with monitoring procedures, or monitoring gaps.

8.2

Electronic Data Reporting

CRWD submits its water quality data to the MPCA Environmental Quality Information System (EQuIS) database for the majority of tested parameters. EQuIS is a resource that contains waterrelated monitoring data and associated laboratory results from statewide monitoring locations.

8.3

Annual Reporting of Monitoring Data

Historically, CRWD has reported monitoring data annually in the annual Stormwater Monitoring Report. Starting in spring 2018, all stormwater monitoring data (historical and current) will be reported online on CRWDâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Water Data Portal (WDP) website. WDP is an online, interactive, mapbased interface that will allow users to query data and customize data outputs (graphs, tables, figures, raw data) in format of their choosing. This method of reporting will replace printed annual reports.

39

9.0 References City of Gresham, Department of Environmental Services, Watershed Division. 2012. Stormwater Monitoring and Quality Assurance Plan. Gresham, OR Fisher, Roger. 2007. MWMO Ambient Surface Water Monitoring Quality Assurance Program Plan.

Minnesota Pollution Control Agency. Report Prepared for the Mississippi Watershed Management Organization, Minneapolis, MN Minneapolis Park and Recreation Board: Environmental Stewardship, Water Resource Management.

2017. Water Resources Report 2015. Minneapolis, MN Minnehaha Creek Watershed District. 2015. Water Quality Technical Report â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 2014. Minnetonka, MN Minnesota Pollution Control Agency. 2016. National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System. Permit No. MN 0061263. St. Paul, MN Metropolitan Council Environmental Services: Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Section, Water Resources Assessment Section. 2011. Quality Assurance Program Plan: Stream Monitoring.

Saint Paul, MN Mitchell, Patricia. 2006. Guidelines for Quality Assurance and Quality Control in Surface Water Quality Programs in Alberta. Patricia Mitchell Environmental Consulting. Report Prepared for Alberta Environment. Edmonton, Alberta US EPA. 2001. EPA Requirements for Quality Assurance Project Plans. EPA QA/R-5. Washington, DC

40

Appendix A CRWD Organizational Chart

41

42

Figure A-1: CRWD Organizational Chart Citizens

Ramsey County Commissioners

CAC

Board of Managers

Administrator

Engineer

Program Manager

Program Manager

Program Manager

Monitoring and Research

Regulatory Program

Planning, Projects and Grants

Monitoring Coordinator

Water Resource Technician Water Resource Technician

BMP Inspector

Attorney

Community Outreach Coordinator

Water Resource Project Manager

Water Resource Specialist

Water Resource Technician Water Resoure Technician (Seasonal)

43

Outreach Specialist

Office Manager

Administrative Assistant

44

Appendix B Field Standard Operating Procedures (1) Sample Compositing (2) ISCO Sampler Bottle Cleaning (3) Base Grab Sampling (4) Storm Grab Sampling (5) Base Composite Sampling (6) Storm Composite Sampling (7) Composite Duplicate and Grab Replicates (8) Equipment Blanks (9) ISCO 6712 Volume Calibration (10) ISCO 2150 Level Calibration (11) WISKI Data Editing (12) Importing SW Lab Data to WISKI (13) Outlier Identification

45

46

5B. Sample Compositing Purpose: To collect a flow-paced sample from an automated ISCO sampler 24-bottle carousel that is representative of an entire flow event (both duration and volume). The bottles from the 24- bottle carousel are mixed together into one representative, composite sample that is analyzed for a suite of parameters to determine sample concentrations.

General: Automated ISCO samplers are programmed to take “flow-paced” samples for base and storm events to capture a representative sample of the entire duration and volume of the sampled event. During an event, individual discrete samples are taken by the ISCO sampler and distributed into a 24-bottle carousel. For base events, samples are programmed to be extracted over a 24-hour period based on the ambient flow rate. For storm events, samples are programmed to be extracted at a flow-paced rate based on the amount of water moving through the pipe so that he entire rise and fall of the hydrograph for a 0.5” storm or greater is captured. For both base and storm events, discrete samples in the 24 bottle carousels are “composited”, or mixed together to make one homogenous sample that represents the entire event to be submitted to the lab for analysis. Composited samples are analyzed by Metropolitan Council lab for a suite of parameters (nutrients, solids, metals). The samples extracted at the beginning of a storm during the rising limb generally have higher concentrations of pollutants (“first flush” samples); whereas samples extracted at the end of a storm during the falling limb are less concentrated because the primary flush of pollutants has already occur. Thus, taking a sample from each point of the storm and combining (or compositing) those samples into one composite sample makes one representative sample.

Frequency: After a base or rain sampling event when a composite sample is collected Number of Staff: 2 Expected Time for Completion: ½ Day Equipment: • • • • • • •

Filled Carousels 4000 mL sample container(s) 8000 mL churn 14000 mL churn Sample Labels Safety Glasses Safety Gloves

Volumes: MCES Sample Bottles: • •

Sample Bottle = 4,000 mL (4 L) Minimum volume for all parameters = 2,160 mL

Churns: • •

Small = 8,000 mL (8 L) Large = 14,000 mL (14 L)

Compact Sized Sampler: • •

1 bottle = 400 mL (two 200 mL discrete samples) Full carousel (24 bottles) = 9,600 mL

Full Sized Sampler: • •

1 bottle = 800 mL (four 200 mL discrete samples) Full carousel (24 bottles) = 19,200 mL

Compositing Procedures 1. Look up the event details (# of discrete samples, total sample volume, event start/stop) in the field form.

2. Follow the instructions below based on the applicable scenario: Scenario 1: Storm event volume is <4,000 mL • • •

No churning required Vigorously shake carousel sample bottles to agitate settled out solids Dump each individual bottle directly into the MCES sample bottle

Scenario 2: Compact carousel is filled, or total volume is >4,000 mL • • •

Vigorously shake carousel sample bottles to agitate settled out solids and dump all contents into the large 14 L churn o If total volume is less than 8 L, the small churn can be used instead Churn and mix all samples Using nozzle, fill MCES sample bottle while continuing to churn sample

Scenario 3: Full-sized carousel is filled, or total volume is >4,000 mL •

•

If total volume of carousel bottles is less than 14 L: o Vigorously shake carousel sample bottles to agitate settled out solids and dump contents of each individual bottle into the large 14 L churn o Churn and mix all samples o Using nozzle, fill MCES sample bottle while continuing to churn sample If total volume of carousel bottles is greater than 14 L: o Count the total number of carousel bottles and divide it into two sample sets o For the first sample set:  Vigorously shake carousel sample bottles to agitate settled out solids and dump contents of each individual bottle into the large 14 L churn  Churn and mix all samples  Using nozzle, fill MCES sample bottle HALF WAY (2,000 mL) while continuing to churn sample  Discard remaining water in churn by dumping it in the sink o For second sample set:  Repeat above

3. Label each bottle with start and stop dates/time. Bottle labels must match the times listed on the COC. 4. Add in any notes about the sample to the field form ‘Notes’ section (e.g. water is brown or orange, high level of debris, etc) and take a photo if possible.

5. Repeat the process for all stations.

Churn Cleaning Procedures 1. Rinse the churn three times with tap water between compositing samples from different stations.

2. When all stations have been composited, scrub all churn components with Liquinox soap and rinse thoroughly. Place churn and components on the bottom rack of the dishwasher to be sterilized (the top rack of the dishwasher will need to be removed), and set to “Pots & Pans” setting. Put equipment back on shelves once finished.

8B. ISCO Sampler Bottle Cleaning Purpose: To ensure that the sampler bottles are properly cleaned and ready for use in the field.

General: When sampler bottles are returned to the shop for cleaning, it is important to wash them right away to prevent sediment from sticking to the inside of bottles. Two staff members can work on this procedure at the same time. The sample bottles are first rinsed with tap water to remove floating sediment. The sink is filled with warm, soapy (Liquinox) water and bottles are scrubbed with the scrub brushes to remove any visible dirt. Following the scrub, the bottles are loaded into the dishwasher on the heaviest duty setting. Once the bottles are finished, they can be reloaded into the carousels.

Frequency: Each time bottles are returned from the field Number of Staff: 2 Expected Time for Completion: Half of day Equipment: • • • • •

Sample bottles Scrub Brushes Liquinox Dishwasher Sink

Procedure: 1. Rinse the inside of bottles with tap water to loosen any sediment in the bottom of the bottles and rinse down sink.

2. Fill sink with rinsed bottles.

3. Fill shop sink with warm water and Liquinox soap.

4. Bottle caps can be loaded into a small bucket. Fill bucket with warm soapy (Liquinox) water and thoroughly mix through with hands. When finished, dump and rinse water through the bucket to thoroughly remove soap from the caps. Place caps in baskets (loading only to ¾ full) and place basket inside of bottom rack of dishwasher.

5. Use brushes to scrub the inside of the bottles, removing any caked on dirt and sediment.

6. Rinse remaining suds with water from faucet.

7. Place 1000 milliliter bottles in bottom rack of dishwasher and 500 milliliter bottles on top rack of dishwasher.

8. Do NOT use dishwashing detergent or any other soap in the dishwashers to wash the bottles.

9. Select “Pots and Pans” and run. If unable to run dishwasher right away, move magnet on outside of dishwasher to “DIRTY” so that others know the status of the bottles.

10. When dishwasher cycle is complete, remove and inspect bottles. If unable to remove bottles right when cycle is finished, move magnet on outside of dishwasher to “CLEAN” so that others know the status of the bottles.

11. Set aside bottles that require additional cleaning.

12. Rerun the dirty bottles.

13. Place clean bottles in a clean sampler carousel and strap in circular bottle holder with black bungees.

14. Place carousel onto the appropriate shelf. Only CLEAN bottles and carousels should be placed on the shelf.

15. Bottle caps are air dried and then placed in the 4L bottles by size for storage. If caps need to be stored and/or used quickly, dry on top of floor fan that is placed up on top of a table. Do not put wet caps inside the sealed cap bottles.

16. If cap bottles appear to have condensation inside as a result of wet bottle caps, remove top on bottle and allow inside to air out.

2C. Base Grab Sampling (Field Season) Purpose: To collect water for lab analysis under baseflow conditions, when base compositing fails.

General: The base grab procedures can be completed at all stations that flow during non-storm conditions. Follow the “Base Grab (Winter) SOP” when samplers are removed for the season.

The BMPs and other stations are dry during non-storm events, so no base sampling occurs. At each sampled station, both a Full Water Quality sample and an E. coli sample are obtained, the station data is downloaded and checked, and regular station maintenance is performed.

Frequency: During monitoring season, take base composite or grab samples once a month (make sure that it has not rained within two days of collecting base samples). A base grab is also completed if a base composite fails Locations: All stations with baseflow Number of Staff: 2 Expected Time for Completion: One day for baseline stations including lab preparation, bottle washing, and shop cleanup Equipment: •

Clipboard with: o Sharpies o Pens o Base grab lab sheet (Met Council)

•

Backpack with: o Isco Sampler connection cords o Ziplock bag containing charged desiccant o Ziplock bag for spent desiccant o Voltmeter o Extra pump tubes

•

Sampling Equipment: o E. coli grab sampler (bring both) o 4000 mL grab sampler and rope (bring both)

o 4000 mL bottles labeled for each station  With 2 extra bottles o Whirlpaks labeled E. coli for each station  3-4 extra whirlpaks o Large coolers (for 4000 mL samples) o Small coolers with icepacks (for E. coli samples) o T-wrench for vault doors (TBEB, TBWB, TBO) o Manhole hook (for Phalen ) •

Record Maintenance Equipment: o Laptop o iPad o Waterproof camera

•

Miscellaneous items: o Marine batteries (Hidden Falls, Villa Park Outlet) o Tool box o Lock key (in truck glove box) o Hand sanitizer (in truck glove box) o Safety vests if sampling in street o One large and one small carousel of bottles

Procedure: Before Leaving the Shop: 1. If samples are to be submitted to the Met Council, call the Met Council lab in the morning before sampling at (651) 602-8293. E. coli samples only have a 4 hour hold time, so plan appropriately. Leave a message or advise the Met Council staff of: • • •

The number of full water quality samples to be submitted The number of E. coli samples to be submitted The approximate time of arrival to the Met Council (E. coli samples must be dropped off no later than 2pm. Full water quality samples can be dropped off a little later in the day because they can be processed the next day. On Fridays, however, all samples need to be turned in as soon as possible as processing needs to occur that day.)

2. Each of the two staff members will check over the equipment list before leaving the office.

Downloading: 1. One staff member will connect using the laptop computer and Isco connection cable to the 2150 Flow logger.

2. Once connected, download the data using Flowlink. Downloading takes a few minutes, continue with procedures until downloading is completed.

3. Record the level, velocity, and calculated discharge from Flowlink into the Ipad field form.

4. Using the voltmeter, connect to the marine battery terminals. Record the marine battery charge and current battery ID. If the battery charge is below 70% or 12.3V, replace the battery once you are no longer â&#x20AC;&#x153;connectedâ&#x20AC;? in Flowlink. For those stations that have marine battery power for the 2150, also replace the battery if it reaches 12.3V. 5. Check the desiccant of the Isco 2150 Flow Logger and Isco 2105 interface module. If the desiccant is blue or orange, the desiccant does not need to be replaced. If the desiccant is pink or green, replace the desiccant.

6. Once the data is finished downloading, check over the data. Record any missing data or abnormalities in flow in the field form. Also check the data to ensure flow levels correspond to baseflow conditions, and note any abnormalities in the field form.

Disconnect from Flowlink.

7. Disconnect the cord connecting the laptop to the sampler or 2150. Ensure all protective connector covers are secured.

8. Check the bottles inside the sampler to ensure no samples were taken. Replace any dirty bottles and restart the program if needed.

Sampling: 1. The second staff member will record the sample date and time on the sample bottles, whirlpak, and field form. Ensure all sample dates and times are the same for all three.

2. Gain access to the sampling area. Open the manhole using the manhole hook or open the vault doors using a T-wrench if needed. â&#x20AC;˘ â&#x20AC;˘ â&#x20AC;˘

At Villa Park Inlet, remove the grate over the drain and collect the sample from the water overflowing the drain.

At Villa Park Outlet, reach down between the grate and collect the sample, trying not to let the bag touch the bottom of the culvert.

At Kittson, use the manual pump function on the 6712. Disconnect the pump tubing at the location where it enters the sampler bottle housing. Using the keypad on the Isco 6712 Sampler, pump water forward until water is flowing from the tube. Allow the water to flow through the tube for at least 30 seconds to rinse the line. Pump water directly into the E. coli whirlpak, then place in cooler. Pump water backwards for approximately one minute to purge the sample line. Reconnect the pump tubing to the bottle housing on the sampler when completed.

3. Lower the large 4000 mL sampler using a rope into the water. Lift the sampler with the water back to the surface, swirl the water inside the sampler, and dump the water outside of the sample area. Repeat this step twice for a total of three rinses of the sampler.

4. Lower the large 4000 mL sampler into the water to retrieve a water sample. Pour the water into each of the large sample bottles needed for the station. Secure the sample bottle lids and place the samples in the large coolers.

5. Attach the appropriate E. coli bag to the E. coli sampler. Ensure your fingers do not touch the inside of the whirlpak bag as this can contaminate the sample. Lower the E. coli bag into the water. Retrieve the sample. The water level inside of the bag should be above the white line on the whirlpak. If the water level is not above the white line, then try again. This can take several attempts. Once enough sample is retrieved, secure the whirlpak, check to make sure the bag is not leaking, and place inside a small cooler. *At locations with high/fast flow, it is often difficult to fill the E. Coli bag to the desired level. At these locations, follow these steps. First, lower bag until it is submerged in top of water. Keeping bag at current position, let out slack from rope and hold on to it at the top in one hand. In one motion, release all the slack on the line at once to allow bag to fully submerge and be carried downstream. Proceed to retrieve sample.

6. Secure the manhole, vault door, or grate if needed.

Before Leaving the station: 1. Take pictures of any abnormalities in the field. This can include but is not limited to a noticed illicit discharge, abnormally dark water in sample bottles, or equipment damage.

2. Check to ensure the sampler states “Disabled” on the display screen, and the sampler is ready to sample starting at Bottle #1. Restart the program on the 6712 if needed.

3. Check to ensure the sampler is aligned correctly on the bottles, and all tubing is attached appropriately.

4. Ensure all caps are secured on the back of the sampler or flow logger.

5. Check that the sample dates and times are the same on the sample bottles, lab sheets, and in field form.

6. Check the station for any remaining equipment.

7. Secure the lock on the sampler box. Repeat these procedures for each station.

Before Returning to the Shop: 1. E. coli samples only have a 4 hour hold time. Met Council samples must be taken immediately to the lab for analysis. Any full water quality samples to be analyzed by the Met Council can be dropped off at this time. Make a copy of the Lab Form when you arrive at the lab, leave one with the samples, and return the other to the office. Collect clean 4000 mL bottles from the lab if needed. (see “Metropolitan Council Lab Procedures SOP”)

At the Shop: 1. Unload, clean up, and put away all equipment.

2. Place any samples in the shop refrigerator.

3. Wash any dirty bottles (see â&#x20AC;&#x153;Isco Sampler Bottle Cleaning SOPâ&#x20AC;?).

4. Check over the field notes and sample times in the field form. Advise other monitoring staff of any problems that occurred in the field. Note any repairs needed on the white board in the hallway.

2E. Storm Grab Sampling (Field Season) Purpose: To collect water for lab analysis under stormflow conditions.

General: These storm grab procedures can be completed at any station where a storm sample needs to be collected. At stations with a functioning Isco 6712 Sampler, only an E. coli sample is taken since a storm composite should be taken by the sampler. If the sampler is broken (or staff wants to ensure a sample is collected), then both an E. coli grab and a full water quality grab are taken at the station. Samples are only collected if water is currently flowing in the street gutters. Since time is limited and equipment can be damaged by rainfall exposure, the stations are not downloaded. Samples are collected and submitted to the lab.

Frequency: During the monitoring season, take storm grabs are collected whenever possible (preferably at least twice a month) Locations: All BMP and Baseline stations. Additional stations (completed either during the rain event, or after a certain amount of time following a rain event) may include: William Street Pond, Upper Villa Exfiltration, and Midway Office Warehouse Inlet and Exfiltration. See individual SOPs for details.

Number of Staff: 2 teams of 2 Expected Time for Completion: Approximately one morning.

Equipment: •

Clipboard with: o Sharpies o Pens o Lab Sheet (Met Council)

•

Sampling Equipment: o E. coli grab sampler (bring both) o 4000 mL grab sampler and rope (bring both) o 4000 mL bottles labeled for each required station  With 2 extra bottles o Whirlpaks labeled E. coli for each station  3-4 extra whirlpaks o Large coolers (for 4000 mL samples)

o Small coolers (for E. coli samples) o T-wrench for vault doors (TBEB, TBWB, TBO) o Manhole hook (for Phalen) •

Record Maintenance Equipment: o Laptop o iPad o Waterproof camera

•

Miscellaneous items: o Latex gloves (some stations regularly have high E. coli counts) o Waterproof camera o Rain gear o Rubber boots o Tool box o Lock key (in truck glove box) o Hand sanitizer (in truck glove box) o Safety vests and cones if sampling in street o Umbrella

Procedure: Before Leaving the Shop: 1. Check the weather and radar maps to determine the best time to leave the office.

Create a prioritized list of stations to sample. On the list, determine if only an E. coli sample is needed or both E. coli and full water quality samples will be taken.

2. If samples are to be submitted to the Met Council, e-mail the Met Council lab in the morning before sampling. See monitoring coordinator for current list of e-mail addresses. Be sure to note: • • •

The estimated number of full water quality samples to be submitted The estimated number of E. coli samples to be submitted The approximate time of arrival to the Met Council (E. coli samples must be dropped off no later than 2pm. Full water quality samples can be dropped off a little later in the day because they can be processed the next day. On Fridays, however, all samples need to be turned in as soon as possible as processing needs to occur that day.)

3. Before leaving the office, each of the two members of the field team will check over the equipment in the truck.

Sampling: 1. Before collecting any sample at a station, make sure water is flowing in the street gutters. Do not take any samples if no water is flowing. If it is raining but no water is flowing in the gutters yet, then you can wait for water to start flowing. ***Stop sampling and return to the truck or office if lightning or severe weather is present!*** 2. Record the sample date and time on the sample bottles, whirlpak, and in the field form.

Ensure all sample dates and times are recorded the same in all three.

3. Gain access to the sampling station if needed. Open the manhole using the manhole hook or open the vault doors using a T-wrench if needed. (At Villa Park Outlet, staff member may need to lay on grate over culvert and reach between bars to collect the sample.) **For East Kittson, the road becomes unsafe and hard to drive on during/right after very heavy rains. If sampling during heavy rain, do not try to drive down the road. Park instead at the location for winter sampling (in the small residential parking lot on the west side of Lexington Ave just after the bridge over the railroad tracks) and walk down to the station.

4. If only an E. coli sample is needed at the station, skip to Step 6. If a full water quality sample is needed at the station, lower the large 4000 mL sampler using a rope into the water. Lift the sampler with the water back to the surface, swirl the water inside the sampler, and dump the water outside of the sample station. Repeat this step twice for a total of three rinses of the sampler. **For East Kittson, the water cannot be accessed by lowering the sampler into the manhole. Disconnect the pump tubing at the location where it enters the sampler bottle housing. Using the keypad on the Isco 6712 Sampler, pump water forward until water is flowing from the tube. Allow the water to flow through the tube for at least 30 seconds

to rinse the line. Pump water directly into both the large 4000mL sample bottle and E. coli whirlpak. Secure both samples and place them in the appropriate coolers. Pump water backwards for approximately one minute to purge the sample line. Reconnect the pump tubing to the bottle housing on the sampler. Continue with Step 7.

5. Lower the large 4000 mL sampler into the water to retrieve a water sample. Pour the water into the large sample bottle needed for the station. Secure the sample bottle lid and place the samples in the large coolers.

6. Attach the appropriate E. coli bag to the E. coli sampler. Ensure your fingers do not touch the inside of the whirlpak bag as this can contaminate the sample. Lower the E. coli bag into the water. Retrieve the sample. The water level inside of the bag should be above the white line on the whirlpak. If the water level is not above the white line, then try again. This can take several attempts. Once enough sample water is retrieved, secure the whirlpak, check to make sure the bag is not leaking, and place inside a small cooler. **At locations with high/fast flow, it is often difficult to fill the E. Coli bag to the desired level. At these locations, follow these steps. First, lower bag until it is submerged in top of water. Keeping bag at current position, let out slack from rope and hold on to it at the top in one hand. In one motion, release all the slack on the line at once to allow bag to fully submerge and be carried downstream. Proceed to retrieve sample.

7. Secure the manhole, vault door, or grate if needed.

Before Leaving the station: 1. Take pictures of any abnormalities in the field. This can include but is not limited to a noticed illicit discharge, abnormally dark water in sample bottles, or equipment damage.

2. Check that the sample dates and times are the same on the sample bottles, lab sheets, and in the field form.

3. Check the station for any remaining equipment.

4. Secure the lock on the sampler box. Repeat these procedures for each station.

Before Returning to the Shop:

1. E. coli samples only have a 4 hour hold time. Met Council samples must be taken immediately to the lab for analysis. Any full water quality samples to be analyzed by the Met Council can be dropped off at this time. Make a copy of the Lab Form, leave one with the samples, and return the other to the office. Grab clean 4000mL bottles from the lab if needed. (see “Metropolitan Council Lab Procedures SOP”)

At the Shop: 1. Unload, clean up, and put away all equipment. This includes unwinding the various ropes used such that they dry fully.

2. Place any samples in the shop refrigerator.

3. Wash any dirty bottles (see “Isco Sampler Bottle Cleaning SOP”).

4. Check over the field notes and sample times in the field form. Advise technicians of any problems that occurred in the field. Note any repairs needed on the white board in the hallway.

2B. Base Composite Sampling Purpose: To collect a representative series of base samples from Baseline stations for lab analysis.

General: The base composite procedures can be completed at all stations that flow during nonstorm conditions during the field season and have an installed Isco 6712 sampler. The BMP stations are dry during non-storm events, so no base sampling occurs. Base composites take a total of two days to complete. On the first day, the stations are programmed for base composites from the office. On the second day, the composite samples are retrieved, an E. Coli grab is collected, the data is downloaded and checked (in the field if needed), and the programming is restored to sample for a storm event.

Frequency: During the monitoring season, two base composites or grabs are taken monthly (Make sure that it has not rained within two days of collecting composite samples, and there is no chance of rain during the 24 hrs that compositing will occur).

Locations: All Baseline stations Number of Staff: 2 Expected Time for Completion: Two days including sample preparation, lab delivery, bottle washing, and shop clean-up Equipment: Day 1: • •

Flowlink (direct connection to stations) Google Forms

Day 2: • •

•

WISKI Clipboard with: o Sharpies o Pens o Base grab lab sheet (Met Council) Backpack with: o Isco Sampler connection cords o Ziplock bag containing charged desiccant

•

•

•

 Blue or Orange desiccant for 2150 stations o Ziplock bag for spent desiccant o Voltmeter o Extra pump tubes Sampling Equipment: o 4000 mL grab sampler and rope o E. coli grab sampler and rope o Whirlpaks for each station o 3-4 extra Whirlpaks o 3-4 extra 4000 mL bottles in large cooler o Small coolers with ice packs o Containers of large and small caps o 4 Compact Carousels (SAP, Hidden Falls, Villa In, Villa Out) o 5 Full Size Carousels (Kittson, Phalen, TBO, TBEB, TBWB) o T-wrench for vault doors (TBO, TBEB, TBWB) o Manhole hook (for Phalen) Record Maintenance Equipment: o Laptop o iPad o Waterproof camera Miscellaneous items: o Marine batteries (for stations without solar power) o Tool box o Lock key (in truck glove box) o Hand Sanitizer

Procedure: Day 1: Changing the Programming: 1. Login to WISKI and open an assigned station. Check each station’s L/V/Q to verify that nothing is out of order with baseflow.

2. Login to Flowlink. Open the IscoDB.sdb file located here: X:\IscoDB.sdb (or the respective location on the individual’s computer).

3. In the “Sites” dropdown menu, double-click on the station you wish to program. Click on the “Connect” button in the bottom corner.

4. Open a Google FWQ field form.

5. Once connected: a. Note the L,V, and Q in the field form. b. Note the current trigger and pacing in the field form.

6. Take note of the current discharge (cfs) and the bottle size at the station (small or large).

Using a calculator, determine the new pacing by the following equation (note that the pacing value determined by the formula is divided by 10 at the end, because the 6712 is set up for 10 pulses per sample):

New Pacing =

đ?&#x2018; đ?&#x2018; đ?&#x2018; đ?&#x2018; đ?&#x2018; đ?&#x2018; đ?&#x2018;&#x161;đ?&#x2018;&#x161;đ?&#x2018;&#x161;đ?&#x2018;&#x161;đ?&#x2018;&#x161;đ?&#x2018;&#x161; 24â&#x201E;&#x17D;đ?&#x2018;&#x153;đ?&#x2018;&#x153;đ?&#x2018;&#x153;đ?&#x2018;&#x153;đ?&#x2018;&#x153;đ?&#x2018;&#x153;đ?&#x2018;&#x153;đ?&#x2018;&#x153; â&#x2C6;&#x2014;60 â&#x2C6;&#x2014; đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018; đ?&#x2018;&#x161;đ?&#x2018;&#x161;đ?&#x2018;&#x161;đ?&#x2018;&#x161;đ?&#x2018;&#x161;đ?&#x2018;&#x161; â&#x201E;&#x17D;đ?&#x2018;&#x;đ?&#x2018;&#x;

đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;? đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;đ?&#x2018;&#x2018;â&#x201E;&#x17D;đ?&#x2018;&#x17D;đ?&#x2018;&#x17D;đ?&#x2018;&#x17D;đ?&#x2018;&#x17D;đ?&#x2018;&#x17D;đ?&#x2018;&#x17D;đ?&#x2018;&#x17D;đ?&#x2018;&#x17D; (đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?)â&#x2C6;&#x2014;60

48 (đ?&#x2018;&#x201C;đ?&#x2018;&#x201C;đ?&#x2018;&#x201C;đ?&#x2018;&#x201C;đ?&#x2018;&#x201C;đ?&#x2018;&#x201C; đ?&#x2018; đ?&#x2018; đ?&#x2018; đ?&#x2018; đ?&#x2018; đ?&#x2018; đ?&#x2018; đ?&#x2018; đ?&#x2018; đ?&#x2018; đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?)đ?&#x2018;&#x153;đ?&#x2018;&#x153;đ?&#x2018;&#x153;đ?&#x2018;&#x153; 96 (đ?&#x2018;&#x201C;đ?&#x2018;&#x201C;đ?&#x2018;&#x201C;đ?&#x2018;&#x201C;đ?&#x2018;&#x201C;đ?&#x2018;&#x201C; đ?&#x2018;&#x2122;đ?&#x2018;&#x2122;đ?&#x2018;&#x2122;đ?&#x2018;&#x2122;đ?&#x2018;&#x2122;đ?&#x2018;&#x2122;đ?&#x2018;&#x2122;đ?&#x2018;&#x2122;đ?&#x2018;&#x2122;đ?&#x2018;&#x2122; đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?đ?&#x2018;?)

/10 pulses

7. Program the new calculated pacing value into Flowlink and click apply. Change the sampler enable to â&#x20AC;&#x153;Alwaysâ&#x20AC;?. Apply all settings.

8. Once completed, disconnect from the station in Flowlink. Finish field form.

9. Complete steps 3-8 for all respective stations. Confirm steps with other MRM staff.

Day 2: Checking the Sampling from the office: 1. Open WISKI and click on the assigned station. Click on the dropdown menu for Standard graph groups. Right-click and select â&#x20AC;&#x153;Openâ&#x20AC;? to view the L/V/Sampler graph.

2. Determine if sampling is complete (i.e. bottle 24 has all samples completed). a. If sampling is complete, note the sample start/stop time. b. If the sampling is not complete (as of 7am when WISKI uploads all station data), make a note to download the data in the field. c. If an error occurred in sampling and no composite was completed, notify team members that the station needs a base grab.

3. Write all information on the monitoring whiteboard.

4. Repeat steps 1-2 for all assigned baseflow stations.

In the field:

1. Open the monitoring box and stop the program if it is still running. Remove the bottle carousel from the Isco sampler. Cap all of the bottles containing sample water. Write the abbreviated station name on Cap #1. This will identify the carousel with the correct station when compositing. Replace with new carousal containing clean bottles.

2. One staff member will connect to the 2150 using the laptop computer and Isco connection cable. Once connected, download the data using flowlink. The second team member will begin with the sampling (see the Sampling section).

3. Record the level, velocity, and calculated discharge from Flowlink into laptop field form.

4. Where applicable, check the marine battery power at the station. Using the voltmeter, connect to the marine battery terminals. Record the marine battery charge and current battery ID in the field form. If the battery charge is below 70% or 12.3V, replace the battery once you are no longer “connected” in Flowlink. For those stations that have marine battery power for the 2150, also replace the battery if it reaches 12.3V. 5. For stations with 2150 flow loggers, check the desiccant of the Isco 2150 Flow Logger and Isco 2105 interface module. If the desiccant is blue or orange, the desiccant does not need to be replaced. If the desiccant is pink or green, replace the desiccant.

6. Once the data is finished downloading, check the data. Record any missing data or abnormalities in the laptop field form. Also check the data to ensure flow levels correspond to baseflow conditions, note any abnormalities in laptop field form. If there are periods where it is obviously not baseflow (an abnormal level rise is observed), do not include any of those samples in the base composite.

7. With the station data open in Flowlink, record the sample start and end times on the lab sheet and the laptop field form. Record the number of samples taken, the volume that will be sent to the lab (If the volume collected is less than 4000mL, write the actual volume. If the volume collected is greater than 4000, write 4000mL), and the actual bottle numbers included in the sample.

8. Record the current pacing and trigger into the laptop field form (See “Isco Instrument Pacing SOP”).

9. Change the program back to the “Storm” equation for the sampler enable, and revert the pacing to the previous storm condition pacing. Apply all changes.

10. Stop and restart the program on the 6712 to ensure the sampler is ready to sample starting at Bottle #1. Ensure it is reading “Disabled”.

11. Disconnect in Flowlink and disconnect the data cords.

Sampling: 1. The second staff member will record the sample date and time on the whirlpak, on the lab sheet, and in the laptop field form. Ensure the sample dates and times are recorded the same in all three. Make the time a multiple of 5 for ease of recording. This also helps denote a grab sample when looking through lab data.

2. Gain access to the sampling area. Open the manhole using the manhole hook or open the vault doors using a T-wrench if needed. Location specific grabs are: • • •

At Villa Park Inlet, remove the grate over the drain and collect the sample from the water overflowing through the grate.

At Villa Park Outlet, reach down between the grate and collect the sample, trying not to let the bag touch the bottom of the culvert.

At Kittson, use the manual pump function on the 6712. Disconnect the pump tubing at the location where it enters the sampler bottle housing. Using the keypad on the Isco 6712 Sampler, pump water forward until water is flowing from the tube. Allow the water to flow through the tube for at least 30 seconds to rinse the line. Pump water directly into the E. coli whirlpak, then place in cooler. Pump water backwards for approximately one minute to purge the sample line. Reconnect the pump tubing to the bottle housing on the sampler when completed.

3. Attach the appropriate E. coli bag to the E. coli sampler. Ensure your fingers do not touch the inside of the whirlpak bag as this can contaminate the sample. Lower the E. coli bag into the water. Retrieve the sample. The water level inside of the bag should be above the white line on the whirlpak. If the water level is not above the white line, try again. This can take several attempts. Once enough sample water is retrieved, secure the whirlpak, check to make sure the bag is not leaking, and place the sample inside a small cooler.

•

At locations with high/fast flow, it is often difficult to fill the E. Coli bag to the desired level. At these locations, follow these steps. First, lower bag until it is submerged in top of water. Keeping bag at current position, let out slack from rope and hold on to it at the top in one hand. In one motion, release all the slack on the line at once to allow bag to fully submerge and be carried downstream.

Proceed to retrieve sample.

4. If the station needs a base grab, complete it at this time.

5. Secure the manhole or vault door.

Before Leaving the station: 1. Take pictures of any abnormalities in the field. This can include but is not limited to a noticed illicit discharge, abnormally dark water in sample bottles, or equipment damage.

2. Check to ensure the sampler is reading “Disabled” and the program has been restarted and is ready to begin sampling at Bottle #1.

3. Check to ensure the sampler is aligned correctly on the bottles, and all tubing is attached appropriately.

4. Ensure the caps are secured on back of the sampler or flow logger.

5. Check that the sample dates and times are the same on the lab sheet and in the laptop field form.

6. Check the station for any remaining equipment.

7. Secure the lock on the sampler box.

At the shop: 1. Follow the procedures outlined in the “Sample Compositing” SOP. 2. Clean up and put away all equipment.

3. Charge any used batteries and/or spent desiccant.

4. Check over the field notes and sample times in the field forms and update any that were not completed. Advise technicians of any problems that occurred in the field. Note any repairs needed on the white board in the hallway.

2D. Storm Composite Sampling Purpose: To collect a representative series of storm samples from all stations with Isco 6712 Samplers for lab analysis.

General: The storm composite procedures can be completed at all stations with Isco 6712 Samplers following a storm event. Following a storm, the station data is downloaded and checked, the sample carousel is collected, and regular station maintenance is performed.

Frequency: During the monitoring season, when rain events occur Locations: All stations Number of Staff: 2/4 Expected Time for Completion: • •

One day for both routes if only working with 1 team of 2 people A half day for both baseline and BMP stations if working with 2 teams of 2

Equipment: •

Clipboard with: o Sharpies o Pens

•

Lab sheet (Met Council)

•

Backpack with: o Isco Sampler connection cords o Ziplock bag containing charged desiccant (both in tubes and beads) o Ziplock bag for spent desiccant o Voltmeter o Extra pump tubes

•

Sampling Equipment: o Containers of large and small caps o Compact Carousels o Full Size Carousels o T-wrench for vault doors (TBO, TBEB, TBWB)

o Manhole hook (for Phalen) •

Record Maintenance Equipment: o Laptop o iPad o Waterproof camera

•

Miscellaneous items: o Marine batteries (for all stations – sampling can drain batteries) o 6V batteries (for 2150 stations) o Tool box o Lock key (in truck glove box) o Hand sanitizer (in truck glove box)

Procedure: Before Leaving the Office: 1. Each MRM team member should verify whether samples should be collected from their respective stations: a. First check two things: i. Check station data uploaded to WISKI (to determine if the total event sample volume is ≥ 2,000 mL) 1. If the sampler is still sampling, make note that downloading and potential program changes will need to be completed in the field.

2. If sampling has finished, write down dates/times. ii. Check the event size measured from the nearest CoCoRAHS station to the sampling stations (to determine if the event was ≥ 0.5”) b. Based on the answers in Step 1, follow the Sample Collection Criteria Flow Chart (found here: W:\07 Programs\Monitoring & Data Acquisition\Lab\Sampling Criteria\ 2017 Sampling Criteria Flowchart.docx c. Note which stations should have samples submitted, and write all sampling information on the monitoring whiteboard.

2. If any samples are to be submitted to the Met Council, e-mail the Met Council lab in the morning before sampling. See monitoring coordinator for current list of e-mail addresses. Be sure to note: •

The approximate number of full water quality samples

•

The approximate time of arrival to the Met Council

Since no E. coli samples are taken for storm composites, you may deliver full water quality samples to the lab the following day (On Fridays, however, samples need to be turned in to the lab ASAP, as they lab staff cannot wait to process them the next day).

Check the hold times for the lab parameters.

3. All field team members will check over the equipment list before leaving the office.

In the Field: 1. One staff member will connect to the 2150 using the laptop computer and Isco connection cable (if the station needs to be downloaded). If a 750 module is being used, connect directly to the 6712.

2. The second team member will remove the bottle carousel from the sampler and align a clean carousel in the sampler. Cap the bottles, and write the abbreviated station name on the first bottle lid. This identifies the carousel with the station when compositing.

Once finished, assist with the remaining procedures.

4. The staff member using the laptop will download the data using Flowlink. Downloading takes a few minutes, continue with procedures until downloading is completed.

5. Record the level, velocity, and calculated discharge from Flowlink into the laptop field form.

6. Using the voltmeter, connect to the marine battery terminals. Record the marine battery charge and current battery ID in the laptop field form. If the battery charge is below 70% or 12.3V, replace the battery once you are no longer “connected” in Flowlink. For those stations that have marine battery power for the 2150, also replace the battery if it reaches 12.3V. For stations with solar power, note the charge of the batteries being read from the meter in the field form.

7. If the 2150 is powered by 6V batteries, check the internal battery charge of the Isco by going to the “Measurement” tab in Flowlink. Record the internal battery voltage in the laptop field form. If the voltage is below 10.2V, replace the 6V batteries inside the Isco 2150 Flow Logger once disconnected in Flowlink.

8. For stations with 2150 flow loggers, check the desiccant of the Isco 2150 Flow Logger and Isco 2105 Interface Module. If the desiccant is blue or orange, the desiccant does not need to be replaced. If the desiccant is pink or green, replace the desiccant.

Periodically check desiccant in 2191 battery compartments.

The desiccant of the Isco 750 module is housed on the outside of the module. If the desiccant is yellow, then the desiccant does not need to be replaced. If the desiccant is green, then replace the desiccant.

9. Once the data is finished downloading, check the data in Flowlink. Review the graphs in Flowlink for level, velocity, and sample events. Note any abnormalities or missing data in the laptop field form. If applicable, adjust the trigger and pacing so it improves sampling for the next storm event. When examining the hydrograph, check for any potential illicit discharges that may have occurred (e.g. East Kittsondale). If level rises when there is not a known precipitation event, this could be a potential illicit discharge, and the sample should not be considered a normal storm event. Make a note of it in the field form and discuss with other technicians. Disconnect from Flowlink when completed.

10. With the station data open, review the sample times. Record the date and time of the first sample and last sample in the laptop. Also, record the number of samples, the sample total volume and the bottle numbers included in the composite (e.g., 1-24). If no samples were taken or the volume of sample water is not sufficient, dump the bottles, document the number of dumped bottles and the problem, and troubleshoot the sample problem. (see “Troubleshooting SOP”) **If unsure of how to separate storms (if applicable), or what should be composited, leave all samples in carousel and bring back to the shop to discuss with the team.

11. Disconnect Flowlink and cords; continue changing the battery or internal desiccant if needed.

12. Check to ensure the sampler is reading “Disabled” on the Isco sampler display and is ready to sample starting at Bottle #1. Stop and restart the program if needed.

Before Leaving the station: 1. Take pictures of any abnormalities in the field. This can include but is not limited to a noticed illicit discharge, abnormally dark water in sample bottles, or equipment damage.

2. Check to ensure the sampler is aligned correctly on the bottles, and all tubing is attached appropriately.

3. Ensure all of the caps are secured on back of the sampler or flow logger.

4. Check the station for any remaining equipment.

5. Secure the lock on the sampler box.

Back at the shop: 1. Follow the procedures in the “Sample Composting” SOP to composite storm samples.

2. Clean up and put away all equipment.

3. Charge any used batteries and/or spent desiccant.

4. If a potential illicit discharge occurred, inform the monitoring coordinator and TBI project manager ASAP, and discuss whether to inform the City of St. Paul (see “Illicit Discharge Grab Sampling” SOP for more details). Divide the samples collected according to storm and illicit discharge and fill out the COC for an illicit discharge event.

5. Check over the field notes and sample times in the field form. Advise technicians of any problems that occurred in the field. Note any repairs needed on the white board in the hallway.

2O. Composite Duplicates and Grab Replicates Purpose: To evaluate field sampling procedures and analytical laboratory performance by comparing the results of two samples from the same location.

General: Field sample duplicates and replicates are QA/QC methods that test precision of field sampling procedures and laboratory performance.

Composited field duplicates are collected by splitting composited samples from one site into two separate sample containers to be submitted to the laboratory for the same schedule of analytes. Composite duplicate sampling will occur during base and storm composite sampling events. All full water quality sites equipped with an ISCO sampler will be eligible for duplicate sampling; however, minimum volume requirements must be met for a site to be duplicated, as the resulting composited sample volume must be great enough to fill two 4,000 mL laboratory submission containers. Composite duplicate samples will make up 10% of the composited samples submitted to MCES for analysis.

Grab sampling replicates are collected by taking two concurrent grab samples, each grab being poured into its own sample containers. Due to the inherent variability of storm flows, replicate sampling will only be conducted during winter base grab sampling events. All winter baseflow sites will be eligible for grab sampling replicates. Grab sample replicates will make up 10% of the grab samples submitted to MCES for analysis (excluding e-coli samples).

Duplicate and replicate samples are identified on the chain of custody and with an alias sample label. The true identity will be recorded in Duplicate/Replicate section of the Quality Control field form. Duplicate and replicate samples will be analyzed for the same parameters and will have the same start and end date/time as the parent sample. The samples will be marked on the duplicate/replicate COC as a storm composite.

Theoretically, duplicate and replicate results should be similar. Results may differ due to a nonhomogenous sample source, sampling errors, or analytical errors. A relative percent difference (RPD) of duplicate analytical results will be calculated to determine sample precision. CRWD has identified a target threshold of 20% for a RPD. % RPD = Where:

S-D x 100 (S + D) / 2

S = First sample value D = Second sample value 93

Frequency: 10% of total samples for entire monitoring program Number of Staff: 1 or 2 Expected Time for Completion: minimal--extra for communication, documentation, and analysis Equipment: Two 4,000 mL laboratory sample containers. See “Storm and Base Composite Sampling SOP” and “Base Grab Sampling SOP” for additional equipment needs.

Nomenclature: Bottles will be labeled with appropriate the alias found in the table below. The sample name will be noted in the Quality Control field form.

Site St. Anthony Park Hidden Falls Outlet East Kittson Phalen Creek Trout Brook Outlet Trout Brook-East Branch Trout Brook-West Branch Villa Park Outlet Villa Park Inlet Upper Villa Inlet Como 3 Como 7 AHUG Inlet TBNS-Rose TBNS-Stream North Como 3

Duplicate Alias CRWD100 CRWD101 CRWD102 CRWD103 CRWD104 CRWD105 CRWD106 CRWD107 CRWD108 CRWD109 CRWD110 CRWD111 CRWD112 CRWD113 CRWD114 CRWD119

Replicate Alias CRWD200 CRWD201 CRWD202 CRWD203 CRWD204 CRWD205 CRWD206 CRWD207 CRWD208 CRWD209 CRWD210 CRWD211 CRWD212 CRWD213 CRWD214 CRWD219

Composite Sampling Duplicates I.

II.

Frequency Determination a. 10% of total composite water quality samples submitted to MCES from all sites for analysis shall be duplicated composite samples. b. In practice, this will equate to approximately one composited duplicate sample analysis per sampling trip. CRWD staff will conduct ongoing monitoring of the Quality Control Field Form to ensure that the goal of 10% of all samples is being met and is distributed evenly across sites.

Site Determination 94

a. Sites will only be considered for composite sample duplicating if they meet the minimum volume requirements for sample submission to MCES (remember, there must be enough volume to fill two submission containers). b. Volume Requirements: Total Volume Required (mL)

Parameters

# of 200 mL Samples

# Full Compact Carousel Bottles

# Full Standard Carousel Bottles

Standard parameters, not including CBOD

4,320

22

11

6

Standard parameters, including CBOD and/or Sulfates

6,020

31

16

8

c. Among sites that meet volume requirements, sites will be selected to balance duplicate samples among all CRWD site locations. It is expected that some sites will meet the volume requirements more often than others. d. If no sites meet the minimum volume require for composite duplicates, notify the Monitoring Coordinator, as this will affect the goal of duplicating 10% of all samples.

III.

Method a. Determine which site will be duplicated according to the volumes collected, the parameters to be analyzed, and the corresponding volume requirements. b. Composite samples with a churn according the “Sample Compositing SOP.” c. Place a duplicate label on the sample bottle and prepare a QAQC field form to note that a duplicate has been created d. While churning the sample to be duplicated, distribute half of the required volume into one submission container. While still churning, distribute an equal amount into a second sample container. e. Verify that both submission containers contain the minimum requirement for analysis based on the parameters selected. f. Cap samples and place in refrigerator until the samples can be transported to the lab in a cooler. g. Fill out COC and QAQC field form. Use the sample time and date that corresponds to the time and date of the original sample and check mark the “Storm/Base – Composite” box on the QAQC COC.

95

Grab Sampling Replicates Frequency Determination a. 10% of total winter base grab samples submitted to MCES for analysis shall be replicated grab samples. b. Base grabs are primarily conducted once a month November â&#x20AC;&#x201C; March (five total sampling events) at 9 baseflow sites (45 total winter baseflow grabs) c. To meet the goal of replicating 10% of all base grab samples submitted to MCES, 2 samples should be replicated per winter baseflow sampling event. d. Grab replicate sampling will roughly follow the schedule outlined in the table below:

Site St. Anthony Park Hidden Falls Outlet East Kittson Phalen Creek Trout Brook Outlet Trout Brook-East Branch Trout Brook-West Branch Villa Park Outlet Villa Park Inlet

II.

Replicate Schedule Jan Feb

Mar

Nov

Dec 1

1 1 1 1

1 1

No Replicates April - Oct

I.

1

1 1

Site Determination a. The Monitoring Coordinator will assign sites to be replicated according to the Replicate Schedule. b. Once on site, a site can only be considered for grab sample replicating if it has enough base flow to fill two grab sampler devices on two sampling attempts. In other words, staff must be confident that they can fill two grab samplers to the brim on two back-toback deployments of the grab sampler. i. If the designated replicate site does not meet the requirements, contact the Monitoring Coordinator, who will reassign replicate sampling to another site. c. The types of parameters tested during a round of grab sampling should be considered when estimating the targeted volumes for a base grab sampling trip. Consider the following table:

Standard parameters, not including CBOD Standard parameters, including CBOD Twice annual parameters, including Sulfates

Volume Required per Replicate Bottle (mL) 2,160 2,910 3,010

96

d. Sites will be selected in order to ensure an equal distribution of replicate analysis among all CRWD baseflow site locations. It is expected that some sites will be replicated more often than others.

III.

Method a. Determine which site will be replicated in the shop prior to leaving for base grab sampling in the morning. The site selected may not be able to be replicated due to baseflow conditions, and changes in the plan shall be communicated among staff and the Monitoring Coordinator. b. Set up all equipment needed for grab sampling before a grab sampler is deployed to quickly grab two concurrent samples. c. Triple rinse the grab sampler: lower the grab sampler into the sampling stream, lift the sampler back to the surface, swirl the water, and dump the rinse away from the sampling site. Repeat twice. d. Take 1st Sample: Deploy the grab sampler into the thalweg of the sampling stream. Lift the sampler back to the surface and dump the water into the submission container labeled with the Site Name. e. Take 2nd Sample: Deploy the grab sampler into the same place within the sampling stream. Lift the sampler back to the surface and dump the water into the submission container with a replicate label. f. Seal the sample containers and place inside a cooler to be transported g. Ensure that the submission containers are properly labeled, the dates and times of the grab samples are noted in the Quality Control Field Form, and that a replicate COC is filled out with the appropriated dates and times.

97

2P. Equipment Blanks Purpose: To detect possible contamination from equipment sources and to verify that sampling, transportation, and decontamination procedures do not introduce possible contamination to collected samples.

General: Analyte-free, deionized water will be used to create blanks. The deionized water will be obtained from the MCES Mili-q DI water source and stored clear carboys in the CRWD shop.

10% of all submitted samples shall be blank samples. CRWD will conduct 5 types of equipment blanks at the following frequencies and times to meet the goals of 10%: Blank Type

Frequency 3 sites,3 times/year 5 times/year 10 times/year 10 times/year 10 times/year

ISCO Sampler Blank Grab Sampler Blank Churn Blank Sampler Bottle Blank MCES Bottle Blank

When to Complete During level calibrations, maintenance, or uninstalls In the field after a suite of grab samples, after a triple rinse of DI water In the shop after a suite of composite churns, before liquinox treatment After dishwashing cycle Anytime

Blank samples will be collected approximately within the months shaded in the table below:

Month January February March April May June July August September October November December Total

ISCO Sampler Blank

9

Blank Schedule Grab Sampler Churn Blank Blank

5

10

99

Sampler Bottle Blank

MCES Bottle Blank

10

10

To create equipment blanks, deionized water will be passed through the equipment or poured in the container to be tested. The deionized water will then be distributed in to a 4,000 mL MCES submission container. Blanks will be submitted to MCES as individual samples and will be labeled according to the table below (CRWD125-142 are reserved for individual ISCO Sampler blank sites).

Code

Name

CRWD121 CRWD122

EB_GrSamp EB_MCESBo

CRWD123 CRWD124 CRWD125 CRWD126 CRWD127 CRWD128 CRWD129 CRWD130 CRWD131

EB_ISCOBO EB_Churn EB_SAP EB_HF EB_Kittson EB_Phalen EB_TBO EB_TBEB EB_TBWB

Grab Sampler MCES Bottle ISCO Bottle

Code

Name

CRWD132 CRWD133

EB_VPO EB_VPI

CRWD134 CRWD135 CRWD136 CRWD137 CRWD141 CRWD142 CRWD144

EB_UpVilla EB_Como 3 EB_Como 7 EB_AHUG EB_Rose EB_Stream EB_NC3

Villa Park Outlet Villa Park Inlet Upper Villa Inlet

A “Blanks” chain of custody will be filled out. Blank samples will be submitted as “Equipment – Blank.” The following parameters will be checked for all blank samples: • • • •

CL-AV HARD-MSV MET-MSV NH3N-AV

• • • •

• • •

N_N-AV NUT-AV pH TDS-180

TSSVSS-GF P-AV ORTHO_P

ISCO Sampler Blank Purpose: To determine any contamination stemming from the ISCO sampler intake tubing, strainer, or pump tubing.

Frequency: 3 sites, 3 times per year, in the field during level calibration or other CSE events Sites: All FWQ sites will be eligible for ISCO sampler blanks during level calibrations, maintenance, or uninstalls. The locations will be logged in the “Quality Control Field Form.”

Number of Staff: 2+ 100

Expected Time for Completion: 25 minutes Equipment: Confined Space Entry • • • • •

•

Manhole hook Tripod Winch Lifeline Gas Meters (at least two (with one being the new Quattro), with extra batteries and screwdriver) Walkie-Talkies (check to ensure they are charged)

• • • • • • • • •

Flashlight Helmets with headlamps Rubber boots, waders Buckets with grab sampler rope Harness Gloves Chain for tripod Safety vests and fencing (if needed) PFD (if needed)

• •

iPad 4,000 mL laboratory sample containers Cooler

Equipment Blank • • • •

Deionized water Bucket & rope ISCO 6712 sampler and components Snips & zips

•

Procedure: 1. Open the lock box and manhole, if needed. Remove the sampler from the manhole, if needed. If the sampler intake is located in a confined space, follow the “Confined Space Entry SOP” to set up equipment and access the space.

Attendant: 2. Lower a bucket down to the confined space entrant containing two 4,000 mL containers of deionized water, one pair of snips, and zip ties.

3. The entrant will remove the strainer from the flow. Use the sampler to manually purge the line for 2 minutes (pump reverse). After 2 minutes, communicate to the entrant that the strainer is ready to take the sample.

4. Set the sampler to pump forward. Disconnect the pump tubing from the sampler base and let the sampler pump water for about 30 seconds away from the manhole

before filling a submission container. The sample container should be at least 3,000 mL full. Cap the sample and label with the current date and time.

5. Communicate to the entrant that the blank sampling is complete.

101

6. Fill out a “Quality Control Field Form” indicating that an ISCO sampler blank had been taken, noting the time and the alias used on the bottle.

7. Follow the “Confined Space Entry SOP” to safely retrieve the entrant and return the area to its previous condition.

Entrant: 8. Once inside the space, locate the sampling plate and, if necessary, cut any zip ties attaching the intake strainer to the plate.

9. Raise the intake strainer out of the base flow, if possible. The attendant will manually purge the line for 2 minutes.

10. After 2 minutes, place the intake strainer in a container of deionized water while the attendant sets the sampler to pump.

11. After receiving notice that the sample container has been filled, remove the strainer from the deionized water and zip tie the strainer back into place. Collect all items into the bucket to be lifted to the surface.

12. Follow the “Confined Space Entry SOP” to safely exit the space and return the area to its previous condition.

Grab Sampler Blank Purpose: To determine any contamination stemming from the grab sampler device Frequency: One blank, 5 times per year, in the field after winter base grab sampling events Number of Staff: 2 Expected Time for Completion: 5 minutes Equipment: • • •

• • •

Deionized water (loaded in truck) 4,000 mL grab sampler and rope Clipboard with MCES lab sheet

iPad 4,000 mL sample container, labeled Cooler

Procedure: 1. Follow the “[Base/Snowmelt] Grab Sampling SOP” to prepare for a grab sampling event.

2. At the last site of a grab sampling route, triple rinse a 4,000 mL grab sampler with deionized water.

3. After rinsing, fill the grab sampler with deionized water.

102

4. Dump the contents of the sampler in to a 4,000 mL laboratory sample container. Fill in the grab sampler blank label with the appropriate date, time, and alias (EB_GrSamp).

5. Fill out a “Quality Control Field Form” denoting that a grab sampler blank was taken, the date and time at which it was taken, and the alias that was given to it.

6. Place the blank in a cooler to be transported to MCES for analysis.

Churn Blank Purpose: To determine any contamination stemming from the churning device Frequency: One blank, 10 times per year, in the shop after base or storm sample compositing Number of Staff: 1 Expected Time for Completion: 10 minutes Equipment: • • •

• • •

Deionized water 8 or 16 L churn MCES lab sheet

iPad 4,000 mL bottle, labeled Cooler

Procedure: 1. Follow the “Sample Compositing SOP” to composite samples collected from a base or storm composite events, using an 8 or 16 L churn.

2. After compositing the last sample for the day, triple rinse the churn with tap water.

3. Pour 4,000 mL of deionized water into the churn. Churn the deionized water like you would a composite sample. Let the blank run through the nozzle, into a 4,000 mL laboratory submission container.

4. Cap the bottle, and place a churn blank label on the container. Fill it out with the appropriate date and time as well as the alias used (EB_Churn).

5. Fill out the COC indicating the blank alias and the coordinating date and time.

6. Fill out a “Quality Control Field Form” indicating that a churn blank was made, denoting the date and time as well as the alias used.

7. Dump contents of churn and clean as directed.

103

ISCO Sampler Bottle Blank Purpose: To determine any contamination stemming from the ISCO sampler bottles or the cleaning/dishwashing procedure Frequency: One blank, 10 times per year, in the shop any time after dishwashing cycle is done Number of Staff: 1 Expected Time for Completion: 10 minutes Equipment: • • •

• • • •

Deionized water ISCO 6712 sampler bottles (10 compact or 5 standard bottles) MCES lab sheet

Dishwasher iPad 4,000 mL bottle, labeled Cooler

Procedure: 1. Follow the “ISCO Sampler Bottle Cleaning SOP” to clean the bottles after use in the field.

2. Before placing clean bottles into carousel for storage, select 10 compact (400 mL) or 5 standard (800 mL) ISCO sampler bottles at random.

3. Fill each bottle with deionized water.

4. Cap the bottles and shake to mix well. Pour the contents of each bottle into a 4,000 mL laboratory submission container. Seal the container.

5. Place an ISCO sampler bottle blank label on the container with the proper date and time. Fill out a “Quality Control Field Form” indicating the date, time, and alias (EB_ISCOBo). Place blank in refrigerator until transferred to MCES for analysis.

6. Allow used bottles to air dry before placing in carousels.

MCES Bottle Blank Purpose: To determine any contamination stemming from MCES laboratory sample containers Frequency: One blank, 10 times per year, in the shop at any time Number of Staff: 1 104

Expected Time for Completion: 5 minutes Equipment: • • •

• •

Deionized water MCES lab sheet iPad

4,000 mL bottle, labeled Cooler

Labeling: Procedure: 1. Select one 4,000 mL MCES laboratory sample container at random.

2. Fill the bottle with deionized water.

3. Place an MCES bottle blank label on the bottle and label the container with the proper date, and time. Place blank in refrigerator until transferred to MCES for analysis.

4. Fill out a “Quality Control Field Form” indicating the date, time, and alias of the sampler bottle blank. Place blank container in refrigerator until transferred to MCES for analysis.

105

3G. ISCO 6712 Volume Calibration Purpose: To calibrate the sample volume on Isco 6712 samplers for composite sampling General: Each full water quality station with an installed Isco 6712 sampler has the capability to take composite samples. The volume of the samples must be calibrated at the time of installation and as needed during the field season. To calibrate the sample volume at stations with no base flow, one person must access the location of the sieve and place the end in a bottle of water. Using the keypad on the sampler, the sample volume is calibrated.

Frequency: At the time of installation, and as needed throughout the field season Number of Staff: 2 team members (Confined Space Entry certified if needed) Locations: Any station with an Isco 6712 Expected Time for Completion: 5 minutes to 45 minutes, dependent upon CSE requirements Equipment: • • • • • • •

2 – 4000mL bottles of tap water per each station without baseflow Graduated cylinder (located in truck) Ruler (usually level calibration is performed at the same time) Isco 6712 sampler Laptop iPad One extra marine battery

Confined Space Entry Equipment (if needed): • • • • •

• • • •

Manhole hook or T-wrench Tripod Winch (check to ensure it is wound properly) Lifeline Gas Meters (at least 2 (with one being the new Quattro), with extra batteries and screwdriver) Walkie-Talkies (check to ensure they are fully charged) Flashlight, head lamp, and/or stick-light Helmets with headlamps Rubber boots, hip waders, and/or waders

• • • • • • •

Buckets with ropes Harness Gloves Chain for tripod Safety vests and fencing (if needed) PFD (if needed) Any equipment needed to perform the duties at the station

Procedure: Before Leaving the Office 1. If confined space entry is needed, ensure at least two team members going to the location are Confined Space Entry certified. Advise team members in the office of the plan for the day, and the stations you will be entering. Review the Confined Space Entry SOP. 2. Check over all of the equipment. Do any batteries need replacing? Are the lights, gas meters, walkie-talkies charged? Is any of the equipment damaged?

3. Check the weather. DO NOT enter any confined space during storm conditions. Even a small amount of rain can produce dangerous conditions below ground. Keep an eye on the weather when out in the field. Even if it is not raining at your current location, it may be raining upstream. Weather can change quickly, so be prepared.

4. Pack the equipment into the truck. All team members should check over the equipment thoroughly. Forgotten equipment can result in dangerous situations or time delays in returning to the office.

Upon Reaching the station: 1. If confined space entry will be performed, review and follow the “Confined Space Entry SOP.” 2. If the station does not have baseflow, open the station location using the manhole hook or T-wrench. Remove the sampler or logger if needed. If the station does have baseflow, skip to Step 4.

3. The entrant will access the sieve, clip any zip-ties securing the sieve, and place the end of the sieve inside a 4000mL bottle of water.

4. The attendant will stop the program and prepare for the calibration: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j)

k) l) m) n)

Press the red button Using the arrows on the keypad highlight “Stop Program” Press “Enter” (the yellow button with the arrow pointing left) Using the arrow on the keypad highlight “Other Functions” Press “Enter” Using the arrows on the keypad highlight “Manual Functions” Press “Enter” Using the arrows on the keypad highlight “Calibrate Volume” Press “Enter” Using the arrows on the keypad highlight either “Standard Portable” or “Compact Portable.” Standard Portable is for samplers with large bottles. Compact Portable is for samplers with small bottles.

Press “Enter” Using the keypad, enter the desired volume (in mL). Usually this is 200 mL. Press “Enter” Remove the pump tubing from at the location where it attaches to the bottle housing, and place the end of the hose inside the graduated cylinder. The sampler will first pump backwards to purge the sample line. Then forward to dispense the desired sample amount. Then backwards again to purge the sample line.

5. Read the sample volume. If the sample volume is +/-50mL of the desired volume, type “200” with the keypad, press “Enter,” then skip to Step 6. If the sample volume is outside this range, then incrementally adjust the sample volume, and repeat Steps 4 and 5 until the sample is within the desired range. ***Note: The samplers will often over adjust for changes to the sample volume. If you receive a sample of 300mL, type into the sampler around, “220.” If you receive a sample of 140mL, type into the sampler “180.” By incrementally adjusting the sample volume, you reduce the risk of overshooting the desired sample volume.

6. Once the desired sample volume is reached, the entrant can take a level reading and perform a level calibration if needed (see “Level Calibration SOP”). The entrant can exit the confined space.

7. Restart the program by: a) b) c) d) e)

Pressing the red button on the keypad to return to the Main Menu Highlight “Run Program” Check that the sample bottle starts at 1.

Press “Enter” The display screen should state “Disabled”

8. Secure the pump tubing to the bottle housing.

9. Complete the respective station visit form. Include in the maintenance section that a volume calibration was performed. If you were unable to complete the volume calibration, see the “Troubleshooting SOP.” Before Leaving the station: 1. Take down and secure all equipment in the truck. Check the station for any stray equipment.

2. Check the iPad Confined Space Entry Form is completed, and any notes are completed in the iPad or laptop field form.

3. Make sure the caps are secured on the back of the sampler and hoses are intact.

4. Close the manhole and lock the lockbox At the Shop: 1. Clean up and put away all equipment.

2. Check over the field notes. Advise technicians of any problems that occurred in the field.

Note any repairs needed on the white board in the hallway.

3F. ISCO Level Calibration Purpose: To calibrate measured level on flow loggers and Area/Velocity sensors.

General: Flow loggers and Area/Velocity (AV) sensors measure the velocity and the level of a station. The level of each sensor is calibrated during spring installation, and during the field season if a sensor is replaced. Each month during the field season the level is validated at all stations. The level is also validated when the reviewed data appears to be incorrect. Two staff members are required for a level calibration station visit. One person remains at the surface and completes the programming and notations. The second team member will access the AV sensor and take a manual measurement of the water level in front of the sensor.

Frequency: At the time of installation, monthly during the field season, if battery has been dead for an extended period, as needed for troubleshooting, or if a new sensor is installed during the field season.

Number of Staff: 2 Locations: All stations during spring installation; only stations with sustained baseflow during monthly level checks (see the 2018 route list at the end of this SOP) Expected Time for Completion: 10 - 45 minutes, depending on if confined space entry is needed to access the station Equipment: • • • • • • • • • • •

Isco 2150 download cable Lock box key (in glove compartment of truck) Ruler Laptop iPad Camera Binoculars (for SAP) Rake and shovel (for McCarrons outlet) Waders (hip and chest) Marine Batteries (where applicable) Tool Bucket

Confined Space Entry (determine equipment as needed to gain access to the probe): 141

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Manhole hook Tripod Winch (ensure that it is wound properly) Lifeline Gas Meters (both, with extra batteries and screwdriver) Walkie-Talkies Flashlight, head lamp, and/or stick-light Helmet Rubber boots, hip/full waders iPad (for confined space entry form) Buckets with grab sampler ropes Harness Gloves Chain for tripod Safety vests and fencing (if needed)

Procedure for Sensor Installation: 1. Open the lock box and/or manhole. Remove the logger from the manhole if needed. If confined space entry is necessary to access the sensor, one team member will need to enter the station. Follow the “Confined Space Entry SOP.” While the first team member enters the station to access the sensor, the other team member will connect to the 2150 module through Flowlink to download the data and observe the level reading on the computer.

2. Once the sensor is accessed, take 2-3 measurements of the water level. Turn the ruler parallel to the flow, so turbulence from the ruler is minimized when taking the measurement. Read the correct side of the ruler, measuring the water depth in tenths of feet (not in inches). The measurement is of the actual water level in the pipe, so the measurement should be taken from the bottom of the pipe on the cement to the surface of the water (this is in front of and off of the sensor plate). DO NOT TAKE THE MEASUREMENT ON THE PLATE OR ON THE SENSOR—measure on the pipe surface only.

Communicate the water level measurement to the team member above ground. a. Measuring the level can be different at different locations based on the pipe surface. Some pipe bottoms are very rough (e.g. Phalen Creek), and the location in front of the sensor where level should be measured is not uniform. In these 142

cases, check with a more senior staff member as to the appropriate location for measurement. b. Use the walkie-talkie to communicate the level to the staff member at the surface, and check the level again if it appears far off from the value the computer is reading. This is just to double-check that the value was initially read correctly. c. Water rushing at a high speed against the ruler produces turbulence and a swell of water upwards on the ruler. Try to lower your body to see where the flow of water is aiming on the ruler to get an accurate measurement. d. During installation, the stations without baseflow need to have the level calibrated within a bucket filled with water prior to installation of the sensor (for ease of calibration). Before installing the sensor in the storm drain, connect the sensor to Flowlink and calibrate level using this SOP while the sensor is in a bucket in which the level can be manually measured.

3. Check the sensor and around the sensor for any abnormalities at this time, such as debris blocking the sensor, and/or for debris upstream or surrounding the sensor that could be causing the level to be reading an inaccurate value. Advise the team member on the surface of any rocks, leaves, or other debris removed from near or in front of the sensor, such that it is included in the field notes. Also, note any damage of the sensor.

Document any obstruction/damage to sensor that may have recently influenced flow or water levels or the ability of the sensor to record level or velocity. a. At Kittson, for example, it is common for gunk to become crusted-on to the sensor. This could potentially affect velocity readings over time. During each level cal at this station, use a sink scrubby pad to scrub off all sides of the sensor to prevent this from occurring.

4. The team member above-ground will compare both the manual level reading and the computer level reading. When installing a new sensor (during spring installs or during a re-install throughout the year), the level in Flowlink is always changed to the value observed by the manual reading. Because this calibrates the level of the sensor for the entire year of data, it is important that this value is read as accurately as possible. To change the level for either the 2150 or 750, use the following steps: a. 2150 module: i. Click on the “Jump to measurements” tab and select 2150 ii. Select “Level” from the dropdown menu. iii. Change the level in the space provided and click “Apply” to save all changes.

143

b. 750 module (MOW): i. Stop the program and scroll to “Program” on the main home screen. ii. Scroll through the program menu until reaching the screen “Current level is…” and click the up arrow to highlight the current level (this will blink when selected). iii. The program will automatically highlight the space under “Adjust level to…”. Type in the corrected level value, then push the yellow arrow key to enter and save the new value. iv. Press the Red button in the upper right in order to exit back to the main menu on the 6712.

5. If changes were made to the level during install, make a note of the level cal in the field notes by: a. Selecting “Yes” under “System Programming Changed?”, then entering the current level (what the computer initially read), and adjusted level (what was manually measured and what the level is being changed to) in the respective area of the field form. b. Indicating in the “Maintenance Performed” section of the field notes that a level calibration occurred by writing (e.g.) “level cal from 0.58 to 0.68”.

Procedure for Routine Level Validation: 1. Open the lock box and/or manhole. Remove the logger from the manhole if needed. If confined space entry is necessary to access the sensor, one team member will need to enter the station. Follow the “Confined Space Entry SOP.” While the first team member enters the station to access the sensor, the other team member will connect to the 2150 module through Flowlink to download the data and observe the level reading on the computer.

2. Once the sensor is accessed, take 2-3 measurements of the water level. Turn the ruler parallel to the flow, so turbulence from the ruler is minimized when taking the measurement. Read the correct side of the ruler, measuring the water depth in tenths of feet (not in inches). The measurement is of the actual water level in the pipe, so the measurement should be taken from the bottom of the pipe on the cement to the surface of the water (this is in front of and off of the sensor plate). DO NOT TAKE THE MEASUREMENT ON THE PLATE OR ON THE SENSOR—measure on the pipe surface only.

Communicate the water level measurement to the team member above ground.

144

a. Measuring the level can be different at different locations based on the pipe bottom surface. Some pipe bottoms are very rough (e.g. Phalen Creek), and the location in front of the sensor where level should be measured is not uniform. In these cases, check with a more senior staff member as to the appropriate location for measurement. b. Use the walkie-talkie to communicate the level to the staff member at the surface, and check the level again if it appears far off from the value the computer is reading. This is just to double-check that the value was initially read correctly. c. Water rushing at a high speed against the ruler produces turbulence and a swell of water upwards on the ruler. Try to lower your body to see where the flow of water is aiming on the ruler to get an accurate measurement.

3. Check the sensor and around the sensor for any abnormalities at this time, such as debris blocking the sensor, and/or for debris upstream or surrounding the sensor that could be causing the level to be reading an inaccurate value. Advise the team member on the surface of any rocks, leaves, or other debris removed from near or in front of the sensor, such that it is included in the field notes. Also, note any damage of the sensor and make note of it if seen. Document any obstruction/damage to sensor that may have recently influenced flow or water levels or the ability of the sensor to record level or velocity. a. At Kittson, for example, it is common for gunk to become crusted-on to the sensor. This could potentially affect velocity readings over time. During each level cal at this station, use a sink scrubby pad to scrub off all sides of the sensor to prevent this from occurring.

4. The team member above-ground will note both the manual level reading and the computer level reading in the “Notes” section of the field notes. If the manual level reading differs from the level being read by the sensor by >0.1 ft or more, make a specific note of this occurring in the “Maintenance Performed” section of the field notes, by writing (e.g.) “Level differs between manual and computer reading by >0.1 ft during level check”. This is to alert the staff member completing the data QA/QC for the station that there potentially needs to be a level adjustment to the data in WISKI during data cleaning. In addition: a. Do NOT manually change the level in Flowlink. As of the 2017 monitoring season, any level cal station visits throughout the year are conducted to note the 145

level, and any changes to the level data will be applied during the QA/QC process in WISKI, not routinely in the field. b. If the level reading from the computer appears way off from the manual level reading, there could be something wrong with the sensor. Note this in the “Notes” section of the field form, and alert the monitoring coordinator, as station maintenance (and sensor replacement) may be needed.

5. Finally, if the manual level of the sensor was within 0.1 ft of the computer reading, make a note that a level calibration station visit occurred by writing “Level cal ok” in the “Maintenance Performed” section of the field notes. This alerts the staff member completing QA/QC for the station that a level check was performed on that date/time, and the two levels were comparable.

Before Leaving the station: 1. Take pictures of any abnormalities in the field. This can include but is not limited to a noticed illicit discharge or equipment damage.

2. Check to ensure the logger is secured properly if suspended in a manhole.

3. Check that all protective caps have been put back into place.

4. Ensure the Confined Space Entry form is completed with the exit time.

5. Ensure the field notations are completed in the field forms.

6. Check for any equipment left in the field and that all locks and manholes are secured.

At the Shop: 1. Clean up and put away all equipment.

2. Check over the field notes. Advise technicians of any problems that occurred in the field.

Note any repairs needed on the white board in the hallway, and alert the monitoring coordinator if there are any potential sensor replacements necessary.

146

*NOTE*: For the list of 2018 level cal stations and supplies, see below (the file “Level calibration route 2018” is located here: W:\07 Programs\Monitoring & Data Acquisition\2018 Monitoring\2018 Routes)

Level Calibration Route 2018 1. MOW Inlet 2. St. Anthony Park Binoculars 3. Hidden Falls 4. East Kittsondale 5. Phalen Creek 6. Trout Brook Outlet 7. Trout Brook-East Branch 8. Trout Brook-West Branch 9. McCarrons Outlet  Bring rake & shovel to clean out grate AFTER level cal 10. Villa Park Outlet & VP Overflow Channel 11. Upper Villa (Inlet & Bypass) 12. AHUG-Inlet Download conductivity probe (bring shuttle and appropriate connector)

Things to Bring: •

• • • • • • • • •

CSE Equipment o Tripod o Retractable Winch o Material Winch o Harnesses o Lighting o Helmets (check the light) o Gas meters (2) (bump test both) o Walkie Talkies (check the charge) Waders (Hip & Chest) Ruler Computer & iPad Hobo shuttle Rake & shovel 6V Batteries Sm. and Lg. Marine Batteries (as needed) Binoculars Tool Bucket

147

10G. WISKI Data Editing 1) Flow Data Editing: Purpose: To edit the flow data from all stations using the WISKI database software on a weekly basis. Keep all data processing consistent and keep editing documentation concise and accurate.

General: In WISKI, staff will be able to make all edits to the data directly within the program, document the edits and quality of the data using WISKI quality codes and standard remarks, and keep all of the data editing documentation in one location. This makes it easier for current and future staff to see how the data was edited.

Frequency: • •

Flow data download from field computers will occur every Friday Data processing will be completed on a weekly basis in order to o Identify maintenance issues at each station as they arise to improve data quality o Increase efficiency in data editing (i.e. incrementally complete data editing instead of editing the entire year at once) o Improve data accuracy by having each staff person be an “expert” on the flow characteristics at each station by viewing the data weekly

Number of Staff: All MRM staff Equipment: • •

WISKI Access to CRWD W:// drive (to open previous data and metadata files)

Procedure: Note: •

All stations are set up with all of the appropriate time series in WISKI: o The “Raw” time series for both level (L) and velocity (V) is the raw data that is pulled into WISKI from Flowlink. The “Raw” time series is programmed to assign all data the Quality Code of “Unknown” upon import (unless it is considered Missing, in which case it is assigned a Quality Code of “Missing”).

o The “Edited” time series for both L and V is the copied data from the “Raw” time series. All edits listed below should be made in the “Edited” time series. Quality codes are then assigned in this time series if any edits are made. o The discharge (Q) time series is not an editable time series; it is a product of L or Q=A*V Quality Codes: WISKI uses quality codes to assign different levels of quality to the data. These are displayed using colors and text in the control bar at the bottom of the graph, as well as in the table next to the graph. The following quality codes represent the different levels of quality of CRWD data: Code Good Fair Suspect Poor Unknown Missing

Number 40 80 120 160 200 255

Meaning Default for data that has been deemed OK after QA/QC process (unmodified) Any data that has been interpolated, offset, slightly modified etc.

Data derived from a regression relationship or rating curve Poor quality data - should not be used for analyses or critical applications Default for all imported data - signifies that no QA/QC has been done Missing Data

WISKI Color Code

Standard Remarks: Standard Remarks are notes that can be designated to a section of data describing how it was modified. These are also displayed in text in the control bar at the bottom of the graph, as well as the table next to the graph that are available in WISKI. The standard remarks that CRWD staff will use for their data editing (of the larger standard remarks list available in WISKI) are listed below. [Note: WISKI will automatically select the appropriate standard remark for all edits]. If staff manually edits the data points, they can insert a free comment to explain what was changed.

WISKI Standard Remark Values copied Values copied and proportionally fit to both sides Range filled with constant Range filled with linear interpolation Gap filled with constant Gap filled with linear interpolation Gap inserted Manually edited Manually inserted Range vertically shifted with constant Range vertically shifted by linear transformation

Editing Description N/A N/A Set to constant Autocorrected - bad/negative value Set to constant Autocorrected - missing Set to zero Additional edit, add free comment Additional edit, add free comment Fixed offset Proportional offset for level drift

Level Data Editing: 1. On CRWD W:// drive, open up the metadata Word document created for the station under the annual monitoring folder. Consult this document to see if there are reasons recorded for bad/missing data observed (e.g. equipment failure, level calibrations, debris on sensor, etc).

2. In WISKI, open a graph of the raw and edited level time series for the station you are working on, using the date range to specify the time period you would like to edit.

3. Once in the graph, open the control bar by right-clicking near the bottom of the graph. a. Select Graph Settings -> Show Control Bar. 4. If this is the first time this time series has been opened for editing during the year, note the quality code color to determine what code the importer assigned to the data. All data is imported and assigned by WISKI as either “Unknown” or “Missing”. Missing data should NOT be edited or recreated, but left as “Missing” in WISKI. 5. First examine the data on a larger time frame to see what the general trend is for the station data and to notice any large data discrepancies.

6. Go to the time period you would like to edit by using the magnifying glass icon (zoom tool). This will usually be in the 1 week time spans (don’t make the time period longer than 1 month). Make sure that you can see all of the columns of the table by dragging the table window open. The time period to be edited should be selected and assigned a quality code of “Good”. As edits are made to the data, the quality code will be downgraded (as edited points are no longer original data points). Therefore, data points that have a quality code of other than “Unknown” signifies that someone has examined that data. It also becomes a placeholder for where the individual left off in editing the data. a. NOTE: In order to make sure that the data is labeled as “Edited”, an additional step needs to be taken. With the same data selected that was just assigned the “Good” quality code, set the interpolation type to “linear interpolation” and hit “Apply”. This is the Interpolation type that has already been selected, but this needs to be completed in order to give the data the “, ed” label within the Quality Code column, so that the data is designated as edited.

7. Using the data in the table and the zoom tool, go through the data to look for missing periods, negative values, “bad” data, including: a. Bad levels during storms b. Abnormal level increase c. Level drift 8. There are two main types of editing that will be completed: point editing and section editing (described below). Conduct point editing prior to section editing.

a. Point Editing: edits made to individual points of data that are bad/missing; low level of complexity. b. Section Editing: edits made to larger sections of data that are bad/missing; higher level of complexity and consideration. May have to occur by looking at the data for a month timespan in order to view longer-term data edits that need to occur.

9. To edit a data point or section of data, select the data to edit in the table, right-click on the selection, select range-related editing, and select the appropriate edit. a. Note: Because the first and last selected points of data in a range are NOT affected by the edits made, select one data point on either side of the range you wish to edit when using the linear transformation data editing option. These points will not be affected, and the data within those bounds will be linear transformed based on these two outside range data points selected.

10. Use the following table to determine the steps for different editing scenarios, along with the quality code and standard remark that is associated with the edit:

LEVEL EDITING:

Problem with Data

Edit

Site does not have baseflow but contains standing water in pipe (where Q depends on L, i.e.: CCLRT sites)

Add validator in the Edited Level Time Series for the site and select KiScript script corrector N/A (choose Velocity Cut-off and base the cut-off on the Raw time series and the appropriate level)

N/A

Delete data points

Missing

N/A

None - leave the data as missing

Missing

N/A

Edit the data using linear interpolation

Fair

Range filled with linear interpolation

Noisy data during baseflow/non-storm periods

Edit the data using the "Edit Values" icon.*

Fair

Bad level data during storm and/or non-storm event

Insert Data Gap

Missing

There is data shown that occurs before install/after uninstall Missing data Negative values during baseflow/non-storm periods

Abnormal level values between two dates: - Clear start/stop points where level goes bad, i.e. as what happens between poor level cals where the first is off and the second corrects it so that a section of data is all off by the same (or relatively the same) amount.

- Unclear start/stop points where level goes bad, i.e. the start of a section of data appears good, and then the level drifts down until there is a point where the data appears good again.

Quality Code Standard Remark

Manually edited, free comment ("Removed noise") Free comment (e.g.:"Sensor ripped out")

Edit the data using the Shift range vertically option. Use either Parallel shift or Linear Fair transformation depending on what the data looks like.

Range vertically shifted with constant x.xx OR Range vertically shifted by linear transformation

Edit the data using Drift Correction > Simple (1st data point should be previous known valid point.

2nd is the data point where drift was corrected Fair by field calibration (Isco equipment) or the field observed reading (Global water level loggers)

Manually edited

* When editing noisy data, select a range to edit and click on the “Edit values” icon. Manually select the points you would like to change. Use the “delete” button on the keyboard to delete the selected values (do not use the “delete values” or “delete records” in the table drop-down menu – this will delete the whole range of values in the working range). Without changing the working range, right-click on the table view and select gap editing  linear interpolation.

Change the quality code to fair, check the value distance, and click ok. This will adjust only the missing values that were created when you deleted points, and change only these values to a quality code of fair.

Velocity Data Editing: 1. Keeping the edited level time series open for the station you are working on (as well as the associated station metadata), right-click on the graph and select open time series.

Open up the corresponding raw and edited velocity time series for the station. Use the date range to specify the time period you would like to edit (probably the same as the level time range).

2. Once in the graph, control the settings of the following as per your preference: a. Open the control bar by right-clicking near the bottom of the graph. Select Graph Settings -> Show Control Bar (if this is not open already). b. Move the Level graph into a different pane using the Plot Areas icon. c. Adjust the vertical axis if necessary.

3. If this is the first time this time series has been opened for editing during the year, note the quality code color to determine what code the importer assigned to the velocity data. All data is imported and assigned by WISKI as either “Unknown” or “Missing”.

Missing data should NOT be edited or recreated, but left as “Missing” in WISKI. 4. First examine the data on a larger time frame to see what the general trend is for the station data and to notice any large data discrepancies.

5. For sites without baseflow: this MUST be completed prior to moving on to step 6! For these sites, there is a WISKI KiScript Script Corrector set up in the Edited Velocity Time Series for each site without baseflow. This validator sets velocity to zero whenever level is below a certain specified cutoff value (Note: below a level of 0.08ft, the sensor cannot accurately read velocity). This level value needs to be tailored to each specific site, and needs to be tailored BEFORE moving on to step 6! To edit this level value: a. Open the edited velocity time series by double-clicking on the time series. b. “Under Data validation and correction” select “Add…” c. Choose KiScript based data validation. d. In the dropdown menu select “Velocity Cutoff.” e. Verify that the edited level time series for the station is selected (the default is raw velocity). f. Edit the level value by entering a value similar to previous year’s metadata. If this level does not apply to the current year’s data, adjust the value until an appropriate level threshold is found. g. Change the agent validity time range to encompass only the monitoring year that is currently being edited. h. Have another MRM team member verify this value before moving on to step 6.

Once step 6 is completed and all data is marked as “edited,” you will be unable to go back and change this threshold value.

6. Go to the time period you would like to edit by using the magnifying glass icon (zoom tool). This will usually be in the 1 week time spans (don’t make the time period longer than 1 month). Make sure that you can see all of the columns of the table by dragging the table window open. The time period to be edited should be selected and assigned a quality code of “Good”. As edits are made to the data, the quality code will be downgraded (as edited points are no longer original data points). Therefore, data points that have a quality code of other than “Unknown” signifies that someone has examined that data. a. NOTE: In order to make sure that the data is labeled as “Edited”, an additional step needs to be taken. With the same data selected that was just assigned the “Good” quality code, set the interpolation type to “linear interpolation” and hit “Apply”. This is the Interpolation type that has already been selected, but this needs to be completed in order to give the data the “, ed” label within the Quality Code column, so that the data is designated as edited.

7. Using the data in the table and the zoom tool, go through the data to look for negative values and “bad” data, including: b. Dropped (0 value) velocities during storms. c. Periods of “noisy” data. d. Note: if there are periods of bad/missing level data, this often means that the corresponding velocity data will be bad as well.

8. There are two main types of editing that will be completed: point editing and section editing (described below). Conduct point editing prior to section editing. a. Point Editing: edits made to individual points of data that are bad/missing; low level of complexity. b. Section Editing: edits made to larger sections of data that are bad/missing; higher level of complexity and consideration. May have to occur by looking at the data for a month timespan in order to view longer-term data edits that need to occur.

9. To edit a data point or period of data, select the data to edit in the table, right-click on the selection, select Range-related editing (if it is a period with bad data), and select the appropriate edit. a. If there are points of missing velocity as a result of differing data recording intervals between level and velocity, these points can be corrected using Gaprelated editing and selecting the appropriate edit. b. Note: Because the first and last selected points of data in a range are NOT affected by the edits made, select one data point on either side of the range you wish to edit when using the linear transformation data editing option. These

points will not be affected, and the data within those bounds will be linear transformed based on these two outside range data points selected.

10. Use the following table to determine the steps for different editing scenarios, along with the quality code and standard remark that is associated with the edit:

VELOCITY EDITING: Problem with Data Level is below a site-specific cut-off value (i.e. for sites that do not have baseflow, velocity may be set to zero for any levels below a cutoff value that is specific to the site characteristics) There is data shown that occurs before install/after uninstall Missing data Negative values during baseflow/non-storm periods

Edit

Quality Code

Standard Remark

Open the Corrector time series for the station and adjust the level threshold value. Verify with N/A an MRM team member before finalizing.

N/A

Delete data points

Missing

N/A

None - leave the data as missing

Missing

N/A

Edit the data using linear interpolation

Fair

Range filled with linear interpolation

Noisy data during baseflow/non-storm periods

Edit the data using the "Edit Values" icon.*

Fair

Manually edited, free comment ("Removed noise")

Bad velocity data during stormflow, but NOT DURING a storm peak

Edit the data using linear interpolation

Fair

Range filled with linear interpolation

Bad velocity data during stormflow, and DURING a storm peak

Copy values from the Rating time series to the Edited V time series**

Suspect

Values copied OR Values copied and fit proportionally (try the Right side first, then to Both sides, depending on the data fit)

Suspect

Range flipped at horizontal line with y =0

Bad velocity data during stormflow, where the data looks like the correct magnitude and shape Flip horizontally (choose a value of 0)*** but is "upside-down" (the sensor is ripped out and facing the wrong way)

*When editing noisy data, select a range to edit and click on the “Edit values” icon. Manually select the points you would like to change. Use the “delete” button on the keyboard to delete the selected values (do not use the “delete values” or “delete records” in the table drop-down menu – this will delete the whole range of values in the working range). Without changing the working range, right-click on the table view and select gap editing > linear interpolation. Change the quality code to fair, check the value distance, and click ok. This will adjust only the missing values that were created when you deleted points, and change only these values to a quality code of fair. ** Each site that has stormflow has a Rating Curve time series associated with it. This time series is based on the L/V relationship developed for the site based on historical stormflow in order to recreate missing data occurring during a storm peak. This is only used for values that are missing from the PEAK of a storm, not for the rising or falling limbs of the hydrograph. Note: further linear interpolation edits may need to be used in order to smooth the transition of data copied from the Rating time series to the original data. ***Use this editing technique with caution and compare with the rating curve. A sensor facing backwards will not necessarily give an exactly inverse reading. Because the sensor is off the mounting plate, the level data (and therefore rating) will not be accurate either.

Tips for Data Editing: •

•

•

•

•

When editing data points in the table, save after each edited section so that a standard remark and quality code are assigned to each. If you try to perform a string of edits in the table and save it, it will ONLY apply the standard remark and quality code you select to the FINAL edit made.

If using gap-related editing, you can select a range of data that contains “good” data and gaps, then apply gap-related editing which will only change the data for the gaps.

However, it will apply a standard remark to the entire range of data that you select, even though it only changed the data in the gaps.

To fix a mistake that has already been saved in the Edited time series, open the Raw time series, and copy the data for the required time period from the Raw time series to the Edited time series. o Note: This will change the quality code and edited tag on the data. Follow initial data editing steps to make sure that the quality code and edited tag are added prior to making edits (where applicable). o Remarks from previous edits will remain. You may need to delete these old remarks to avoid confusion over what edits were performed.

If unable to open a certain station time series, it could be checked out by another user.

Go to the Tools dropdown menu, select Time Series, and Time Series Checked Out in order to access the time series. Check with the user to ensure that they are done using that set of data.

To scroll more easily through the table when trying to select and highlight a large set of data, click on the row you would like to start with, then select Shift and Page Down to scroll and highlight section-by-section.

2) Level Logger Data Editing: Purpose: To edit the level data from all level logger stations using the WISKI database software on a weekly basis. Keep all data processing consistent and keep editing documentation concise and accurate.

General: In WISKI, staff will be able to make all edits to the data directly within the program, document the edits and quality of the data using WISKI quality codes and standard remarks, and keep all of the data editing documentation in one location. This makes it easier for current and future staff to see how the data was edited.

Frequency: • • •

Level logger data download from field will occur every month; data will be imported into WISKI on a weekly basis Data edits will be completed on a weekly basis.

Annual average level offset (based on manual staff gauge readings) will be completed at end of year after equipment is removed.

Number of Staff: All MRM staff Equipment: • •

WISKI Access to CRWD W:// drive (to open previous data files, site metadata, level logger offset spreadsheets, and staff gauge surveys)

Procedure: 1. Perform level edits according to outline in flow data editing procedure.

2. Once level data for year is finalized, determine the annual average level offset and gauge zero (if applicable) for the site. a. Open the level logger offset spreadsheet for the respective year. b. Open the staff gauge survey spreadsheet for the respective year. c. Stations that have offsets applied have either a “correction” or “calc” time series within the level parameter in WISKI. These contain an agent for each year that applies the offsets. Create a new agent for the year of interest following the configuration from previous years and enter the offset and gauge zero information.

10E. Importing SW Lab Data into WISKI Purpose: To update the lab data in WISKI through uploading the most recent lab data spreadsheet sent from MCES. General: Updating lab data in WISKI will occur every time we see updated lab data within the MCES database. This entails exporting the data from the MCES online database to a .csv file, modifying the .csv file, and uploading it to WISKI using the Import Samplings agent.

Frequency: Every time new lab data gets updated to the MCES online database Number of Staff: 1 Expected Time for Completion: 15 minutes Equipment: • • •

WISKI MCES database open online (https://bi.metc.state.mn.us) Lab COCs

Procedure: Exporting data from MCES database: 1) Open the MCES database at https://bi.metc.state.mn.us with the following information: a. Username: Client_130 b. Password: CapReg@1410 c. Authentication Portal: Enterprise 2) Double-click on “Client Report Capitol Region Watershed District”. When prompted, enter the start and end dates for the range of data you would like (you can change the range at any time once the report is open).

3) Select “Cross Tab Report” (either in the navigation map on the left-hand side, or in the tab on the bottom of the main window).

4) Using the export icon in the upper left ( ), select “Reports,” check “Cross Tab Report.” Select file type as “CSV Archive.” Keep the current selections for export and click ok.

5) When the zipped file appears in the download bar, double-click to open. Double-click on the Cross Tab Report.csv file in the .zip folder.

6) Save as “MCES Lab Data Export_mmddyyyy” in “W:\07 Programs\Monitoring & Data Acquisition\2017 Monitoring\2017 Lab\Exported from MCES Database” using the format of files already in the folder.

7) Save the file again as a new spreadsheet in the folder “W:\07 Programs\Monitoring & Data Acquisition\2017 Monitoring\2017 Lab\FINAL imported into WISKI” using the format of files already in the folder and close the file after finalizing (this is just so no changes are made to the original export, and changes are made and saved to the file that will be used to import data to WISKI).

8) Delete the top three rows (sometimes this is only two rows, depending on whether or not staff changed the output format – delete the top rows that are blank with only the project ID number in the uppermost left cell).

9) Data is divided into multiple project numbers. Each has slightly different parameters. a. Exfiltration sites have many complex parameters not found in other project codes. Cut the Midway Office Warehouse (5533-17-05) and Upper Villa (553317-04) and paste into a new spreadsheet and save to the “FINAL imported into WISKI”. Amend the title with “_Exfiltration Sites.” Follow the SOP separately for this file. b. The remainder of project codes will be divided by blank and header rows.

Ensure that the parameters are listed in the same order and move unique parameters to the end of the list (use Freeze Panes to keep the main header row visible). Once ordered, delete the blank and header rows separating the data.

10) Scroll to the column with the header “P-AV”. Move this box to the box below (“Total Phosphorus (mg/L)”), or all of these values will overwrite the other Total Phosphorus (NUT-AV) values from the preceding column.

11) Verify that all of the info columns (measuring program, date, etc) do not have any blanks or issues.

12) The following are station-specific/column-specific issues we encounter: a. Willow Reserve samples are sometimes entered on the COCs as Base or Storm grabs. These should be changed to Wetland in all instances (unless specifically noted by the monitoring coordinator). b. TBNS upper, middle, and lower wetland grabs are sometimes labeled as storm – These should be changed to Wetland in all instances (unless specifically noted by the monitoring coordinator). c. We do not import all of the data from the Chlorophyll suite. The only two parameters we are interested in are Chlorophyll-a, Pheo-corrected, and Chlorophyll-a, trichromatic. Delete all other columns of parameters for the Chlorophyll suite (b-Chlorophyll, c-Chlorophyll, % Chlorophyll, and Pheophytin-a).

d. WISKI has been returning the error “Days could not be extracted”. This is because the date column is formatted as “m/d/yyyy hh:ss”. To address this error, format the date columns as “m/dd/yyyy hh:ss”. e. Illicit Discharge samples should read “ILLICIT” in the Measuring Program column. i. Samples also must have information in Column F. Refer to COC for info. f. Exxon Mobile wetland sample should be switched from CRWD68 to 1038 g. Measuring Program and Sample Type has been entered as lowercase letters.

Switch all to uppercase 13) Filter to see only the Duplicate (“DUP”) samples. Give ALL of these duplicates a “1” in the 7th column with the header “Sample Name”. This alerts WISKI that the data in this sample is a duplicate (called “Replicate 1” in WISKI).

14) Filter to see only the Replicate (“REP”) samples. Give ALL of these replicates a “2” in the 7th column with the header “Sample Name” This alerts WISKI that the data in this sample is a replicate (called “Replicate 2” in WISKI). a. The 2/6 replicate sample was entered incorrectly on the COC as REP 205. It should be labeled as REP 206. This needs to be fixed before importing into WISKI. Consult the original COC in the 2016 lab file folder. b. Most Replicate samples are to be taken as winter base grabs.

15) Filter to see only the Equipment Blanks (“EB”) samples. All of these should be assigned to the Measuring Program “EQUIP” and Sample Type “BLANK”.

16) Check through the Sample Status column, represented by the letters below. If there are outstanding values, just know that these will be updated in the future. a. A = value is authorized and approved as final b. V = certain values in sample are not finished/outstanding c. C = all data values are complete and waiting to be authorized d. X = the whole sample was cancelled (the lab should have notified us) 17) Save file before closing (.csv file needs to be closed during WISKI import).

Importing data into WISKI database: 1) Select Import Samplings from the dropdown menu.

2) Select ImportNewLabData. Verify that the mapping selected is ParamMapLabNew, column info is in line 2, and there are 3 header lines.

3) Under the “Default quality” dropdown menu, make sure that the quality “Good” is selected. If it is not selected, select “Good” from the dropdown menu before proceeding.

4) In the “Import” tab, using the “…” icon on the far right, open the most recent lab data .csv file that you just edited in the file “W:\07 Programs\Monitoring & Data Acquisition\2016 Monitoring\2016 Lab\FINAL imported into WISKI”.

5) Click “Read File”. Once the file has been read, the window will fill with the status of each line of the file. Click on the “Status” rectangle at the top of the window to sort the status lines. There are various statuses that can be observed: a. “OK (New)” means there are no problems with the line of data. b. “OK (New) Value without unit” means that a unit isn’t specified within the .csv being uploaded. That’s also fine. c. “OK (Update) Value without unit” means that the sample date is already in the system, and is being updated (usually with a parameter value that is being updated that was not previously there). That’s also fine. d. Errors come with a description of the error (i.e.: “Could not find sampling parameter by header” means that there is a column of lab data with a header that is not defined by the Parameter Mapping in the Configuration Tab).

6) If any errors are found, address them at this time (i.e. go back into.csv file, fix errors, and reimport/read the file). Ask a member of the MRM team to verify any errors or concerns.

7) Click on “Check Sample Results”. This tab looks through the current data in WISKI and compares the data you are trying to import. If there are any values that differ (i.e.: the lab updated or changed any previously entered data), this tab will show you the New Value and the Old Value. This allows you to QA/QC the lab data to see any discrepancies in the data between the previous and most recent versions of the data. a. Note the color legend at the bottom of the window that denotes if the value is new, updated, etc. You can click on the top of the color column to sort by color. b. If the update or change is valid and reasonable (e.g.: the old value was <0.002 and the new value is 0.0016, which is clearly an update), select “Accept” from the dropdown menu. c. If the update or change does not seem right where the value is clearly something different, select “Reject” from the dropdown menu. d. Note the rejected values and go find them in the previous and most recent spreadsheet. Note the date/time and sample values and contact the lab as to why the discrepancy is occurring. e. NOTE: it was discovered in March 2017 that if quality codes are manually changed in the WISKI database, and then the same data was reimported, the quality code was changed in the database to whatever was signaled in import.

Therefore, any changes to quality codes should be made at the end of the year

AFTER any additional lab imports would be completed. If a quality code needs to be changed during the year, make sure to note it in this document, such that: i. staff can go back into the database after the lab data import and change the quality code to the correct code, OR ii. remove the lab data from the import that would be overwriting the quality in the WISKI database 8) Once all errors and any updated sample results have been addressed, select “Import Data” at this time.

9) To view the recently imported lab data, change the perspective to WQM under the File dropdown menu. Then under Station List in the WISKI Explorer window, select the site you wish to view, then select the Measuring Program for which you would like to view lab data. *Listed below are station specific issues that came up in 2017. Similar problems could occur during 2017. Make note in the specific section (and also make a note on the COCs) so that these issues are corrected in the lab spreadsheet prior to import into WISKI! • •

Willow Reserve samples in 2017 were sometimes entered on the COCs as Base or Storm grabs. These should be changed to Wetland in all instances.

Some samples returned the error (Date Could not be Read). Simply highlight the date cells in the excel file, and change the format to m/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss

•

The 11/16 Kittson #2 base grab sample was recorded by MCES as CRWD5. Make sure to change to CRWD2.

•

Samples from 11/16 and 11/21 were created under DST. As those dates were after DST, the sample times should be changed to one hour ahead before importing into WISKI. TBNS upper, middle, and lower wetland grabs were labeled as storm – need to be relabeled as Wetland.

We do not import all of the data from the Chlorophyll suite. The only two parameters we are interested in are Chlorophyll-a, Pheo-corrected, and Chlorophyll-a, trichromatic.

Delete all other columns of parameters for the Chlorophyll suite (b-Chlorophyll, cChlorophyll, % Chlorophyll, and Pheophytin-a).

Check SAP 10/5 storm composite start time. This was written in by the lab as 00:21. It should be 02:17. This needs to be changed in the .csv prior to import.

For 2016 data: multiple dates/times were initially entered incorrectly on the COC submitted to the lab. Some Lab codes were also entered incorrectly. These all need to be

• •

• •

â&#x20AC;˘

â&#x20AC;˘

fixed before importing into WISKI. Consult the original COCs in the 2016 lab file folder.

Notes are made to all places where changes should occur.

The times for 11/16 replicate samples were entered incorrectly on COC. These need to be fixed before importing into WISKI. Consult the original COCs in the 2016 lab file folder.

Notes are made to all places where changes should occur.

The 11/14 EB samples at Villa In and Villa Out were entered incorrectly as Base Grabs; these should be changed.

10F. TP/TSS Outlier Identification in WISKI Purpose: To identify and flag lab data outliers of TP and TSS in WISKI. General: Identifying outliers is completed in WISKI by first automatically identifying values outside of thresholds for both TP and TSS during the import process. These identified outliers are then compared to TKN and Ortho-P values to ultimately determine their validity.

Frequency: Whenever data is imported into WISKI and once at the end of the year Number of Staff: One Expected Time for Completion: 5-10 minutes Equipment: • • •

WISKI MS Excel Google Drive field forms records

Procedure: Initial Setup 1. The cutoff for TP outliers is 1.5 mg/L and the cutoff for TSS outliers is 2000 mg/L. These upper limits have been set in WISKI within each respective parameter. They can be checked by going to: KiWQM configuration  Parameter type (all), and then clicking on both TP and TSS and viewing these cutoffs within the “Edit parameter type” window. If staff decide to modify these outlier cutoffs, this is the location in which this should be done.

2. Under Tools, go to Settings  System Settings. Then go to KiWQM  Import and select: a. CSV import: exceedance of technical limit i. Under the “Value for all users” dropdown menu, select “Quality control data (Poor)”. b. Exceedance of lower/upper parameter type limits i. Under the “Value for all users” dropdown menu, select “Yes.”

Import of Lab Data 1. Make sure the file you wish to import has been configured according to “W:\07 Programs\Monitoring & Data Acquisition\Monitoring Protocols\CURRENT Monitoring Protocols\10_WISKI\10E_Importing SW Lab Data into WISKI from MCES DB.docx”.

2. Open the import samplings window and make sure the options to import new lab data are selected (see above SOP) (note that the default quality for the data during import should be set to “Good”). On the right portion of the import window, the tab “Options” will automatically be selected. Within this tab, select “Allow exceedance of technical limits”.

3. In the “Import” tab of the main window, select the file you would like to import and select “Read file”. Go through the same process as the above SOP to remove any errors that may be found at this time.

4. Once any errors are taken care of, import the data.

5. In order to view if any data has been given the quality code of “Suspect”, follow one of two steps: a. Go to the WQM perspective. Go to the station you wish to review. Click on the Sample table for the time frame you are interested. Click on the “Parameter oriented” option. Scroll to the right until you see the “Parameter type” and “Quality columns. Scroll down and note the various times that either TP and TSS have been listed as “Poor”. b. Go to the WQM perspective. Click on the “Sampling parameter” folder dropdown and select the dropdown for Stormwater. Make sure your global time range is set to the range you would like to view. Right click on TP and select Graph. Note the values that are of “Poor” quality. Right click on TSS and select Graph. Note the values that are of “Poor quality.

6. This process allows all data to be imported on a regular basis while outliers of TP and TSS are assigned a “Poor” quality code. Therefore, all the preliminary loading calculations during the the year will be based off of values that are NOT above our outlier cutoffs. At the end of the year, a full outlier analysis will be done for all TP and TSS values that were given this “Poor” code in WISKI. At this time, any TP/TSS values that are over the outlier cutoff but are deemed plausible can be manually changed to “Good”. Until this time, all values above the cutoffs will be considered outliers and NOT included in the loading calculations. *NOTE* IF there are any values that have been imported, and then had the quality manually changed in the “Edit Parameter” window, these newly assigned qualities will be OVERWRITTEN upon a re-import of the same data. Therefore, if any values are *required*

to be changed during the course of the year, these need to be noted such that the same data is not reimported again in new lab data imports and the newly assigned quality is changed because of the import.

End of year outlier analysis 1) Open the EventSamples time series for TP for the site and time range you are interested in. On the same graph, open the EventSamples time series for TSS for the same site.

2) In the icon bar across the top of the graph, click on the regression icon and select Regression (simple). Click ok. In the next box, select the Power Law regression line and click ok. In the graph, apply timestamp labels to the graph (right click and select graph settings ď&#x192; plot settings, then activate label. Remove Record number for displayed fields, and instead select timestamp).

3) Using the bounds of 1.5 mg/L for TP and 2000 mg/L for TSS (thresholds determined by MRM staff during historical lab data outlier analysis through discussion), write down all dates/times for all values of TP at or above 1.5 mg/L and all dates/times for all values of TSS at or above 2000 mg/L. 4) Typically, TP and TSS are positively correlated. Plotting the values against one another provides a way to visually identify anomalies. If one parameter value is above the cutoff threshold and the other is within the normal range of values, the high value parameter is likely invalid and can be left as an outlier.

5) If the initial screening did not verify all outliers, open the EventSamples time series for TKN and Ortho-P, and determine the values for these parameters. Compare the TP/TSS values against these other nutrient parameters to determine if the identified outlier is valid or invalid. For example, the following scenarios could occur: a. The value is very high, but other nutrient values are very low, and the event sample is a composite with a full 4000ml submitted. This is likely a result of a lab error, and is an erroneous data point. b. The value is very high, other nutrient values are low, but the event sample was a grab, or something during collection occurred that reduced or concentrated the sample volume. This is likely a result of a collection error, and the data point from the lab is valid, but the value is not representative of the sampled event. c. The value is high, other nutrient parameter values are high and thus the value is determined to be valid.

6) It is also helpful to consult: a. Field notes to see if there is something noted about the sample or sample event that could explain the value observed. Staff can also check the value against other lab parameters from the sample, including E. Coli.

b. Lab Analyte information (see table at the end of this document), to see which parameters are analyzed within the same testing suite and could therefore both be in error.

7) Use the following table to determine the quality code to give the identified outlier: Code Number Meaning Excellent 0 Good 40 Default for data that has been imported Fair 80 Sample evaluated, determined valid after comparison to other nutrient parameters Suspect 120 Poor 160 Sample evaluated, determined to be valid, but not represented due to collection error Sample evaluated, determine to be erroneous, potential lab error Unknown 200 Missing 255

Remark

Determined to be valid Not representative - collection error Erroneous - lab error

8) To change the quality code for any sample value, first change the perspective to WQM. Find and double-click on the sample in the dropdown menu for the site. Click on the Sample results tab and scroll down until you find the respective value.

9) Double-click on the value and a pop-up box will open for the specific data point. From the Quality dropdown menu, select the appropriate quality. Choose the appropriate standard remark. In changing the quality, WISKI will ask you to write a remark. Click ok.

10) Verify with team members the actions taken.

Add any outliers noted for TP/TSS to the following spreadsheet (for the respective year): W:\07 Programs\Monitoring & Data Acquisition\2017 Monitoring\2017 Lab\2017 Outlier Identification\ 2017 Outlier ID.xlsx

Appendix C Sample Chain of Custody

119

120

Capitol Region Watershed District

SAMPLE TYPE:

1410 Energy Park Drive, Suite 4, St. Paul, MN 55108 Phone: (651) 644-8888

Fax: (651) 644-8894

MCES PROJECT NAME:

MCES Lab: 651-602-8293 MCES Fax: 651-602-8255

MCES PROJECT #:

Baseline Monitoring Sites

5533-05-01

Date Submitted: Submitted By:

Measuring Program &

End Date / Time: Location Id: Trout Brook - East Branch Samp Pt: CRWD8 Start Date / Time: End Date / Time: Location Id: Trout Brook - West Branch Samp Pt: CRWD4 Start Date / Time: End Date / Time: Location Id: Como 3 Samp Pt: CRWD21 Start Date / Time: End Date / Time:

pH [ ] P-AV TDS-180 [ ] ORTHO_AV TSSVSS-GF [ ] SO4-ICV BOD5C_IS ECOLI-MPNT

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

pH [ ] P-AV TDS-180 [ ] ORTHO_AV TSSVSS-GF [ ] SO4-ICV BOD5C_IS ECOLI-MPNT

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

pH [ ] P-AV TDS-180 [ ] ORTHO_AV TSSVSS-GF [ ] SO4-ICV BOD5C_IS ECOLI-MPNT

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

pH [ ] P-AV TDS-180 [ ] ORTHO_AV TSSVSS-GF [ ] SO4-ICV BOD5C_IS ECOLI-MPNT

SAMPLE TYPE:

] ] ] ] ]

MEAS. PROGRM:

[ [ [ [ [

SAMPLE TYPE:

pH [ ] P-AV TDS-180 [ ] ORTHO_AV TSSVSS-GF [ ] SO4-ICV BOD5C_IS ECOLI-MPNT

MEAS. PROGRM:

] ] ] ] ]

SAMPLE TYPE:

[ [ [ [ [

MEAS. PROGRM:

pH [ ] P-AV TDS-180 [ ] ORTHO_AV TSSVSS-GF [ ] SO4-ICV BOD5C_IS ECOLI-MPNT

SAMPLE TYPE:

] ] ] ] ]

MEAS. PROGRM:

Location Id: Trout Brook Outlet Samp Pt: CRWD3 Start Date / Time:

[ [ [ [ [

SAMPLE TYPE:

End Date / Time:

pH [ ] P-AV TDS-180 [ ] ORTHO_AV TSSVSS-GF [ ] SO4-ICV BOD5C_IS ECOLI-MPNT

MEAS. PROGRM:

Location Id: Phalen Creek Samp Pt: CRWD5 Start Date / Time:

] ] ] ] ]

SAMPLE TYPE:

End Date / Time:

[ [ [ [ [

MEAS. PROGRM:

Location Id: East Kittson Samp Pt: CRWD2 Start Date / Time:

] ] ] ] ]

SAMPLE TYPE:

End Date / Time:

[ [ [ [ [

MEAS. PROGRM:

Location Id: Hidden Falls Outlet Samp Pt: CRWD45 Start Date / Time:

] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]

pH [ ] P-AV TDS-180 [ ] ORTHO_AV TSSVSS-GF [ ] SO4-ICV BOD5C_IS ECOLI-MPNT

SAMPLE TYPE:

End Date / Time:

[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [

CL-AV HARD-MSV MET-MSV NH3N-AV N_N-AV NUT-AV CL-AV HARD-MSV MET-MSV NH3N-AV N_N-AV NUT-AV CL-AV HARD-MSV MET-MSV NH3N-AV N_N-AV NUT-AV CL-AV HARD-MSV MET-MSV NH3N-AV N_N-AV NUT-AV CL-AV HARD-MSV MET-MSV NH3N-AV N_N-AV NUT-AV CL-AV HARD-MSV MET-MSV NH3N-AV N_N-AV NUT-AV CL-AV HARD-MSV MET-MSV NH3N-AV N_N-AV NUT-AV CL-AV HARD-MSV MET-MSV NH3N-AV N_N-AV NUT-AV

MEAS. PROGRM:

Sample Type

Location Id: St. Anthony Park Samp Pt: CRWD1 Start Date / Time:

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

Base Storm Snowmelt Grab Composite

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

Base Storm Snowmelt Grab Composite

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

Base Storm Snowmelt Grab Composite

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

Base Storm Snowmelt Grab Composite

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

Base Storm Snowmelt Grab Composite

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

Base Storm Snowmelt Grab Composite

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

Base Storm Snowmelt Grab Composite

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

Base Storm Snowmelt Grab Composite

Capitol Region Watershed District

SAMPLE TYPE:

1410 Energy Park Drive, Suite 4, St. Paul, MN 55108 Phone: (651) 644-8888

Fax: (651) 644-8894

MCES PROJECT NAME:

MCES Lab: 651-602-8293 MCES Fax: 651-602-8255

MCES PROJECT #:

Baseline Monitoring Sites

5533-05-01

Date Submitted: Submitted By:

Measuring Program &

End Date / Time: Location Id: GC Clubhouse Pond Samp Pt: CRWD76 Start Date / Time: End Date / Time: Location Id: GC Parking Lot Pond Samp Pt: CRWD77 Start Date / Time: End Date / Time:

pH [ ] P-AV TDS-180 [ ] ORTHO_AV TSSVSS-GF [ ] SO4-ICV BOD5C_IS ECOLI-MPNT

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

pH [ ] P-AV TDS-180 [ ] ORTHO_AV TSSVSS-GF [ ] SO4-ICV BOD5C_IS ECOLI-MPNT

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

pH [ ] P-AV TDS-180 [ ] ORTHO_AV TSSVSS-GF [ ] SO4-ICV BOD5C_IS ECOLI-MPNT

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

pH [ ] P-AV TDS-180 [ ] ORTHO_AV TSSVSS-GF [ ] SO4-ICV BOD5C_IS ECOLI-MPNT

SAMPLE TYPE:

] ] ] ] ]

MEAS. PROGRM:

[ [ [ [ [

SAMPLE TYPE:

pH [ ] P-AV TDS-180 [ ] ORTHO_AV TSSVSS-GF [ ] SO4-ICV BOD5C_IS ECOLI-MPNT

MEAS. PROGRM:

] ] ] ] ]

SAMPLE TYPE:

[ [ [ [ [

MEAS. PROGRM:

Location Id: North Como 3 Samp Pt: CRWD69 Start Date / Time:

pH [ ] P-AV TDS-180 [ ] ORTHO_AV TSSVSS-GF [ ] SO4-ICV BOD5C_IS ECOLI-MPNT

SAMPLE TYPE:

End Date / Time:

] ] ] ] ]

MEAS. PROGRM:

Location Id: Sims-Agate Outlet Samp Pt: CRWD42 Start Date / Time:

[ [ [ [ [

SAMPLE TYPE:

End Date / Time:

CL-AV HARD-MSV MET-MSV NH3N-AV N_N-AV NUT-AV CL-AV HARD-MSV MET-MSV NH3N-AV N_N-AV NUT-AV CL-AV HARD-MSV MET-MSV NH3N-AV N_N-AV NUT-AV CL-AV HARD-MSV MET-MSV NH3N-AV N_N-AV NUT-AV CL-AV HARD-MSV MET-MSV NH3N-AV N_N-AV NUT-AV CL-AV HARD-MSV MET-MSV NH3N-AV N_N-AV NUT-AV

MEAS. PROGRM:

Location Id: TBNS-Stream Samp Pt: CRWD44 Start Date / Time:

] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]

SAMPLE TYPE:

End Date / Time:

[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [

MEAS. PROGRM:

Sample Type

Location Id: TBNS-Rose Samp Pt: CRWD43 Start Date / Time:

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

Base Storm Snowmelt Grab Composite

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

Base Storm Snowmelt Grab Composite

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

Base Storm Snowmelt Grab Composite

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

Base Storm Snowmelt Grab Composite

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

Base Storm Snowmelt Grab Composite

[ [ [ [ [

] ] ] ] ]

Base Storm Snowmelt Grab Composite

Appendix D Laboratory Quality Assurance Manual and Standard Operating Procedures

123

124

Metropolitan Council Working for the Region, Planning for the Future

Quality Assurance Manual Environmental Services Division Environmental Quality Assurance Department Laboratory Services 2400 Childs Road Saint Paul, MN

March 12, 2012

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 1 of 42

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 2 of 42

Metropolitan Council Working for the Region, Planning for the Future

QA MANUAL: TABLE OF CONTENTS Title Page.……………….…………………………………….…………………………………1 Signatures of Approval…………………………………………….…………………………… 2 Table of Contents………………...…………………………………….………………………3 – 5 List of Appendices…………..……………………………………………….…………………. 5 1. Introduction 1.1. MCES Laboratory Function 1.2. MCES Laboratory Vision and Mission 1.3. Laboratory Facility 1.4. Laboratory Certified Parameters 2. Laboratory Organization and Responsibility (4740.2099 A & B) 2.1. Laboratory Organization 2.2. Job Classification Specifications 2.3. Laboratory Manager of MCES Analytical Lab Services 2.4. Section Managers/Technical Managers 2.4.1. Section Manager Responsibilities 2.4.2. Inorganic Chemistry Section Manager 2.4.3. Biology/Residue Section Manager 2.4.4. Organic Analyses/Quality Assurance Section Manager 2.4.4.1. Organic Analyses Section Manager 2.4.4.2. Quality Assurance Officer 2.4.5. Analytical Support and Customer Service Section Manager 2.5. Analytical Section Staffing 2.5.1. Employment Requirements 2.5.2. Principal Environmental Scientist 2.5.3. Senior Environmental Scientist 2.5.4. Environmental Scientist 2.5.5. Technical Specialist 2.5.6. Technician III 2.5.7. Technician II 2.5.8. Technician I 2.5.9. Laboratory Assistant 3. Laboratory Personnel Training (4740.2099 D) 3.1. Demonstration of Capability 3.2. Certification of Analysts (2099 C) 3.3. Continual Analyst Certification (2099 E3a) 3.3.1. Failure of Continued Analyst Certification 3.3.2. Continual Analyst Certification Procedure 3.4. Identity Certification (2099 F) 4. Standard Operating Procedures (4740.2065) 4.1. Requirements (2065, Subpart 1 and 2) 4.2. Format of Analytical Procedures (2065, Subpart 3) 5. Laboratory Quality Assurance Practices and Objectives (4740.2080, 4740.2100 and 4740.2110) 5.1. Scope and Objectives(2080/2100 and 2110, Subpart 1) 5.2. Quality Control Criteria for Chemistry (4740.2100) 5.2.1. Method Blank (2100, Subpart 2) 5.2.2. Laboratory Control Sample (2100, Subpart 3) QA_MANUAL_2 Page 3 of 42

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

5.2.3. Quality Control Sample (2093, Subpart 3, C) 5.2.4. Matrix Spike/Matrix Spike Duplicate (2100, Subpart 4) 5.2.5. Surrogate Spikes (2100, Subpart 5) 5.2.6. Internal Standards (2100, Subpart 6) 5.2.7. Detection Limits (2100, Subpart 7) 5.2.8. Reporting Limits (2100, Subpart 8) 5.2.9. Selectivity (2100, Subpart 9) 5.2.10. Manual Integrations (2100, Subpart 10) 5.2.11. Uncertainty Measurements 5.3. Quality Control Criteria for Bacteriology (4740.2110) 5.3.1. Sterility Checks and Blanks (2110, Subpart 2) 5.3.2. Positive Controls (2110, Subpart 3) 5.3.3. Negative Controls (2110, Subpart 4) 5.3.4. Test Variability (2110, Subpart 5) 5.3.5. Method Evaluation (2110, Subpart 6) 5.3.6. Test Performance (2110, Subpart 7) 5.3.7. Quality of Standards, Reagents and Media (2110,Subpart 8) 5.3.8. Selectivity (2110, Subpart 9) 5.3.9. Temperature Measuring Devices (2110, Subpart 10) 5.3.10. Autoclaves (2110, Subpart 11) 5.3.11. Incubators, Water Baths and Ovens (2110, Subpart 13) 5.3.12. Labware, Glassware and Plasticware (Subpart 14) Proficiency Testing (4740.2070 and TNI Standard V1M1) 6.1. Proficiency Testing Scope 6.2. Laboratory Testing of PT Samples and Reporting Laboratory Sample Handling, Receipt and Acceptance (4740.2087) 7.1. Sample Handling, Sample Receipt Protocols and Preservation (2087, Subpart 1) 7.1.1. LIMS 7.1.2. NPDES Samples 7.1.3. Non-NPDES Samples 7.2. Sample Acceptance Policy (2087, Subpart 3) Standards, Reagents and Bacteriological Media (4740.2089) 8.1. Logbook Documentation for Chemicals and Reagents (2089, B) 8.1.1. Logbook Front Cover 8.1.2. Chemical Entries 8.1.3. Reagent Entries 8.2. Chemical and Reagent Bottle Labels (2089, C) 8.2.1. Chemical Bottle Labels 8.2.2. Reagent Bottle Labels Support Equipment Calibrations (4740.2091) 9.1. Scope of Support Equipment Calibration (4091,Subpart 1) 9.2. Support Equipment and Software Logbooks(4091, Subpart 2C) 9.2.1. Logbook Purpose 9.2.2. Logbook Front Cover Content 9.2.3. Logbook Content 9.2.3.1. Logbook Entries 9.2.3.2. Static Information 9.2.3.3. Active Information 9.3. Frequency of Calibration (2091, Subpart 3) 9.4. Support Equipment Maintenance Plans (2091, Subpart 3) 9.5. Documentation and Archiving of Logbooks (2091, Subpart 4D) Instrument Operational Validation (4740.2093) 10.1. Scope of Instrument Calibration Requirements (2091, Subpart 1) 10.2. Analytical Instrumentation and Software Logbooks (2093, Subpart 2) Analytical Response Calibration (4740.2093) 11.1. Analytical Response Calibration (2093, Subpart 3) QA_MANUAL_2 Page 4 of 42

11.2. Calibration Verification (2093, Subpart 4) 12. Laboratory Sample Reporting (4740.2095) 12.1. Data Reporting 12.2. Reporting Convention 12.3. Comments in the LIMS 12.4. Corrective Action Form (CAF) 12.5. Data Review and Authorization (TNI Standard V1M2: 4.2.8.4p) 12.5.1. Data Review Process 12.5.2. Multi-Level Product (MLP) 12.5.3. Logically Inconsistent Data (LID) 12.5.4. Peer Review and Authorization (TNI Standard V1M2: 4.2.8.4p) 13. Laboratory Records Retention and Retrieval (4740.2097) 13.1. Record Keeping and Retention Time (2097, Subpart A and B) 13.2. LIMS and Electronic Files (2097, Subpart D-J) 13.3. Paper Records (2097, Subpart D â&#x20AC;&#x201C; J) 14. Data Integrity Procedures (TNI Standard V1M2: 4.2.8.1) 15. Complaint Procedures (TNI Standard V1M2: 4.2.8.3n) 16. Management Reviews 17. Definitions (4740.2010)

LIST OF APPENDICES A. B. C. D. E. F. G.

Demonstration of Capability (DOC) for Chemistry Demonstration of Capability (DOC) for Microbiology List of Certified Standard Operating Procedures MCES Organizational Chart Test Codes by Analytical Section Analyst Certification Database Sample Acceptance Policy

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 5 of 42

1. Introduction to Metropolitan Council Environmental Services (MCES) 1.1. MCES Laboratory Function 1.1.1. The purpose of the Laboratory Services Business Unit is to provide clients with quality, timely, and cost-effective analytical services. The primary source of work for the MCES Laboratory comes from Council entities. The MCES Laboratory is a public agency and therefore does not have trade secret data. From time to time, the MCES Laboratory will provide analytical services to other entities, primarily, other government or non-profit environmental organizations. It is the policy of the MCES Laboratory to provide such external services without written or implied contracts. Such services are only provided in an identical manner to those services provided to internal clients. The services provided to these clients include, but are not limited to the following: 1.1.1.1. project development, 1.1.1.2. sample analysis, 1.1.1.3. sample collection and container preparation, 1.1.1.4. instrument quality assurance, 1.1.1.5. test method development, and 1.1.1.6. information management 1.2. MCES Laboratory Vision and Mission (4740.2085) 1.2.1. The Metropolitan Council and their employees are committed to quality and to protecting and improving our natural resources. As a part of our mission and commitments, MCES Laboratory has developed this quality assurance manual.

1.2.2. This quality assurance plan has been developed to completely comply with the Minnesota State Rules 4740.2010 through 4740.2040 and TNI Standard to provide the framework by which the laboratory will operate. The goal of the MCES Laboratory is to perform the level of quality control needed to assure a quality product. The level of the quality control is determined based on the needs of the client, the use of the data, and the cost of the associated quality control.

Procedures are in place to prevent deviations to and maintain the laboratory’s quality system by performing SOP reviews, internal audits and external audits.

1.2.3. The Metropolitan Council’s Laboratory Services management ensures the ongoing capability and quality of our staff by assuring compliance with the current Quality Assurance (QA) manual.

The manual is available via the LIMS and Intranet website and is updated periodically. The QA manual is reviewed annually and updated as often as needed when changes become apparent.

Laboratory staff are made aware of any changes through a labwide meeting or email notification.

Staff are asked to review the QA manual and comment where necessary.

1.2.4. Any quality control practices identified in this document that are not in the Minnesota State Rules, certification requirements, or the approved reference method are considered to be good laboratory practices and can be modified based on Data Quality Objectives (DQO’s) and/or the Quality Assurance Officer’s approval.

1.3. Laboratory Facility (2085, Section C. 2) 1.3.1. The Metropolitan Council Laboratory is located at 2400 Childs Road, Saint Paul Minnesota. The Environmental Planning and Evaluation (EPE) building was constructed during 1999-2000. The EPE laboratory is 30,000 square feet and has been in operation since April 2000.

1.4. Laboratory Certified Parameters 1.4.1. The Minnesota Department of Health (MDH) laboratory certification program issues a Scope of Certification annually which contains a listing of certified fields of testing for Metropolitan Council Analytical Services (Lab ID # 027-123-172). The current Scope of Certification is available on the laboratory’s intranet website. A list of all Certified parameters and their corresponding MCES SOPs can be found in Appendix C. 2. Laboratory Organization and Responsibility (2099 Section A and B.) 2.1. The Metropolitan Council’s Analytical Services is organized into an administrative group and four analytical sections. The administrative section is responsible for the management of the laboratory through standardized policies and practices and office support. The analytical sections consist of the QA_MANUAL_2 Page 6 of 42

Biology/Residue, Inorganic Chemistry, Organic/Quality Control and Analytical Support/Customer Service. The four analytical sections are responsible for sample handling, sample preparation, sample analysis, data review, data entry, and data validation. The laboratory organizational chart is shown in Appendix D. 2.2. Within analytical laboratory services there are a variety of technical and scientific positions.

Metropolitan Council maintains current job classification specifications for all personnel who manage, perform, or verify work affecting the quality of the environmental tests. Job classification specifications outlining the basic job duties and requirements for each position can be found in the MCES Human Resources Department’s files, located at the Agency’s central offices in St. Paul, Minnesota.

2.3. Laboratory Manager of MCES Analytical Laboratory Services 2.3.1. The manager is in charge of the MCES environmental analytical service laboratory and reports to the Assistant General Manager of the Environmental Quality Assurance Department. The Laboratory Manager is responsible for assuring the provision of environmental services of a known quality and ensuring the safety of the laboratory staff. The Management Association (MANA) Union represents the Laboratory Services manager position.

2.4. Section Managers/Technical Managers 2.4.1. Laboratory section managers are responsible for the training of staff, coordination of analyses, review, and validation of standard operating procedures, data review, data authorization, and method development within their section. They are also responsible for the direct supervision of the staff in their section. They serve as the Technical Manager of their respective section. They must meet the qualifications of TNI Standard V1M2: 5.2.6.1. In the event of an extended absence of a Technical Manager, QA will name an interim Technical Manager and document the duration served in the role. Section managers report to the laboratory manager. The Management Association (MANA) Union represents the laboratory section manager positions.

2.4.2. Inorganic Chemistry Section Manager 2.4.2.1. The inorganic chemistry section manager is responsible for anion cation, mercury, and metals analyses. The list of analytical parameters for this section is in Appendix E. 2.4.3. Biology/Residue Section Manager 2.4.3.1. The Biology/Residue section manager is responsible for the biological and gravimetric analyses and also coordinates, trains, and schedules weekend staff. The list of analytical parameters for this section is in Appendix E. 2.4.4. Organic Analyses/Quality Assurance Section Manager 2.4.4.1. Due staffing limitations, the Quality Manager (“Quality Assurance Officer”) has also been assigned responsibilities of Technical Director of the Laboratory’s Organic Analysis Section. Sufficient independent oversight systems exist to assure that any potential conflict of interest arising from this organizational structure are effectively mitigated.

2.4.4.2. Organic Analyses Section Manager 2.4.4.2.1. The organic analyses/quality assurance section manager is responsible for priority pollutant analyses. The list of analytical parameters for this section is in Appendix E. 2.4.4.3. Quality Assurance Officer 2.4.4.3.1. The quality assurance manager is the designated Quality Assurance Officer for the Laboratory and is responsible for providing quality assurance and quality control procedures and policies. Quality Assurance Officer and his/her designees are responsible for monitoring and maintaining ongoing compliance with QAQC procedures and policies. These procedures and policies include: 2.4.4.3.1.1. Standard Operating Procedures content, format, and maintenance, 2.4.4.3.1.2. Laboratory certification activities including Proficiency Testing (PT) sample distribution and result reporting, communication with MDH, and coordination/supervision of auditing activities including pre-audit preparation and internal audits, 2.4.4.3.1.3. Discharge Monitoring Report (DMR-QA) certification program activities and communications, QA_MANUAL_2 Page 7 of 42

Method development and implementation protocols, Analyst certification and training requirements, Quality Control/Batch protocols, Corrective Action activities and monitoring and reacting to out of specification trends, 2.4.4.3.1.8. Standardizing data reporting protocols 2.4.4.3.1.9. Standardized procedures for various activities such as record retention, container labeling, and overall QA protocols.

2.4.4.4. Analytical Support and Customer Service Section Manager 2.4.4.4.1. The analytical support and customer section manager is responsible for the training of technical staff working with LIMS, LIMS operation, development and maintenance.

The section manager also initiates projects with laboratory clients to ensure the laboratory has the capability of processing all analysis requirements requested by the client and provides all reported data to the clients. It is also the responsibility of the Analytical Support and Customer Service manager to maintain and develop laboratory safety programs, oversee building maintenance, sample cooler temperature tracking, glassware cleaning and container preparation. The list of analytical parameters for this section is in Appendix E. 2.5. Analytical Section Staffing 2.5.1. The laboratory sections are composed of laboratory technicians, scientists and laboratory assistants. American Federation of State, County and Municipal Employees (AFSCME) Union represents these positions. The following is a list of the positions within Laboratory Services and the minimum qualifications necessary for each position. Each employee of Metropolitan Council Environmental Laboratory Services must possess a valid drivers license and successfully complete a pre-employment physical, drug screen, and background check. Staffing positions are assigned according to the analytical complexity, needed for independent judgment, and leadership requirements in each positionâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s job assignments.

2.5.2. Principal Environmental Scientist (AFSCME 32) 2.5.2.1. The Principal Environmental Scientist must have an undergraduate degree in chemistry or biology, as appropriate.

2.5.3. Senior Environmental Scientist (AFSCME 31) 2.5.3.1. The Senior Environmental Scientist must have an undergraduate degree in chemistry or biology, as appropriate.

2.5.4. Environmental Scientist (AFSCME 30) 2.5.4.1. The Environmental Scientist must have an undergraduate degree in chemistry or biology, as appropriate.

2.5.5. Technical Specialist (AFSCME 30) 2.5.5.1. The Laboratory Technical Specialist must have completed an approved technical/vocational laboratory technician training program or one year (2 semesters or 3 trimesters) of college chemistry.

2.5.6. Technician III (AFSCME 29) 2.5.6.1. The Laboratory Technician III must have completed an approved technical/vocational laboratory technician training program or one year (2 semesters or 3 trimesters) of college chemistry.

2.5.7. Technician II (AFSCME 27) 2.5.7.1. The Laboratory Technician II must have completed a technical/vocational Laboratory Technician training program or one year (2 semesters or 3 trimesters) of college chemistry.

2.5.8. Technician I (AFSCME 26) 2.5.8.1. The Laboratory Technician I must have completed a technical/vocational Laboratory Technician training program or one year (2 semesters or 3 trimesters) of college chemistry.

2.5.9. Laboratory Assistant (AFSCME 24) 2.4.4.3.1.4.

2.4.4.3.1.5.

2.4.4.3.1.6.

2.4.4.3.1.7.

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 8 of 42

2.5.9.1. The Laboratory Assistant must have a high school diploma or equivalent, and be able to lift/carry fifty pounds.

3. Laboratory Personnel Training (2099, Section C and D and E2) 3.1. All results reported by the laboratory are done by certified analysts. Data produced by analysts while in the process of obtaining required training are acceptable only when reviewed and verified by a certified analyst. Certification consists of laboratory personnel receiving on the job training from certified analysts and completing a Demonstration of Capability (DOC) for each analytical procedure they are assigned. Initial and continued demonstration of laboratory capability is performed, verified, and documented to ensure analysts are capable of meeting performance criteria. The attendance at training courses or workshops for specific equipment, analytical techniques or laboratory procedures is documented in personnel files.

3.2. Certification of Analysts 3.2.1. The training in analytical methods and the laboratory certification procedure is structured into three phases. The duration of time for each phase is dependent on the prior experience of the trainee and the complexity of the analysis or instrumentation.

3.2.2. PHASE I- Observation 3.2.2.1. Trainee: Read the Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) and any applicable background material. Observe the procedure as it is performed. Ask questions as necessary to gain a basic understanding of the analysis.

3.2.2.2. Trainer: Perform the analysis in the presence of the trainee. Describe every step in the procedure and answer questions that arise. Inform the trainee of good laboratory practices, safety precautions, critical steps, customer service needs, and quality control requirements.

3.2.3. PHASE II- Performing Analysis 3.2.3.1. Trainee: Perform the SOP to successfully complete the analysis. Ask questions as necessary to gain an in depth understanding of the analysis.

3.2.3.2. Trainer: Observe the new analyst performing the analysis, answer any questions and provide direction as necessary. It is important for the trainer to ensure all procedures are performed safely and according to the SOP and verify results.

3.2.4. PHASE III: Demonstration and Documentation of Analyst Certification 3.2.4.1. Trainee: 3.2.4.1.1. Upon completion of training, the newly trained employee must demonstrate their capability prior to generating reportable results. The demonstration of capability requires the trainee to analyze standard(s) as described in the SOP. If the standards are not described in the SOP, an analyst must analyze four (4) mid-level standards spiked at the concentration of the calibration check standard. The standards must meet the acceptance criteria listed in the respective SOP. 3.2.4.2. Trainer: 3.2.4.2.1. Must ensure that Metropolitan Council employees in training, document their result(s) on the “Demonstration of Capability for Analyst Certification” document found in Appendix A (for chemistry) or Appendix B (for Microbiology). Failure to demonstrate and document the capability of an analyst may result in suspension of certification for that field of testing.

3.2.4.3. The trainee is required to document their performance evaluation results. The “Demonstration of Capability for Analyst Certification” document must be validated by a certified analyst. The analyst is considered certified, for the named analyte/method, as of the date signed by the quality assurance officer. Once the document has the required signatures, a copy of the document shall be returned to the respective section manager and the “Analyst Certification Database” is updated (Appendix F).

3.2.4.4. Record of analyst certification will be kept as hardcopies in the quality assurance office.

The quality assurance officer and/or his/her designee maintain the electronic Analyst Certification Database. The files are updated as analysts are certified or re-certified.

3.3. Continuing Analyst Certification (2099 E3a) QA_MANUAL_2 Page 9 of 42

3.3.1. The laboratory staff maintains certification by analysis of blind QC samples. The analytes are purchased through an EPA approved provider and the concentrations are unknown or blind to the analyst at the time of testing.

3.3.1.1. Continual Analyst Certification Procedure 3.3.1.1.1. Each primary analyst receives a PET-QC sample used to assess continued certification for each analyst. The PET-QC samples will be placed in the sample once per year to provide for the analysis of laboratory parameters. Please refer to section 3.3 “Analyst Capability QA Program” for an explanation of each type of quality assurance testing and requirements for primary and secondary analysts.

3.3.1.2. Failure of Continued Analyst Certification 3.3.1.2.1. In the event a primary or secondary analyst fails certification a Corrective Action Form (CAF) needs to be filed with the quality assurance team. The quality assurance officer or his/her designee decides the course of action. First there will be an investigation into the methodologies, the analyst, and analytical instrumentation. If determined necessary the primary or secondary analyst will then perform a new PETQC sample or repeat Phase III: Demonstration and Documentation of Analyst Certification. In the event the analyst has two failures in a row, a CAF is filed and the quality assurance team will investigate and document the incident. The analyst is then required to re-demonstrate capability by repeating a PT or Phase III demonstration. The Analyst Certification Database files are updated. Analyst Capability Quality Assurance Program 3.3.1.3. Annual PET-QC Testing (single blind) 3.3.1.3.1. Once per year PET-QC testing samples are analyzed to provide a quantitative assessment of instrumentation, analysts, and methodologies at a specific point-intime. The PET-QC quality assurance program is not part of the laboratory certification program (4740.2010 to 4740.2040) and parameters analyzed are based on the discretion of the quality assurance team. The primary analyst is to analyze one PET-QC samples a year. If more than one primary analyst exists for an analysis, multiple PET-QA (with various lot numbers when available) samples will be purchased and distributed. The secondary analyst shall analyze one sample to maintain certification. The PET-QC samples are purchased from EPA approved providers and arrive with results and acceptable ranges know to the quality assurance team. The results and acceptable ranges are under no circumstances divulged to analysts until results are reported and authorized in LIMS. 3.3.1.4. Annual EPA-DMR-Quality Assurance Proficiency Testing (PT) 3.3.1.4.1. Annual EPA-DMR-QA samples are analyzed as a requirement for NPDES permittees and for the MDH certification. The EPA-DMR-QA samples are purchased from an EPA approved provider. The EPA sends out notices to designated NPDES permittees, which lists the mandatory chemical and Whole Effluent Tests (WET) sample sets. All samples are prepared by the Quality Assurance Officer or their designee and inserted into the sample stream. Residual chlorine and pH samples are prepared and hand delivered to regional facilities. All results are tabulated within LIMS and reported to the approved provider for evaluation before the study closing date. Refer to section 6.0 “Proficiency Testing” for more information and requirements.

3.4. Identity Certification (2099 Section F) 3.4.1. Quality assurance maintains initials and signatures of employees on file. All paper records are initialed by the responsible analyst. Most laboratory records are maintained within a computerized Laboratory Information Management System (LIMS). Only authorized personnel may access the LIMS and make changes in the information. Control over LIMS access is maintained by access passwords and password policies. All entries in the LIMS are linked to the QA_MANUAL_2 Page 10 of 42

logged-in identity and a date/time stamp. In addition, all changes to analytical results are tracked by an independent audit trail system.

3.4.2. The integrity of laboratory data, result modifications, and data authorization is based on the use and protection of passwords. Absolute certainty is necessary to ensure the identity of the analyst within the LIMS system. As a result, it is absolutely forbidden to share passwords and computer user space with other analysts, managers, and/or information technologists.

4. Standard Operating Procedures (4740.2065) 4.1. Requirements 4.1.1. The following section identifies the laboratoryâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s policies for establishing and maintaining all standard operating procedures for all active certified and non-certified analyses. A table of all active analyses is located in Appendix E. 4.1.2. Certified tests are referenced from the list of approved references located in 40 CFR Part 136.3 Table 1B. These reference methods are rewritten as in-house procedures, or Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs), to reflect practice in the laboratory. SOPs are available to each analyst for training and reference purposes. Alternate Test Procedures (ATP) may be applied for through the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) when there are allowed deviations from the reference method or when a reference is not available in the CFR. 4.1.3. Analysts are required to review SOPs yearly. Any proposed changes must be provided to the section manager and approved by the QC Officer prior to implementation.

4.2. Format of Analytical Procedures (4740.2065 Subpart 3 and 8) 4.2.1. SOP Page Layout: 4.2.1.1. All margins will be set at 0.5â&#x20AC;?.

4.2.1.2. All SOPs will be in a one column format unless otherwise agreed upon by Quality Assurance.

4.2.1.3. The first page of all SOPs is the cover page consisting of Metropolitan Councilâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s name and logo, header, and figure of merit table (if applicable).

4.2.2. Header: 4.2.2.1. SOP Version: 4.2.2.1.1. All SOPs are given a unique naming convention for identification. This convention identifies the SOP as well as the revision number of the SOP (i.e. SOP_NAME_1).

4.2.2.2. Implementation Date: 4.2.2.2.1. The implementation date is the date by which a test will be logged-in under a new SOP version.

4.2.2.2.2. The implementation date is an agreed upon date established by the section manager and Quality Assurance after all modifications to a SOP have been accepted as final.

4.2.2.2.3. Section managers are responsible for notifying staff of modifications made to a new/updated SOP. 4.2.2.2.4. All staff are responsible for following a SOP in its entirety beginning on the date of implementation.

4.2.2.2.4.1. Quality Assurance will work with section managers to determine what actions need to be taken to identify samples logged-in under the previous revision and analyzed under a new revision.

4.2.2.3. LIMS Analysis IDs: 4.2.2.3.1. All LIMS IDs associated with a SOP will be listed in the header.

4.2.2.4. Figures of Merit Table: 4.2.2.4.1. The following figures of merit, if applicable, will be listed in a table on the first page in all SOPs: 4.2.2.4.1.1. Applicable Range 4.2.2.4.1.2. Method Detection Limit and Date Performed 4.2.2.4.1.3. Reporting Limit 4.2.2.4.1.4. Preservation 4.2.2.4.1.5. Holding Time QA_MANUAL_2 Page 11 of 42

4.2.2.5. Page Numbers 4.2.2.5.1. The SOP naming convention along with total page numbers must be listed at the bottom of the document. This assures that all pages are present when following a SOP. 4.2.3. SOP Sections 4.2.3.1. Section 1 –Reference 4.2.3.1.1. When applicable, the current issue of 40 CFR Part 136 should be listed.

4.2.3.1.2. Reference Method 4.2.3.2. Section 2 – Application 4.2.3.2.1. Sample matrices 4.2.3.2.2. Applicable range, reporting limit 4.2.3.3. Section 3 – Summary of Method 4.2.3.3.1. Short description of analysis and deviations to a reference method 4.2.3.4. Section 4 – Interferences 4.2.3.4.1. List interferences and how to eliminate them if possible.

4.2.3.5. Section 5 – Apparatus 4.2.3.5.1. Instrument/Equipment 4.2.3.5.2. Labware 4.2.3.6. Section 6 – Chemicals and Reagents 4.2.3.6.1. List of all chemicals used for analysis, including manufacturer/vendor, concentration, purity, and Synergen number (when available).

4.2.3.6.2. Chemical tracking criteria (See Section 8.0 Standards, Reagents and Bacteriological Media) 4.2.3.6.3. Procedure for preparing all reagents 4.2.3.6.3.1. Reagent tracking criteria (See Section 8.0 Standards, Reagents and Bacteriological Media) 4.2.3.7. Section 7 – Safety 4.2.3.7.1. Identify where safety precautions should be observed.

4.2.3.8. Section 8 – Procedure 4.2.3.8.1. Identify all steps that need to be carried out in order to generate a result and report data to the LIMS. 4.2.3.9. Section 9 – Short Hand Procedure 4.2.3.9.1. Short Hand Procedure is no longer used and must be listed as “None” 4.2.3.10. Section 10 – Calculations 4.2.3.10.1. Equations for all calculations required in the reference method 4.2.3.11. Section 11 – Quality Control 4.2.3.11.1. List of quality control parameters required criteria for each method including but not limited to: blanks, reporting limit verification, laboratory control sample (LCS), quality control sample (QCS), matrix spike, matrix spike duplicate, relative percent difference, etc. along with frequency of analysis and corrective action for any failed QC. 4.2.3.11.2. For all certified tests, quality control parameter requirements must be followed in accordance with the reference method and any additional quality control parameters required by TNI regulations.

4.2.3.11.3. Additional quality control paramenters, for internal use only, may be added at the discretion of the section manager but must be approved by Quality Assurance prior to implementation.

4.2.3.12. Section 12 – Other References 4.2.3.12.1. Any other reference than those listed in Section 1 4.2.3.13. Section 13 – Appendix 4.2.3.13.1. Additional material needed to analyze/review data 4.2.4. SOP Development: QA_MANUAL_2 Page 12 of 42

4.2.4.1. Existing SOPs may require modifications for the following reasons: editorial changes, changes due to yearly review, new instrumentation, or the inability to perform a SOP as written.

4.2.4.1.1. Modification to a SOP can be requested by the section manager and/or by Quality Assurance.

4.2.4.1.2. The decision to modify any SOP will be made at the discretion of Quality Assurance and/or the Laboratory Manager.

4.2.4.1.3. If Quality Assurance deems it necessary to modify a SOP, creating a new revision number will be determined on a case by case basis. At minimum a new implementation date must be used to document appropriate changes.

4.2.4.1.4. The following requirements, if applicable, must be completed and approved by Quality Assurance prior to implementation: 4.2.4.1.4.1. The requirements include but are not limited to MDLs, SOP update, QC elements that are required by a reference, analytical/support equipment/chemical logbooks, DOC, and ample time for analysts to review all updates and order appropriate standards.

4.2.4.1.4.2. Quality Assurance will be responsible for summarizing changes to a SOP. This summary will be located in the â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;Descriptionâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; field in the Analysis Definition Entry Screen in the LIMS. 4.2.4.1.5. A copy of a standard operating procedure, for certified analyses, must be sent to the Minnesota Department of Health within 30 days after the effective date of the revision.

4.2.4.2. A new SOP may be generated due to the needs of a client, regulatory purposes, new instrument technology or laboratory needs.

4.2.4.3. Quality Assurance must be notified at the time of the request and will work with the associated parties to develop a work plan to complete all necessary requirements.

5. Laboratory Quality Assurance Practices and Objectives (4740.2080, 4740.2100, and 4740.2110) 5.1. Scope and Objectives (2080/2100 and 2110, Subpart 1) 5.1.1. All of the following criteria are incorporated into each SOP based on requirements set forth by the approved method.

5.1.2. All quality control requirements listed in the Quality Control section of the SOP must be followed.

5.2. Quality Control Criteria for Chemistry (2100) 5.2.1. Method Blanks (Subpart 2) 5.2.1.1. A blank is used to assess contamination from the laboratory.

5.2.1.2. Blanks must be processed with and under the same conditions as the associated samples to include all steps in the analytical procedure.

5.2.1.3. Criteria for blank frequency, acceptability, and corrective action for failed blanks are listed in the Quality Control section of each SOP. 5.2.2. Laboratory Control Sample (Subpart 3) 5.2.2.1. Criteria for laboratory control sample frequency, acceptability, and corrective action for failed laboratory control samples are listed in the Quality Control section of each SOP. 5.2.3. Quality Control Sample (4740.2093 Subpart 3 C) 5.2.3.1. A quality control sample is a second source sample used to verify purity and preparation of the calibration standards.

5.2.3.2. Criteria for quality control sample frequency, acceptability, and corrective action for failed quality control samples are listed in the Quality Control section of each SOP. 5.2.4. Matrix Spike and Matrix Spike Duplicate (Subpart 4) 5.2.4.1. A matrix spike/matrix spike duplicate pair is analyzed to determine the ability to recover the known analyte or compound in that sample matrix.

5.2.4.2. Matrix spikes and matrix spike duplicates are not required for analyses where there is no spiking solution available.

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 13 of 42

5.2.4.3. Analytical procedures requiring a matrix spike and matrix spike duplicate have criteria for frequency, acceptability and corrective action for failed spikes listed in the Quality Control section of each SOP. 5.2.5. Surrogate Spikes (Subpart 5) 5.2.5.1. Surrogate spiking applies only to the analysis of organic compounds.

5.2.5.2. Surrogates are comparable to the analytes of interest in chemical composition and assume to behave similarly in the analytical process.

5.2.5.3. Surrogate compounds must be added to all samples, standards and blanks prior to sample preparation or extraction.

5.2.5.4. Criteria for surrogate recovery, acceptability and tabulation are listed in the Quality Control section of each SOP. 5.2.6. Internal Standards (Subpart 6) 5.2.6.1. Internal standards (ISTD) are pure analytes similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. ISTDs are added to a sample in known amounts and used to measure the relative responses of other method analytes and surrogates in solution.

5.2.6.2. Internal standards are selected so that the measurement of the internal standard assumes minimal affect by method and matrix interferences.

5.2.6.3. Analytical procedures requiring the use of internal standards are added to all samples, standards and blanks prior to analysis.

5.2.6.4. For organic compounds, surrogate recoveries and reporting limit verifications are used as determinates of acceptable internal standard area counts.

5.2.6.5. For metal analysis, acceptable internal standard responses are based on response deviation from the original response of the calibration blank.

5.2.7. Detection Limits (Subpart 7) 5.2.7.1. Method Detection Limit (MDL): 5.2.7.1.1. The method detection limit (MDL) is the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the analyte concentration is greater than zero and is determined from analysis of a sample in a given matrix containing the analyte.

5.2.7.1.2. MDLs are not applicable to analyses where there is no spiking solution available.

5.2.7.1.3. The laboratory uses the EPA Procedure for determining MDLs is located in 40 CFR Appendix B to Part 136.

5.2.7.1.4. All MDLs are performed by spiking reagent water with the analyte of interest.

5.2.7.1.5. MDLs will be determined at the frequency specified in the approved reference method or when changes occur to the analytical system that will impact the MDL. 5.2.7.2. Detection Limit (DL): 5.2.7.2.1. All analytical methods employed by the MCES Laboratory will have a numerical Detection Limit (DL) assigned, except where such a limit would be technically or otherwise inappropriate, as determined by the Quality Assurance Officer. This DL will be used to censor all analytical results for the associated analytical method: all analytical results below the assigned limit will be reported as less than that numerical value (i.e., <{value}).

5.2.7.2.2. These DL values will be assigned by the QAO, taking into account pertinent factors such as routinely achievable EPA MDL’s, client needs and typical matrices, and method or regulatory based requirements. Generally, the values assigned are intended to be routinely achievable, that is, they will be no larger than necessary to assure that ongoing, determined EPA MDL’s will be below the DL’s with a high degree of confidence.

As circumstances dictate (new operators, new equipment, passage of time, or other potentially significant changes occur), EPA MDL’s will be determined to verify that the DL’s are still valid. The results of EPA MDL’s will be recorded and catalogued in the Laboratory’s LIMS. QA_MANUAL_2 Page 14 of 42

5.2.8. Reporting Limits (Subpart 8) 5.2.8.1. All analytical methods employed by the MCES Laboratory will have a numerical Reporting Limit (RL) assigned, except where such a limit would be technically or otherwise inappropriate, as determined by the QAO. This RL will be used to censor all analytical results for the associated analytical method: all analytical results below the RL assigned limit but above the DL, will be reported with a tilde qualifier (i.e., ~{value}).

RLâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s are based on method specific accuracy/recovery requirements. When these requirements are not specified, the RL must be validated, with a standard at or below the reporting limit, each time the instrument is calibrated. The RL standard must fall within plus or minus 40% of the true value.

5.2.8.2. Criteria for reporting limit verification frequency, acceptability, and corrective action for failed reporting limit verifications are listed in the Quality Control section of each SOP. 5.2.9. Selectivity (Subpart 9) 5.2.9.1. Selectivity only applies to volatile organic compounds and other organic compounds.

5.2.9.2. Selectivity utilizes absolute retention time and relative retention time to identify components in chromatographic analyses and to evaluate the effectiveness of a chromatographic medium to separate constituents.

5.2.9.3. For the GC-MS, compound identification is confirmed by comparing retention times and ions ratios to authentic standards.

5.2.9.4. For GC systems, compound identification is confirmed by using a dual column.

5.2.10. Manual Integrations (Subpart 10) 5.2.10.1. Manual integrations performed on GC and GC/MS systems are identified and calculated by the software.

5.2.11. Uncertainty Measurement 5.2.11.1. All results meet specifications of the reference method unless otherwise specified.

Additional uncertainty estimates for certified parameters have been performed by the laboratory and may be available upon request.

5.3. Quality Control Criteria for Bacteriology (4740.2110) 5.3.1. Sterility Checks and Blanks (Subpart 2) 5.3.1.1. A blank must be analyzed for each lot of prepared, ready-to-use media, including chromofluorogenic reagent, and for each lot of media prepared in the laboratory.

5.3.1.2. One beginning and one ending sterility check must be performed for each laboratorysterilized filtration unit used in a filtration series.

5.3.1.2.1. The filtration series is considered ended when more than 30 minutes elapse between successive filtrations.

5.3.1.2.2. During a filtration series, filter funnels must be rinsed with three 20 to 30 mL portions of sterile rinse water after each sample filtration.

5.3.1.3. For pour-plate technique, one sterility blank of the media must be made by pouring one uninoculated plate for each lot of prepared, ready-to-use media and one for each lot of media prepared in the laboratory.

5.3.1.4. Sterility checks on sample containers must be performed on at least one container for each lot of purchased, presterilized containers. For containers sterilized in the laboratory, a sterility check must be performed on one container per sterilized batch using nonselective growth media.

5.3.1.5. A sterility check must be performed on each batch of dilution water prepared in the laboratory and on each batch of pre-prepared, ready-to-use dilution water using nonselective growth media.

5.3.1.6. At least one filter from each new lot of membrane filters must be checked for sterility using nonselective growth media.

5.3.2. Positive Controls (Subpart 3) 5.3.2.1. Each pre-prepared, ready-to-use lot of media, including chromofluorogenic reagent, and each lot of media prepared in the laboratory must be tested with at least one pure culture of QA_MANUAL_2 Page 15 of 42

a microorganism known to elicit a positive reaction. This must be done before first use of each lot of media.

5.3.3. Negative Controls (Subpart 4) 5.3.3.1. Each pre-prepared, ready-to-use lot of selective media, including chromofluorogenic reagent, and each lot of selective media prepared in the laboratory must be analyzed with one or more known negative culture controls, that is, nontarget microorganisms that should not grow on the test media, as appropriate to the method. This must be done before first use of each lot of media.

5.3.4. Test Variability (Subpart 5) 5.3.4.1. For test methods that specify colony counts, such as methods using membrane filters or plated media, duplicate counts must be performed monthly on at least one positive sample for each month that the test is performed. With respect to this test for variability, if the laboratory has two or more analysts, each analyst must count typical colonies on the same plate and counts must be within ten percent difference between analysts to be acceptable.

In a laboratory with only one microbiology analyst, the same plate must be counted twice by the analyst, with no more than five percent difference between the counts.

5.3.5. Method Evaluation (Subpart 6) 5.3.5.1. A laboratory must demonstrate proficiency with the test method before first use, by comparison to a method already approved for use in the laboratory, by analyzing a minimum of ten spiked samples whose matrix is representative of those normally submitted to the laboratory, or by analyzing and passing one proficiency test series provided by an approved proficiency sample provider. The laboratory must maintain documentation of the proficiency demonstration as long as the method is in use and for at least five years after the date of last use.

5.3.6. Test Performance (Subpart 7) 5.3.6.1. To ensure that analytical results are accurate, a laboratory must confirm a target organism specified in the method.

5.3.7. Quality of Standards, Reagent and Media (Subpart 8) 5.3.7.1. Culture media may be prepared from commercial dehydrated powders or may be purchased ready to use, unless otherwise indicated in the approved method. Media may be prepared by the laboratory from basic ingredients when commercial media are not available or when it can be demonstrated that commercial media do not provide adequate results. Media prepared by the laboratory from basic ingredients must be tested for performance, such as for selectivity, sensitivity, sterility, growth promotion, and growth inhibition, before first use. Detailed testing criteria information must be defined in the laboratory's standard operating procedures manual or quality assurance manual.

5.3.7.2. Reagents, commercial dehydrated powders, and media must be used within the shelf life of the product. The specifications of the reagent, powder, or media must be documented according to the laboratory's quality assurance manual.

5.3.7.3. Distilled water, deionized water, or reverse-osmosis produced water that is free from bactericidal and inhibitory substances must be used in the preparation of media, solutions, and buffers. The quality of the water must be monitored for chlorine residual, specific conductance, and heterotrophic bacteria plate count monthly, when in use; when maintenance is performed on the water treatment system; or at startup after a period of disuse longer than one month. Analysis for metals and the bacteriological water quality test, to determine the presence of toxic agents or growth promoting substances, must be performed annually. Results of these analyses must meet the specifications of the required method and records of analyses must be maintained for five years. Laboratories that can supply documentation to show that their water source meets the criteria, as specified by the method, for ASTM or NCCL Type I or Type II reagent water and is free of bacteria that can grow under these test conditions are exempt from performing the bacteriological water quality test.

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 16 of 42

5.3.7.4. Media, solutions, and reagents must be prepared, used, and stored according to a documented procedure following the manufacturer's instructions or the test method.

Documentation for media prepared in the laboratory must include the date of preparation, preparer's initials, type and amount of media prepared, manufacturer and lot number, final pH of the media, and expiration date.

5.3.7.5. Documentation for media purchased pre-prepared and ready-to-use must include the manufacturer, lot number, type and amount of media received, date of receipt, expiration date of the media, and the verification pH of the liquid.

5.3.8. Selectivity (Subpart 9) 5.3.8.1. To ensure identity and traceability, reference cultures used for positive and negative controls must be obtained from a recognized national collection or organization.

5.3.8.2. Microorganisms may be single-use preparations or cultures maintained by documented procedures that demonstrate the continued purity and viability of the organism.

5.3.8.3. Reference cultures may be revived, if freeze-dried, or transferred from slants and subcultured once to provide reference stocks. The reference stocks must be preserved by a technique that maintains the characteristics of the strains. Reference stocks must be used to prepare working stocks for routine work. If reference stocks have been thawed, they must not be refrozen and reused.

5.3.8.4. Working stocks must not be cultured sequentially more than five times and must not be subcultured to replace reference stocks.

5.3.9. Temperature Measuring Devices (Subpart 10) 5.3.9.1. Temperature measuring devices such as liquid-in-glass thermometers, thermocouples, and platinum resistance thermometers used in incubators, autoclaves, and other equipment must be of the appropriate quality to meet specifications in the test method. The gradation of the temperature measuring devices must be appropriate for the required accuracy of measurement and the devices must be calibrated to national or international standards for temperature. All measurements must be recorded.

5.3.10. Autoclaves (Subpart 11) 5.3.10.1. The performance of each autoclave must be evaluated initially by establishing its functional properties and performance, for example heat distribution characteristics with respect to typical uses. Autoclaves must meet specified temperature tolerances. Pressure cookers must not be used for sterilization of growth media.

5.3.10.2. Demonstration of sterilization temperature must be provided by use of a continuous temperature recording device or by use of a maximum registering thermometer with every cycle. Appropriate biological indicators must be used once per month to determine effective sterilization. Temperature-sensitive tape must be used with the contents of each autoclave run to indicate that the autoclave contents have been processed.

5.3.10.3. Records of autoclave operations must be maintained for every cycle. Records must include: date, contents, maximum temperature reached, pressure, time in sterilization mode, total run time, which may be recorded as time in and time out, and operator's initials.

5.3.10.4. Autoclave maintenance, either internally or by service contract, must be performed annually and must include a pressure check and calibration of the temperature device.

Records of the maintenance must be maintained in equipment logs.

5.3.10.5. The autoclave's mechanical timing device must be checked quarterly against a stopwatch and the actual time elapsed must be documented.

5.3.11. Incubators, Water Baths and Ovens (Subpart 13) 5.3.11.1. The stability and uniformity of temperature distribution and the time required after test sample addition to reestablish equilibrium conditions in incubators and water baths must be documented. Temperature of incubators and water baths must be documented twice daily, at least four hours apart, on each day of use.

5.3.12. Labware, Glassware and Plasticware (Subpart 14) QA_MANUAL_2 Page 17 of 42

5.3.12.1. A laboratory must have a documented procedure for washing labware, if applicable.

Detergents designed for laboratory use must be used.

5.3.12.2. Glassware must be made of borosilicate or other noncorrosive material, free of chips and cracks, and have readable measurement marks.

5.3.12.3. Labware that is washed and reused must be tested for possible presence of residues that may inhibit or promote growth of microorganisms by performing the inhibitory residue test annually and each time the laboratory changes the lot of detergent or washing procedures.

5.3.12.4. Washed labware must be tested at least once daily, each day of washing, for possible acid or alkaline residue by testing at least one piece of labware with a suitable pH indicator such as bromothymol blue. Records of tests must be maintained.

6. Proficiency Testing (PT) (4740.2070 and TNI Standard V1M1) 6.1. Proficiency Testing Scope 6.1.1. To obtain initial accreditation, the laboratory shall successfully analyze two proficiency testing samples for each field of proficiency testing for which it seeks accreditation. (TNI Standard V1M1: 4.1.1) 6.1.2. The laboratory shall obtain PT samples from an accredited TNI-compliant PT provider. (TNI Standard V1M1: 4.1.2) 6.1.3. In order to maintain accreditation, the laboratory will analyze at least two PT samples per calendar year for each field of testing. (TNI Standard V1M1: 4.2.1a) 6.1.4. The analysis dates of successive PT samples for the same accreditation Field of Proficiency Testing shall be at least five months apart and no longer than seven months apart unless the PT sample is being used for corrective action. (TNI Standard V1M1: 4.2.1a) 6.1.5. In order to maintain accreditation, the laboratory will maintain a history of at least two successful performances out of the most recent three attempts for each requested field of proficiency testing. (TNI Standard V1M1: 4.2.1b) 6.1.6. The laboratory will participate in the annual Discharge Monitoring Report Quality Assurance Study (DMR-QA) that is designed to evaluate the entire process used to routinely report results in Discharge Monitoring Reports.

6.1.6.1. The DMR-QA study is mandatory for permit holders under the Clean Water Actâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES).

6.1.6.2. The study requirements are outlined in the DMR-QA Study Announcement packet which is mailed to NPDES permittees in the spring of each year.

6.1.6.3. PT results used for accreditation purposes may be acceptable to use for the DMR-QA Study if they meet the criteria as outlined in the DMR-QA Study Announcement packet.

6.2. Laboratory Testing of PT Samples and Reporting 6.2.1. Analysts are required to analyze all PT samples in the same manner as routine samples, employing all quality control requirements listed in the SOP. 6.2.2. The laboratory shall report PT results according to the reporting requirements listed in the TNI Standard. (TNI Standard V1M1: 5.2) 6.2.3. The lab will authorize the PT Provider to release all accreditation and remediation results and acceptable/not acceptable status directly to the Minnesota Department of Health, our Primary Accrediting Authority. (TNI Standard V1M1: 5.2.3) 6.2.4. The laboratory will maintain copies of records, including bench sheets, instrument strip charts, data calculations, and data reports, for five years. (TNI Standard V1M1: 5.3) 6.2.5. When the result of any reported field of testing is unacceptable, the laboratory must within 30 days after receiving the notification of results submit written documentation to MDH indicating corrective actions planned and taken. (4740.2070 Subpart 9) 6.2.6. The lab may elect to participate in supplemental PT studies when the lab desires to add field(s) of proficiency testing to their scope or when the lab fails an initial or continuing PT study and wishes to re-establish its history of successful performance. (TNI Standard V1M1: 6.1a) 6.2.7. There must be at least 15 calendar days between the analysis dates of successive PT samples for the same field of proficiency testing. (TNI Standard V1M1: 6.1b) QA_MANUAL_2 Page 18 of 42

7. Laboratory Sample Handling, Receipt and Acceptance (4740.2087) 7.1. Sample Handling, Sample Receipt Protocols and Preservation (Subpart 1) 7.1.1. The laboratory utilizes a Laboratory Information Management System (LIMS) to distinguish each individual sample and/or test with a unique identification.

7.1.1.1. The LIMS consists of four main tables of operation: Job, Sample, Test and Result.

7.1.1.1.1. There can be 1 or more samples in a job, 1 or more tests for a sample, and 1 or more results for a test.

7.1.1.2. Job, Sample and Test are unique identifiers that can never be repeated based on the design of the software. This also implies that Results will be unique.

7.1.1.3. Once information has been entered in the LIMS it has been “committed,” meaning it is archived and can be retrieved at any time.

7.1.1.4. “Projects” are set-up on an individual client basis. Clients submit to the laboratory a list of sampling locations, sample types, and parameters to be analyzed. They will then be given a unique project number that will be used throughout the lifetime of the client/laboratory relationship.

7.1.2. NPDES Samples: 7.1.2.1. When samples arrive to the laboratory, a Sample Missing Sheet is filled out to distinguish which samples are present, whether the cooling process had begun and whether NPDES samples requiring preservation have been preserved.

7.1.2.2. All NPDES samples requiring preservation are preserved within 15 minutes of sampling.

7.1.2.2.1. The pH of these samples are tested by placing a small amount of sample onto a pH paper strip.

7.1.2.2.1.1. If the sample has been properly preserved, it is mark that it is acceptable on the Sample Missing Sheet (SMS).

7.1.2.2.1.2. If the sample was not preserved properly, added more preservative and check the pH again. Do this until the sample is at the acceptable pH. 7.1.2.2.1.2.1. On the SMS, mark that the sample was not acceptable and note any additional comments/irregularities in the Notes section. Notify section manager and comment in the LIMS. 7.1.2.3. All SMS are filed with the current month’s Daily Monitoring Reports (DMR).

7.1.2.4. Samples are then transferred to a walk-in cooler for storage.

7.1.2.4.1. The cooler optimizes dual cooling units that alternate in their use to maintain reliability.

7.1.2.4.2. The walk-in cooler is continually monitored by a MUX system. The MUX system records temperature readings every second and is set-up to alert the proper personal if an issue would arise.

7.1.2.4.3. All standards are stored in separate refrigerators from all samples.

7.1.3. Non NPDES Samples: 7.1.3.1. Clients are required to submit a Sample Submission Sheet to the laboratory along with its corresponding sample.

7.1.3.2. All samples must be clearly identified and all Sample Submission Sheet completed in full.

7.1.3.2.1. Sample Submission Sheets are filed and stored for 5 years.

7.1.3.3. The following information is usually required for samples to be logged into the LIMS, but is project dependent: 7.1.3.3.1. Project Number 7.1.3.3.2. Sample Location 7.1.3.3.3. Sample Name 7.1.3.3.4. Sampling Point 7.1.3.3.5. Sampling collection date and time 7.1.3.3.6. Parameters requested 7.1.3.4. This information along with an identification number and bar code are printed onto labels designated by each field of testing.

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 19 of 42

7.1.3.5. After samples have been logged into the LIMS, they are labeled, split into appropriate testing vials/containers and preserved accordingly.

7.1.3.6. Samples are then transferred to a walk-in cooler for storage.

7.2. Sample Acceptance Policy (Subpart 3) 7.2.1. See Appendix G for the laboratory’s Sample Acceptance Policy.

8. Standards, Reagents and Bacteriological Media (4740.2089) 8.1. Logbook Documentation for Chemicals and Reagents (Subpart B): 8.1.1. Logbook Front Cover: 8.1.1.1. Title 8.1.1.2. Book number 8.1.1.3. Starting date 8.1.2. Chemical Entries: 8.1.2.1. The following must be documented in the logbook each time a new chemical is opened: 8.1.2.1.1. Identification of manufacturer/vendor 8.1.2.1.2. Certificate of Analysis/Purity retained and filed 8.1.2.1.3. Lot number 8.1.2.1.4. Date opened 8.1.2.1.5. Analyst’s initials 8.1.2.1.6. Method of preparation if not listed in SOP 8.1.2.1.7. Recommended storage if not specified in SOP 8.1.2.1.8. Expiration date (If an expiration date is not provided by the manufacturer or vendor it is not required) (TNI Standard V1M1: 5.6.4.2).

8.1.3. Reagent Entries: 8.1.3.1. The following must be documented in the logbook each time a new reagent is made: 8.1.3.1.1. Date prepared 8.1.3.1.2. Analyst’s initials 8.1.3.1.3. Reference to chemical used to prepare reagent (page, line) 8.1.3.1.4. Method of preparation if not listed in SOP 8.1.3.1.5. Recommended storage if not specified in SOP 8.1.3.1.6. Expiration date 8.1.3.1.6.1. Expiration date of a reagent cannot exceed that of its precursor(s).

8.2. Chemical and Reagent Bottle Labels (Subpart C): 8.2.1. Chemical Bottle Labels: 8.2.1.1. All chemical bottles must be labeled with unless otherwise noted in the SOP: 8.2.1.1.1. Date bottle was opened 8.2.1.1.2. Expiration date 8.2.1.1.3. Logbook Reference 8.2.2. Reagent Bottle Labels: 8.2.2.1. All reagent containers must be labeled with the following information unless otherwise noted in the SOP: 8.2.2.1.1. Name of reagent 8.2.2.1.2. Concentration/content 8.2.2.1.3. Date of preparation 8.2.2.1.4. Initials of analyst 8.2.2.1.5. Expiration date 8.2.2.1.6. Logbook reference (page, line) 9. Support Equipment Maintenance (4740.2091) 9.1. Scope of Support Equipment Maintenance (2091, Section 1.0 Subpart 1 Section A-B and Section 2.0) 9.1.1. Support equipment is necessary for laboratory operations and results are dependent upon their accuracy. The support equipment is properly maintained, inspected, and cleaned to ensure that the laboratory’s instrumentation is in control. Laboratory support equipment includes, but is not QA_MANUAL_2 Page 20 of 42

limited to the following: balances, ovens, refrigerators, freezers, incubators, water baths, block digesters, temperature measuring devices, thermistors, thermal/pressure sample preparation devices, autoclaves, volumetric dispensing devices and diluter devices. Laboratory support equipment includes all devices that may not be the actual test instrument, but are necessary to support laboratory operations. Analytical instrumentation (i.e. ICPMS, GC-MS, TRAACS and GC) and their requirements for instrumentation are listed in section 10.0. All support equipment is: 9.1.1.1. Purchased to meet verified performance specifications, (2091 Subpart 2 Section C) 9.1.1.2. Operated by trained personnel with access to up-to-date instruction manuals for reference, use, and maintenance, (2091 Subpart 2 Section A) 9.1.1.3. Properly maintained, inspected, calibrated, and cleaned by the servicing company and/or the technician. Maintenance and service activities are recorded in individual logbooks, (2091, Subpart 2 Section B) 9.1.1.4. As appropriate, calibrated and maintained at least annually and are traceable to internationally based references when available, over the entire range of use. The results of such calibrations must be within the specifications required of the application for which the equipment is used or the equipment is removed from service until repaired.

(2091, Subpart 4 Section C).

9.1.1.5. QA Officer will verify that annual maintenance plans have been completed.

9.2. Support Equipment and Software Logbooks: (2091, Subpart 2 Section C) 9.2.1. Individual logbooks are maintained for each item of support equipment and software. Logbooks are essential because they chronologically document preventative maintenance, repairs, service, calibrations, cleaning, and software applications. The equipment operator is to ensure that each piece of equipment has an updated logbook located next to each instrument or see section manager. Instrument and software logbooks shall maintain a specific format for each instrument and include the following requirements: 9.2.2. Logbook Front Cover Content 9.2.2.1. The center of the logbook cover shall have a list of the following information: 9.2.2.2. Identity of the analytical piece of equipment and/or software, 9.2.2.3. The manufacturer’s name, serial number, MCES property identification number and/or designated MCES instrument code (i.e. TRAACS 1, 2, 3…)

9.2.2.4. Initial date of the individual logbook as assigned to the equipment and the date completed or removed from service.

9.2.2.5. Sequential logbook number that is assigned to each new logbook starting with number 1 and counted up for each piece of designated equipment/software.

9.2.3. Logbook Content 9.2.3.1. Support instrument logbooks contain two sections and are intended to track static and active information. All logbook entries are recorded in blue or black permanent ink. The usage of white out or obliterated entries is not permitted.

9.2.3.2. Static Information 9.2.3.2.1. The first few pages of the laboratory manual are reserved for static information that is known to be stable or non-changing. General information placed on the cover is also transferred to the first few pages of the laboratory notebook. The following is a list of recorded static information when applicable and available: 9.2.3.2.2. Equipment/software name and/or version 9.2.3.2.3. Current location within the laboratory (Bench Code System) 9.2.3.2.4. Manufacturer’s name and serial number 9.2.3.2.5. MCES Property identification number 9.2.3.2.6. Initial and final date of logbook 9.2.3.2.7. Analyses assigned 9.2.3.2.8. Designated Instrument Codes (i.e. TRAACS 1, 2, 3….)

9.2.3.2.9. Software configuration information QA_MANUAL_2 Page 21 of 42

9.2.3.2.10. Date received/ Implementation date (mm/dd/yyyy) 9.2.3.2.11. Equipment specifications 9.2.3.2.12. Manufacturer’s Manual 9.2.3.2.13. Maintenance Plan 9.2.3.2.14. Condition when received, such as new, used or reconditioned 9.2.3.3. Active Information: 9.2.3.3.1. The second portion of the logbook is used to chronologically track routine and nonroutine maintenance. All maintenance that is non-routine or requires additional service not outlined in the maintenance schedule is distinguished with a highlighter pen. The following is a list/description of the items included in the active section of the logbook: 9.2.3.3.2. Date (mm/dd/yyyy) of routine and non-routine maintenance 9.2.3.3.3. Initials/Signature 9.2.3.3.4. Nature of damage, malfunction, modification, or repair 9.2.3.3.5. Adjustments made, parts used and who made adjustments 9.2.3.3.6. Acceptance criteria/reference material verification 9.2.3.3.7. Copies of reports, results and certifications of calibrations (paste/tape copies into the logbook) 9.2.3.3.8. Due date of next calibration 9.2.3.3.9. Removal of equipment when criteria not met 9.3. Frequency of Calibration (Subpart 3) 9.3.1. All support equipment, except Class A, must be calibrated prior to first use.

9.3.2. All heating and cooling devices, where a specified temperature is required, will be verified and recorded on days of use.

9.3.3. Mechanical volumetric dispensing devices including burettes, except Class A glassware, must be checked for accuracy quarterly.

9.3.4. All glassware, including glass micro liter syringes used for calibration, must be checked for accuracy and documented before its first use in the laboratory if the glassware does not come with a certificate attesting to establish accuracy.

9.3.5. The temperature, cycle time, and pressure of each run on the autoclave must be documented by the use of appropriate chemical indicators, temperature recorders, and pressure gauges.

9.3.6. Volumetric equipment must be calibrated as follows: 9.3.6.1. Equipment such as filter funnels, bottles, non-Class A glassware, and other marked containers must be calibrated once per lot prior to first use.

9.3.6.2. Disposable pipettes and micropipette tips must be checked once per lot.

9.4. Support Equipment Maintenance Plans (Subpart 3 Section A) 9.4.1. Each piece of support equipment has a maintenance plan that includes scheduled maintenance and calibration requirements/frequency. Calibration procedures depend upon the acceptance criteria listed in the analytical method as described in the Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) for each analysis or as established in manufacturer’s literature. In the absence of any method or manufacturer’s specific calibration requirements, the individual maintenance plan shall be established and approved by Quality Assurance Officer. A list of maintenance procedures and frequencies are outlined on a routine/preventative maintenance schedule and placed in the static section of the logbook.

9.5. Documentation and Archiving of Logbooks 9.5.1. Logbooks are filed alphabetically and chronologically in the quality assurance files when the support equipment’s lifecycle is over or when the logbook is full. The logbook(s) are filed once the final entry date is recorded, the spine is labeled (name, book number and dates) and a new logbook created. The completed logbooks are maintained in the quality assurance office for a minimum of five years as per the Record Retention and Retrieval statute 4740.2097.

10. Instrument Operational Validation (4740.2093) 10.1. Scope of Instrument Validation (2093, Subpart 1 and Subpart 2 Section A-B) QA_MANUAL_2 Page 22 of 42

10.1.1. Analytical instrumentation is actual test devices used in the generation of test results. All instrumentation is: 10.1.1.1. Purchased to meet verified performance specifications, (2093 Subpart 2 Section C) 10.1.1.2. Operated by trained personnel with access to up-to-date instruction manuals for reference, use, and maintenance, (2093 Subpart 2 Section A) 10.1.1.3. Properly maintained, inspected, calibrated, and cleaned by the servicing company and/or the technician. Maintenance and service activities are recorded in individual logbooks, (2093, Subpart 2 Section B) 10.1.1.4. As appropriate, calibrated and maintained at least annually and are traceable to internationally based references when available, over the entire range of use. The results of such calibrations must be within the specifications required of the application for which the equipment is used or the equipment is removed from service until repaired.

(2093, Subpart 2 Section B).

10.1.1.5. QA Officer will verify that annual maintenance plans are completed.

10.2. Analytical Instrumentation and Software Logbooks: (2093, Subpart 2 Section C) 10.2.1. Individual logbooks are maintained for each item of analytical instrumentation and software.

Logbooks are essential because they chronologically document preventative maintenance, repairs, service, calibrations, cleaning, and software applications. The equipment operator is to ensure that each piece of equipment has an updated logbook located next to each instrument or see section manager. Instrument and software logbooks shall maintain a specific format for each instrument and include the following requirements: 10.2.1.1. Logbook Front Cover Content 10.2.1.1.1. The center of the logbook cover shall have a list of the following information: 10.2.1.1.2. Identity of the analytical piece of equipment and/or software, 10.2.1.1.3. The manufacturer’s name, serial number, MCES property identification number and/or designated MCES instrument code (i.e. TRAACS 1, 2, 3…)

10.2.1.1.4. Initial date of the individual logbook as assigned to the equipment and the date completed or removed from service.

10.2.1.2. Logbook Content 10.2.1.2.1. Analytical instrument logbooks contain two sections and are intended to track static and active information. All logbook entries are recorded in blue or black permanent ink. The usage of white out or obliterated entries is not permitted.

10.2.1.2.2. Static Information 10.2.1.2.3. The first few pages of the laboratory manual are reserved for static information that is known to be stable or non-changing. General information placed on the cover is also transferred to the first few pages of the laboratory notebook. The following is a list of when applicable and available: 10.2.1.2.4. Equipment/software name and/or version 10.2.1.2.5. Current location within the laboratory (Bench Code System) 10.2.1.2.6. Manufacturer’s name and serial number 10.2.1.2.7. MCES Property identification number 10.2.1.2.8. Initial and final date of logbook 10.2.1.2.9. Analyses assigned 10.2.1.2.10. Designated MCES Instrument Codes (i.e. TRAACS 1, 2, 3….)

10.2.1.2.11. Software configuration information 10.2.1.2.12. Date received/ Implementation date (mm/dd/yyyy) 10.2.1.2.13. Equipment specifications 10.2.1.2.14. Manufacturer’s Manual 10.2.1.2.15. Maintenance Plan 10.2.1.2.16. Condition when received such as new, used, or reconditioned 10.2.1.2.17. Active Information QA_MANUAL_2 Page 23 of 42

10.2.1.2.18. The second portion of the logbook is used to chronologically track routine and nonroutine maintenance. All maintenance that is non-routine or requires additional service not outlined in the maintenance schedule is distinguished with a highlighter pen. The following is a list/description of the items included in the active section of the logbook: 10.2.1.2.19. Date (mm/dd/yyyy) of routine and non-routine maintenance 10.2.1.2.20. Initials/Signature 10.2.1.2.21. Nature of damage, malfunction, modification, or repair 10.2.1.2.22. Adjustments made, parts used and who made adjustments 10.2.1.2.23. Acceptance criteria/reference material verification Copies of reports, results and certifications of calibrations (paste/tape copies into the logbook) 10.2.1.2.24. Due date of next calibration 10.2.1.2.25. Removal of equipment when criteria not met 11. Analytical Response Calibration (4740.2093) 11.1. Analytical Response Calibration (2093, Subpart 3) 11.1.1. Calibration of an instrument is completed to convert instrument responses to concentration.

Sufficient records must be retained to allow for reconstruction of the instrument calibration.

Records should include: calibration date, approved method, instrument, analysis date, each analyte name, analystâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s initials or signature, concentration and response, calibration curve or response factor, or unique equation or coefficient used to reduce instrument responses to concentration.

11.1.2. The most current instrument calibration must be utilized to quantitate sample results.

11.1.3. A second source standard (Quality Control Sample) purchased from an alternate manufacturer or by the same manufacturer with different lot numbers, will be used to verify all instrument calibrations (see Section 11.2.)

11.1.4. Acceptance criteria for each instrument calibration are documented in the standard operating procedure (i.e. RL, QCS, LCS, and Blank.)

11.1.5. Only sample results within the calibration range will be accepted. Any sample results greater than the calibration range will be diluted and reanalyzed to meet the established criteria. Any sample results less than the calibration range will be qualified in the LIMS with a tilde.

11.1.6. Methods employing standardization with a zero point and a single point calibration point must have the following: 11.1.6.1. Prior to sample analysis, a series of standards will be analyzed to establish a linear range.

One of the standards must be at the single point quantitation level.

11.1.6.2. The linearity must be verified at a frequency specified in the SOP. 11.1.6.3. A zero point and a single point calibration standard must be analyzed with each analytical batch.

11.1.6.4. Each analytical batch must include a standard at or below the reporting limit. This standard must be within plus or minus 40 percent of its true value (2100, Subpart 8.)

11.1.7. If the instrument calibration does not meet the requirements set forth by the acceptance criteria, appropriate action must be taken to alleviate the issue and all samples affected must be reanalyzed. If sample reanalysis is not possible, all associated data must be qualified.

11.1.8. Calibration standards must not exceed concentration limits specified by the approved method.

11.1.9. The minimum number of required calibration standards for any test is 3 (unless specified in an approved method), not including a blank (zero standard), and one of these standards must be at the reporting limit. Instruments with established methodologies and procedure demonstrating the successful use of a zero and a single point standard may be used as an exception. All SOPs contain the number of calibration standards and the acceptance criteria required for the instrument calibration.

11.1.10. The frequency of an instrument calibration is specified in each SOP. 11.2. Calibration Verification (2093, Subpart 4) QA_MANUAL_2 Page 24 of 42

11.2.1. If an instrument calibration was not established on the day of analysis, a calibration verification (Laboratory Control Sample) must be analyzed with each batch to verify the instrument calibration prior to sample analysis.

11.2.2. The frequency, acceptance criteria and correction action for calibration verifications are specified in each SOP. 12. Laboratory Sample Reporting (4740.2095) 12.1. Data Reporting 12.1.1. The laboratory utilizes LIMS for reporting all data.

12.1.2. All data must be reported according to instructions listed in the SOP. 12.1.3. Clients receive results by electronic or paper reports. In certain cases where time is limited, the client may receive verbal results prior to an electronic or paper report.

12.1.4. The laboratory is responsible for preparing all regulatory reports and has all information required to report for compliance purposes. The laboratory is therefore exempt from formal report requirements listed in Minnesota Rule 4740.2095 Subpart C. 12.2. Reporting Convention: 12.2.1. All values less than the DL will be reported as < DL. 12.2.2. All values between the DL and RL will be preceded by a tilde (~).

12.2.3. All values between the RL and the top of the calibration range will be reported as is.

12.2.4. All values > the top of the calibration range must be diluted and re-run. If dilution is not possible, the value must be reported as > highest calibrant concentration and a comment must be made in the LIMS. 12.3. Comments in the LIMS: 12.3.1. A comment must be made into the LIMS under the following circumstances: quality control element failure(s), unacceptable sample integrity/condition, deviation of the SOP, and support equipment failure(s). These circumstances are defined below: 12.3.1.1. Quality Control Element Failure: 12.3.1.1.1. QC element failures includes, but is not limited to the following: blanks/ Quality of Water Check, laboratory control samples, quality control samples, matrix spikes, matrix spike duplicates, duplicates, instrument performance checks, sterility checks, etc.

12.3.1.1.2. QC element failures are batch specific. In the event of a failure, a comment must be added to all samples within the batch.

12.3.1.2. Unacceptable Sample Integrity/Condition as Received: 12.3.1.2.1. Unacceptable sample integrity includes, but is not limited to the following: temperature, pH, container type, leaking sample containers, adequate sample volume, abnormal appearance, etc.

12.3.1.2.2. Sample integrity is sample specific. In the event of unacceptable sample conditions, a comment must be made to the affected sample.

12.3.1.3. Deviation of the SOP: 12.3.1.3.1. Deviation of the SOP includes, but is not limited to the following: upon completion of the test it was determined the SOP was not followed as written and re-analysis of the sample(s) was not possible, the condition of the matrix prevents the analysis to be completed as requested (e.g. pH, sample too thick for by volume analysis, sample too thin for by weight analysis, etc).

12.3.1.3.2. Deviation of the SOP may be batch or sample specific.

12.3.1.3.2.1. If the deviation occurred to an entire batch, a comment must be added to all samples in the batch.

12.3.1.3.2.2. If the deviation occurred to a single sample, a comment must be added to the affected sample.

12.3.1.4. Support Equipment Failure During a Test or Storage: 12.3.1.4.1. Support equipment failure includes, but is not limited to the following: balances, ovens, refrigerators, freezers, incubators, water baths, block digesters, temperature QA_MANUAL_2 Page 25 of 42

measuring devices, thermistors, thermal/pressure sample preparation devices, autoclaves, volumetric dispensing devices and diluter devices.

12.3.1.4.2. Support equipment failures may be batch specific that affect samples and/or standards in more than one batch, or sample specific. In the event of a failure, a comment must be added to all affected samples.

12.4. Corrective Action Form (CAF) 12.4.1. Corrective Action Forms (CAFs) are used to correct systematic problems to minimize or prevent the situation from recurring.

12.4.1.1. CAFs are filled out in the LIMS with information describing the situation that occurred, findings of an investigation, associated samples and appropriate action to correct the problem.

12.4.1.2. Once the CAF has been entered into the LIMS it is automatically sent to the QC Officer for review.

12.4.1.3. The CAF is then used to correct all data from the point at which the situation occurred to when it was resolved.

12.4.1.4. Results are tracked and commented on, citing the CAF number.

12.4.1.5. Clients are notified and new reports are generated.

12.4.1.6. All CAFs are archived in the LIMS for tracking purposes.

12.5. Data Review and Authorization (TNI Standard V1M2: 4.2.8.4p) 12.5.1. After data entry, the data review process may consist of up to 3 types of verification when applicable. These types include multi-level product specification (MLPS), logically inconsistent data (LID), and/or peer review and authorization.

12.5.2. Multi-Level Product Specification (MLPS) 12.5.2.1. The quality of a product (Location/Sampling Point) is often determined by testing a sample and comparing it with a set of limits, known as a product specification. SampleManager (LIMS) is able to check results against a multi-level product specification (MLPS), containing one or more sets of limits for each of the test components. A product level is defined in the MLPS Level table for each set of limits entered. These limits are derived from historical data or permit requirements. The product level controls the way in which the limits are used during result entry and later in result comparison. During result entry, each result entered can be checked against each set of limits in turn. Messages will be displayed on screen, and a VGL program will be called if the result fails any set of limits.

The analyst will perform an appropriate investigation before accepting the result(s). MLPS status (in/out of spec) is stored in the LIMS database.

12.5.3. Logically Inconsistent Data (LID) 12.5.3.1. Logically Inconsistent Data (LID) is defined as results that contradict the logical relationship of the whole being the sum of its parts. One way to spot anomalous data is to see it in the context of related determinations. Such comparisons can spot situations where it appears that the whole is smaller than the sum of its parts. Various types of whole/part relationships can be identified to spot anomalies: different components on the same test, different tests on the same sample, and same tests on different matrices and different samples on the same â&#x20AC;&#x153;streamâ&#x20AC;?. Comparisons against a fixed list of determinations are made at result entry. When a LID is generated the analyst will perform an appropriate investigation and take necessary action to verify and/or correct the result. LID status is stored in the LIMS database.

12.5.4. Peer Review and Authorization (TNI Standard V1M2: 4.2.8.4p) 12.5.4.1. Worksheets, with appropriate QC supplemental documentation, are submitted to the appropriate Section Manager and/or their designee for review.

12.5.4.1.1. If the worksheet and corresponding QC information is complete and accurate, the worksheet will be authorized and completed in the LIMS. 12.5.4.1.2. If the worksheet and/or corresponding QC information is not complete, the worksheet will be submitted back to the analyst for further investigation.

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 26 of 42

13. Laboratory Records, Retention and Retrieval (4740.2097) 13.1. Record Keeping and Retention Time (4740.2097 Subpart A and B) 13.1.1. All information necessary for the historical reconstruction of data shall be maintained by the laboratory (TNI Standard V1M2: 4.13.3). The laboratory retains all information that produced analytical data for all samples, electronic and/or paper form, for a time period of five years.

13.1.1.1. This information is stored in the LIMS and/or Iron Mountain.

13.1.2. The laboratory maintains an up to date signature log of all designated personnel’s signature and initials.

13.1.2.1. All new laboratory staff must sign and initial the signature log prior to any analysis.

13.1.2.2. All staff must immediately inform management when changes in their name occur.

13.1.2.3. All staff are required to maintain consistency with initialing entries in the same manner as the signature log.

13.2. LIMS and Electronic Files (4740.2097 Subpart D – J) 13.2.1. All data and laboratory activities such as sample receipt, sample preparation or data verification is archived in the LIMS and can be retrieved at any time.

13.2.2. Each time an initial result is entered in the LIMS the date, time and analyst entering results is automatically tracked.

13.2.3. An audit trail is used to track any modifications made to a result in the LIMS. 13.2.3.1. The modification is stamped with the date, time and name of analyst performing the modification.

13.2.3.2. The LIMS is configured to retain the initial result even after modifications have been made.

13.3. Paper Records (4740.2097 Subpart D – J) 13.3.1. All paper entries must contain the recorder’s initials including but not limited to: worksheets, labels, and logbook entries (standards, maintenance, calibrations, temperature, volumetric checks, etc.)

13.3.2. All records that are handwritten must be legible and in permanent ink.

13.3.3. When making any corrections to any data, all corrections must be made with one strike through line.

13.3.3.1. This must be done in such a way so the error is still legible.

13.3.3.2. The analyst must then initial the correction(s).

14. Data Integrity Procedures (TNI Standard V1M2: 4.2.8.1) 14.1. These procedures provide assurance that a highly ethical approach to testing is a key component of all laboratory planning, training and implementation of methods.

14.1.1. Data Integrity Training (TNI Standard V1M2: 5.2.7) 14.1.1.1. Shall be provided by the Lab Manager or their designee one time per year.

14.1.1.2. The topics covered in the training session will be documented in writing and provided to all employees. Key topics must include: 14.1.1.2.1. Organizational mission and its relationship to the critical need of honesty and full disclosure in all analytical reporting 14.1.1.2.2. How and when to report data integrity issues 14.1.1.2.3. Record keeping 14.1.1.3. All current employees and new employees are required to take data integrity training once per year.

14.1.1.4. Attendees of the training will sign a Data Integrity Training Signature Attendance Sheet.

The QA Officer or their designee is responsible for creating the sheet.

14.1.1.5. New employees will undergo data integrity training and sign the Data Integrity Training Signature Attendance Sheet as a formal part of new employee orientation.

14.1.1.6. Signature Attendance Sheet(s) and a copy of the training materials will be filed in the QA Office and made available for auditor review.

14.1.2. Periodic monitoring of data integrity 14.1.2.1. The QA Officer or their designee shall look for evidence of inappropriate actions or vulnerabilities related to data integrity as part of their overall internal auditing program.

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 27 of 42

14.1.2.2. Potential issues will be fully investigated.

14.1.2.3. All investigations that result in finding of inappropriate activity shall be documented and shall include any disciplinary actions involved, corrective actions taken, and all appropriate notifications of clients.

14.1.2.4. All documentation of these investigations and actions taken shall be maintained in the QA Office for at least five years.

14.1.3. The Lab Manager, QA Officer, and Section Managers: 14.1.3.1. Shall uphold the spirit and intent of the data integrity procedures.

14.1.3.2. Shall effectively implement the specific requirements of the data integrity procedures.

14.1.3.3. Employees are encouraged to confidentially report suspected unethical behavior that is related to data integrity to the Lab Manager, QA Officer or Section Managers. Such instances will be fully investigated and documented as described in Section 14.1.2.3 and 14.1.2.4 .

15. Complaint Procedures (TNI Standard V1M2: 4.2.8.3n, and 4.8) 15.1. All data review requests should be made to the Analytical Support and Customer Service Section Manager, Dave Fuchs at dave.fuchs@metc.state.mn.us or (651) 602-8115.

15.2. All customer/staff concerns or complaints should be made to the Laboratory Manager, John Hubbling at john.hubbling@metc.state.mn.us or (651) 602-8135.

16. Management Reviews 16.1.

The laboratory manager is scheduled to meet weekly with the QA Officer and QA staff to review issues related to quality systems, and establish plans and timetables to implement program corrections and improvements. These issues include but are not limited to: revisions to the QA manual; feedback from Laboratory managers; results of internal and external assessments (audits, PT sample results, client feedback, etc.) Decisions made at these meetings are recorded.

16.2.

Laboratory Management is scheduled to meet monthly with primary clients to discuss status of current projects and plans for future projects.

16.3.

In addition, on an annual basis, the Laboratory Manager reviews strategic issues and plans, including relevant QA issues, with upper management; this report is reviewed and stored by upper management.

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 28 of 42

Appendix A

Metropolitan Council

Working for the Region, Planning for the Future Demonstration of Capability (DOC) for Chemistry Name: ___________________________________________

Scope of Certification LIMS Test Code:_____________________

SOP ID:__________________________________________

Analytes:___________________________

Analytical Technique(s):_____________________________

___________________________________

(e.g. extraction, digestion, Complete SOP)

Initial Demonstration

Re-certification

Certified Trainer: _______________________________ Date of Initial Training Period: ____________________ Standard (Name/Concentration):__________________ DOC Data Source:

PT

Method Standard

Matrix:_______________________________________ Date Demonstration Performed: ___________________ Sample Results

Acceptable Range

Data Acceptable (check one)

1.

YES

NO

2.

YES

NO

3.

YES

NO

4.

YES

NO

Note: Please attach/staple a copy of the worksheet, raw data/benchsheet and computer printout for review by quality control officer. Please attach additional sheet(s) for multi-component analyses.

*Signature of the analyst signifies that they have read, understood and agree to perform the above named analysis using the current version of the standard operating procedure(s) and the current quality assurance manual.

Analyst Name*

Signature

Date

Certified Trainer's Name (Initial DOC Only)

Signature

Date

Lam Sanouvong Quality Control Officer's Name

Signature

Date

The analyst is considered certified for the above named analyte(s), test code and technique, as of the date by the QA Officer. The original form is maintained in the QA officerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s files.

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 29 of 42

Appendix B

Metropolitan Council

Working for the Region, Planning for the Future Demonstration of Capability (DOC) for Microbiology Name: ___________________________________________

Scope of Certification LIMS Test Code:________________ Analytes:______________________

SOP ID:_________________________________ Analytical Technique(s):_____________________________

______________________________

(e.g. extraction, digestion, Complete SOP)

Initial Demonstration

Re-certification

Certified Trainer: _______________________________ Date of Initial Training Period: ____________________ Standard (Name/Concentration):__________________ DOC Data Source:

PT

Data Comparison

Date Demonstration Performed: ___________________ Sample Results

Acceptable Range

Data Acceptable (check one)

1.

YES

NO

2.

YES

NO

3.

YES

NO

4.

YES

NO

Note: Please attach/staple a copy of the worksheet, raw data/benchsheet and computer printout for review by quality control officer.

Please attach additional sheet(s) for multi-component analyses. *Signature of the analyst signifies that they have read, understood and agree to perform the above named analysis using the current version of the standard operating procedure(s) and the current quality assurance manual.

Analyst Name*

Signature

Date

Certified Trainer's Name (Initial DOC Only)

Signature

Date

Lam Sanouvong Quality Control Officer's Name

Signature

Date

The analyst is considered certified for the above named analyte(s), test code and technique, as of the date by the QA Officer. The original form is maintained in the QA officerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s file.

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 30 of 42

APPENDIX C

Metropolitan Council Working for the Region, Planning for the Future

Certified Standard Operating Procedures Certified Parameter

Alkalinity, as CaCO3 Ammonia, as N Biochemical Oxygen Demand, carbonaceous Biochemical Oxygen Demand, carbonaceous Chemical Oxygen Demand Chloride Chloride Cyanide, Total Hardness Kjeldahl Nitrogen, Total (TKN) Nitrate, as N Phenolics, Total Phosphorus, Total (TP) Residue, Nonfilterable (TSS) Sulfate Metals Mercury E.Coli Bateria E.Coli Bateria Fecal Coliform PCB/Pesticide Purgeable Organic Compounds Semi-Volatile Organic Compounds Acrolein/Acrylonitrile

Certified Reference Method

EPA 310.2 EPA 350.1 Rev. 2.0 SM 5210 B-01 Hach 10360 EPA 410.4 Rev. 2.0 SM 4500-Cl- E-97 EPA 300.0 Rev. 2.1 EPA 335.4 Rev. 1.0 SM 2340 C-97 EPA 351.2 Rev. 2.0 SM 4500 NO3- H-00 EPA 420.1 MNPBMS 014 (365.4) MNPBMS 016 (2540D) EPA 300.0 Rev 2.1 MNPBMS 003 (200.8) MNPBMS 015 (245.7) Coliert Quanti-Tray Coliert-18 Quanti-Tray EPA 600/8-78-017 p.124 EPA 608 Appendix A EPA 624 Appendix A EPA 625 Appendix A EPA 1624B Appendix A

Metropolitan Council Environmental Services 2400 Childs Rd Saint Paul, Minnesota 55106 US EPA Lab Code: MN00025

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 31 of 42

MCES Reference

ALK_AA NH3_AA BOD5 BOD5 COD CHLORIDE_AA ANIONS_IC HCN HARD-TITR NUT_AA N-N_AA PHENOL NUT_AA TSSVSS ANIONS_IC MET-ICPMSV HG_CVGF COLI-Q COLI-Q FCOLI_MF PCB-PST-GCV PURG-PP-MSV BNA-MSV ACR-MS

APPENDIX D

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 32 of 42

APPENDIX E

Test Codes by Analytical Section Certified Test Codes Identity BOD5C

FCOLI-MF TSS-GF AG-MSV AL-MSV AS-MSV BA-MSV BE-MSV CD-MSV CO-MSV CR-MSV CU-MSV

Description BOD; 5-day; carbonaceous E Coliform bacteria count; multiple tube fermentation, Quanti-Tray Method Fecal Coliform bacteria count; membrane filtration Suspended solids Silver; ICPMS; by volume Aluminum; ICPMS;by volume Arsenic; ICPMS; by Volume Barium; ICPMS; by volume Beryllium; ICPMS;by volume Cadmium; ICPMS;by volume Cobalt by ICPMS; by volume Chromium; ICPMS;; by volume Copper; ICPMS; by volume

HG-CVGF7V

Mercury;Epa 245.7;w/o 1669;cold vapor; single gold amalgam; florescence; PSA Automated; >1.0 ng/l (Bromine Digestion) by volume

ECOLI-MPNT

Group ID BIO/RESIDUE

Analysis Type BOD5

BIO/RESIDUE

ECOLI-MPNT

BIO/RESIDUE BIO/RESIDUE METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS

FCOLI-MF TSS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS

METALS

HG-CVGF7

METALS

HG-CVGF7

METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS WET CHEM

ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ALK-AV

MET-MSV MN-MSV MO-MSV NI-MSV PB-MSV SB-MSV SE-MSV TL-MSV V-MSV ZN-MSV ALK-AV

Mercury;Epa 245.7;with 1669;cold vapor; single gold amalgam; florescence; PSA Automated; >1.0 ng/l (Bromine Digestion) by volume Metals: Cu; NI; Pb; Zn; Cd; Cr; by ICPMS;by volume Manganese; ICPMS;by volume Molybdenum; ICPMS;by volume Nickel; ICPMS;by volume Lead; ICPMS;by volume Antimony; ICPMS;by volume Selenium; ICPMS; by volume Thallium; ICPMS;by volume Vanadium; ICPMS;by volume Zinc; ICPMS;by volume Alkalinity; autoanalysis by volume

ANION-ICV CL-AV

Anions by Ion Chromatography;by volume; Nitrate N; Nitrite N; Sulfate; Chloride; Ortho P; Fluoride; Bromide Chloride ion; autoanalysis by volume

WET CHEM WET CHEM

ANION-IC CL-AV

CL-ICV

Chloride by Ion Chromatography;by volume;

WET CHEM

CL-IC

COD-A2

Chemical Oxygen Demand; with Silver Slufate; sealed ampule; spectrophotometric

WET CHEM

COD-A

HG-CVGF97V

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 33 of 42

COD-AW2

Chemical Oxygen Demand; by weight; with silver sulfate; sealed ampule; spectrophotometric

WET CHEM

COD-A

WET CHEM

HARD

WET CHEM

HCN-A2

WET CHEM

N_N-A

WET CHEM

NH3-A

WET CHEM

NUTS-A

WET CHEM

NUTS-AR

WET CHEM WET CHEM

NUTS-A NUTS-A

SO4-ICV

Hardness; high level:>5mg/l; EDTA titration Cyanide;semi micro digest;auto color;vol: acid reflux; barbituric acid colorimetry Nitrate/Nitrite-N;28 day hold time;autoanalysis by volume Ammonia Nitrogen; phenate; autoanalysis; by volume Kjeldahl Nitrogen and Phosphorus; total; autoanalysis by volume RUSH' Kjeldahl Nitrogen and Phosphorus; total; autoanalysis by volume Kjeldahl Nitrogen and Phosphorus; total; autoanalysis by weight Phosphorus; total; autoanalysis by volume Sulfate Anion by Ion Chromatography;by volume;

WET CHEM

SO4-IC

TKN-AV

Kjeldahl Nitrogen; total; autoanalysis by volume

WET CHEM

NUTS-A

ORGANICS

ACR-MS

ORGANICS ORGANICS

PCB-GC PNL-4A

ORGANICS

PPBNA-MS

PPP-MSV

PP Base Neut.+Acid Extract. by MS by Volume Purgeable Prior. Poll. by MS by vol; alph and aromat

ORGANICS

PPP-MS

PPPST-GCV

Pesticides by GC by vol from PP list; w/ PCB

ORGANICS

PPPST-GC

HARD-HL HCN-A2V N_N-AV NH3N-AV NUT-AV NUT-AVR NUT-AW P-AV

ACR-MSV PCB-GCV PNL-4A PPBNA-MSV

Acrolein and acrylonitrile by MS; by vol.

Ambient purge with isotope dilution epa 1624 Polychlorinated Biphenyls by Arochlor by GC by volume Phenolics; total; 4-AAP colorimetric

Certified and Non-Certified Test Codes Identity

Description

Group ID

Analysis Type

BOD5 BOD5C

BOD; 5-day; carbonaceous and nitrogeneous BOD; 5-day; carbonaceous

BIO/RESIDUE BIO/RESIDUE

BOD5 BOD5

BODTOX

BOD Toxicity - Evaluate potential toxicity of material as indicated by increasing BOD with increasing BOD dilutions

BIO/RESIDUE

BODTOX

BODUC70-DN

BOD; ultimate; carbonaceous and nitrogeneous seperate; by Delta N method. Glass bead method in 2 Liter BOD bottle.

BIO/RESIDUE

BODUC70-DN

BIO/RESIDUE

CL2

BIO/RESIDUE

CL2-DPD-C

CL2-BIA CL2-DPD-C

Chlorine residual; amperometric; backtitration with I2; measures strong oxidants reported as CL2.

CHLORINE RESIDUAL;DPD COLORIMETRIC

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 34 of 42

CL2-FTS

Chlorine residual; forward titration; with thio; starch endpoint; measures strong oxidants reported as CL2

BIO/RESIDUE

CL2-FTS

CLA-BMTRCS

Chlorophylls on surfaces (sonify): trichrom a; b and c; pheophytin corrected and viability indicators;extraction by sonification in 90% acetone.

BIO/RESIDUE

CLA

CLA-TR-CS

Chlorophylls (sonify): trichrom a; b and c; mono chrom- pheophytin corrected and viability indicators;extraction by sonification in 90% acetone.

BIO/RESIDUE

CLA

COLI-MPNT

Total Coliform bacteria and E Coliform bacteria count; multiple tube fermentation, Quanti-Tray Method

BIO/RESIDUE

ECOLI-MPNT

BIO/RESIDUE BIO/RESIDUE BIO/RESIDUE

COLI-PA COND DOX

BIO/RESIDUE

ECOLI-MPNT

BIO/RESIDUE

FCOLI-MF

BIO/RESIDUE

FCOLI-MPN

BIO/RESIDUE

FCOLI-MPN

BIO/RESIDUE

FCOLI-MPN

FCOLI-MPNB

Total Colifrom bacteria; presence/absence; Chromgenic Substrate Technique; Colitert indicator ONPG-MUG; (Ortho-nitrophenyl-BD-galactopyranoside - 4-methylumbelliferyl-Bd-glucoronide) Conductivity Dissolved oxygen; winkler titration E Coliform bacteria count; multiple tube fermentation, Quanti-Tray Method Fecal Coliform bacteria count; membrane filtration Fecal Coliform bacteria count; multiple tube fermentation Fecal Coliform bacteria count; multiple tube fermentation; Class A detemination Fecal Coliform bacteria count; multiple tube fermentation; Class B Determination

HETEROPCNT MICROEXAM

Heterotrophic plate count (bacteria); pour plate Microscopic examination and description

BIO/RESIDUE BIO/RESIDUE

HETER0PCNT MICROEXAM

ML_EXAM

BIO/RESIDUE

ML_EXAM

BIO/RESIDUE

ML_TAX

BIO/RESIDUE

ECOLI-MPNT

BIO/RESIDUE

TURB

BIO/RESIDUE BIO/RESIDUE BIO/RESIDUE BIO/RESIDUE

BM_SOLIDS BTU DENSITY GRIT_SLDG

POLY_EXSOL TDS-180

Microscopic exam. and desc. of mixed liquor Microscopic exam and Taxonomic identification of filaments in Mix Liquor Total Coliform bacteria count; multiple tube fermentation, Quanti-Tray Method Turbidity by nephelometry; Nephelometric Turbidity Ratio Units; Hach 2100N Meter; Biomass solids; hydrated volatile solids plus sediment free dry weight British Thermal Units; O2 bomb Density Grit in sludge; Zimpro warrenty procedure Polymer solids by acetone extraction technique at 70 deg C Total Dissolved Solids; dried at 180 deg C

BIO/RESIDUE BIO/RESIDUE

POLYSOLIDS TDS-180

TOXORG-WT

Toxicity testing Organism Weight; to 0.00001gm (max=30gm) using analytical balance

BIO/RESIDUE

WEIGHT

COLI-PA COND DOX-W ECOLI-MPNT FCOLI-MF FCOLI-MPN FCOLI-MPNA

ML_TAX TCOLI-MPNT TRB-NTRUN2 BM_SOLIDS BTU-O2 DENSITY-WV GRIT_SLDG

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 35 of 42

TS_ASH-VOL TSS-GF TSSVSS-GF TS-VOL

Fixed solids; volumetric basis; 550 deg C Suspended solids Suspended and volatile suspended solids Total solids; volumetric basis; 103 deg C

BIO/RESIDUE BIO/RESIDUE BIO/RESIDUE BIO/RESIDUE

TS_ASH TSS VSS TS

TSVS-VOL

Total and volatile solids; volumetric basis (mg/l)

BIO/RESIDUE

TVS

TSVS-WT

Total and volatile solids; weight basis(%); 550C

BIO/RESIDUE

TVS

TSVS-WTC TS-WT

Total and volatile solids; weight basis(%); 550C Dry to constant weight; Method 2540G SM 18th edition Total solids weight basis (%)

BIO/RESIDUE BIO/RESIDUE

TVS TS

BIO/RESIDUE

TS

BIO/RESIDUE METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS

WEIGHT ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS

METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS

CR6-ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS

CR6-MSV CR-MSV CR-MSW CU-MSV CU-MSW FE-MSV FE-MSW

Total solids weight basis (%); Dry to constant weight; Method 2540G SM 18th edition Weight to 0.01gm (min=1gm) using top loader balance Silver; ICPMS; by volume Silver; ICPMS ; by weight Aluminum; ICPMS;by volume Aluminum; ICPMS; by weight Arsenic; ICPMS; by Volume Arsenic; ICPMS; by Weight Barium; ICPMS; by volume Barium; ICPMS by weight Beryllium; ICPMS;by volume Beryllium; ICPMS; by weight Boron by ICPMS;by volume Boron by ICPMS by weight Calcium; ICPMS; by volume Calcium; ICPMS; by weight Cadmium; ICPMS;by volume Cadmium; ICPMS; by weight Cobalt by ICPMS; by volume Cobalt by ICPMS; by weight Hex. chromium; filtered. precip/ICPMS method.

USEPA Method 218.5 Chromium; ICPMS;; by volume Chromium; ICPMS; by weight Copper; ICPMS; by volume Copper; ICPMS; by weight Iron; ICPMS; by volume Iron; ICPMS; by weight

HG-CVAW

Mercury; cold vapor AAS; PSA Automated; >1.0 ug/kg(Permangate Digestion) by weight

METALS

HG-CVA

HG-CVFV

Mercury; cold vapor; fluorescence; PSA Automated; >1.0 ng/l (Bromine Digestion) by volume

METALS

HG-CVF

HG-CVFW

Mercury; cold vapor; fluorescence; PSA Automated; >1.0 ng/l (Bromine Digestion) by weight

METALS

HG-CVF

TS-WTC WEIGHT AG-MSV AG-MSW AL-MSV AL-MSW AS-MSV AS-MSW BA-MSV BA-MSW BE-MSV BE-MSW B-MSV B-MSW CA-MSV CA-MSW CD-MSV CD-MSW CO-MSV CO-MSW

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 36 of 42

HG-CVGF7V

Mercury;Epa 245.7;w/o 1669;cold vapor; single gold amalgam; florescence; PSA Automated; >1.0 ng/l (Bromine Digestion) by volume

METALS

HG-CVGF7

HG-CVGF97V

Mercury;Epa 245.7;with 1669;cold vapor; single gold amalgam; florescence; PSA Automated; >1.0 ng/l (Bromine Digestion) by volume

METALS

HG-CVGF7

METALS METALS METALS

HG-CVA ICPMS ICPMS

METALS

ICPMS

METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS METALS WET CHEM

ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ICPMS ALK-AV

MET-MSW MG-MSV MG-MSW MN-MSV MN-MSW MO-MSV MO-MSW NA-MSV NA-MSW NI-MSV NI-MSW PB-MSV PB-MSW SB-MSV SB-MSW SE-MSV SE-MSW SN-MSV SN-MSW TI-MSV TI-MSW TL-MSV TL-MSW V-MSV V-MSW ZN-MSV ZN-MSW ALK-AV

Mercury; Spke; cold vapor AAS; PSA Automated; >1.0 ug/kg(Permangate Digestion) by weight Potassium; ICPMS;by volume Potassium; ICPMS; by weight Metals: Cu; NI; Pb; Zn; Cd; Cr; by ICPMS;by volume Metals: Cu; NI; Pb; Zn; Cd; Cr; by ICPMS; by weight Magnesium; ICPMS;by volume Magnesium; ICPMS; by weight Manganese; ICPMS;by volume Manganese; ICPMS; by weight Molybdenum; ICPMS;by volume Molybdenum; ICPMS; by weight Sodium; ICPMS;by volume Sodium; ICPMS; by weight Nickel; ICPMS;by volume Nickel; ICPMS; by weight Lead; ICPMS;by volume Lead; ICPMS; by weight Antimony; ICPMS;by volume Antimony; ICPMS; by weight Selenium; ICPMS; by volume Selenium; ICPMS;by weight Tin; ICPMS;by volume Tin; ICPMS; by weight Titanium; ICPMS; by volume Titanium;ICPMS; by weight Thallium; ICPMS;by volume Thallium; ICPMS; by weight Vanadium; ICPMS;by volume Vanadium;ICPMS; by weight Zinc; ICPMS;by volume Zinc; ICPMS; by weight Alkalinity; autoanalysis by volume

ANION-ICV

Anions by Ion Chromatography;by volume; Nitrate N; Nitrite N; Sulfate; Chloride; Ortho P; Fluoride; Bromide

WET CHEM

ANION-IC

ANION-ICW CL-AV

Anions by Ion Chromatography;by weight; Nitrate N; Nitrite N; Sulfate; Chloride; Ortho P Chloride ion; autoanalysis by volume

WET CHEM WET CHEM

ANION-IC CL-AV

CL-ICV

Chloride by Ion Chromatography;by volume;

WET CHEM

CL-IC

HG-SPKCVA K-MSV K-MSW MET-MSV

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 37 of 42

COD-A2

Chemical Oxygen Demand; with Silver Slufate; sealed ampule; spectrophotometric

WET CHEM

COD-A

COD-AW2

Chemical Oxygen Demand; by weight; with silver sulfate; sealed ampule; spectrophotometric

WET CHEM

COD-A

WET CHEM

HARD

WET CHEM

HCN-A2

WET CHEM

HCN-A2

WET CHEM

HCNCL2-A2

WET CHEM

N_N-A

WET CHEM

N_N-A

WET CHEM

N_N-A

WET CHEM

NH3-A

WET CHEM

NH3-A

WET CHEM

NUTS-A

WET CHEM

NUTS-A

WET CHEM

NUTS-AP

WET CHEM

NUTS-A

WET CHEM

NUTS-AR

WET CHEM

NUTS-A

WET CHEM

OIL-SOX

WET CHEM

OIL-SOX

WET CHEM

OIL-SOX

WET CHEM

ORTHO_P

HARD-HL HCN-A2V HCN-A2W

HCNCL2-A2V N_N-AHV N_N-AV N_N-AW NH3N-AV NH3N-AW NUT-AHLV NUT-ALV

NUT-AP NUT-AV NUT-AVR NUT-AW OIL-SOX OIL-SOX2 OIL-SOXW2 ORTHO_P

ORTHO_PH P-AHLV P-ALV

Hardness; high level:>5mg/l; EDTA titration Cyanide;semi micro digest;auto color;vol: acid reflux; barbituric acid colorimetry Cyanide;semi micro digest;auto color; wgt: acid reflux; barbituric acid colorimetry Cyanide amenable to Cl2;man dig;auto color;vol: acid reflux; barbituric acid colorimetry (diff. between chlorinated samp. and straight samp.)

Nitrate/Nitrite-N;extended holding time;autoanalysis by volume Nitrate/Nitrite-N;28 day hold time;autoanalysis by volume Nitrate and Nitrite Nitrogen; autoanalysis by weight Ammonia Nitrogen; phenate; autoanalysis; by volume Ammonia Nitrogen; phenate; autoanalysis; by weight Phos + Kjel; Low Level; Extended Holding time; Auto Analysis PHOS (TOT) AND KJEL. NIT; LOW LEVEL AUTO ANAL Kjeldahl Nitrogen and Phosphorus; particulate matter; autoanalysis; reporting units corrected to mg/l.

Kjeldahl Nitrogen and Phosphorus; total; autoanalysis by volume RUSH' Kjeldahl Nitrogen and Phosphorus; total; autoanalysis by volume Kjeldahl Nitrogen and Phosphorus; total; autoanalysis by weight Oil and Grease; freon soxhlet extraction; gravametric Oil and Grease; Hexane soxhlet extraction; gravametric Oil and Grease; hexane soxhlet extraction; gravametric; by weight Phosphorus; ortho; manual phospho-molybdate spectrophotometric

Phosphorus; ortho; manual phospho-molybdate spectrophotometric; non-std;extended holding time;frozen samples WET CHEM Phosporus (Tot); Low Level; Extended Holding time-samples frozen; Auto Anal WET CHEM PHOSPHORUS (TOT);LOW LEVEL AUTO ANAL WET CHEM QA_MANUAL_2 Page 38 of 42

ORTHO_P NUTS-A NUTS-A

SO4-ICV

Phosphorus; particulate matter; autoanalysis; reporting units corrected to mg/l.

Phosphorus; total; autoanalysis by volume Phosphorus; total; autoanalysis by weight Silica; molybdate reactive; Auto Analysis.

Sulfate Anion by Ion Chromatography;by volume;

TKN-AP

Kjeldahl Nitrogen; particulate matter; autoanalysis; reporting units corrected to mg/l.

WET CHEM

NUTS-AP

TKN-AV

Kjeldahl Nitrogen; total; autoanalysis by volume

WET CHEM

NUTS-A

TKN-AW

Kjeldahl Nitrogen; total; autoanalysis by weight Total Organic Carbon; high temp combustion module; NDIR detection Total Organic Carbon; wet oxidation; auto sampler;settled sample; NDIR detection

WET CHEM

NUTS-A

WET CHEM

TOC-HTC

WET CHEM

TOC-WO

WET CHEM

TOC-WO2

ORGANICS

ABS-UV

ORGANICS

ACR-MS

ORGANICS

BTEX-MS

ORGANICS ORGANICS

PPBN-MS DYE-FL

ORGANICS

MS-ID

P-AP P-AV P-AW SILICA-AV

TOC-HTC TOC-WO

TOC-WO2 ABS-UV

Total Organic Carbon; wet oxidation; Manual injection - mixed sample; NDIR detection ABSORBANCE/TRANSMITTANCE (UV/VIS) AT SPECIFIED WAVELENGTH

WET CHEM WET CHEM WET CHEM WET CHEM

NUTS-AP NUTS-A NUTS-A SILICA

WET CHEM

SO4-IC

MS-ID

Acrolein and acrylonitrile by MS; by vol.

Ambient purge with isotope dilution epa 1624 Benzene; Toluene; Ethly Benzene; and Xylenes

by MS by vol(BTEX) Base neutrals by MS from Centralized Waste Treatment list; by vol Dyes; quantitation by fluorescence MS ID or verification (P/A) of suspected sample components.

MS-SCAN

Mass spectral scan of unknown mix with tentative ID of selected components and 'area count quantification' (ie w/o standards)

ORGANICS

MS-SCAN

MS-SCAN2

Mass spectral scan with confirmation and quantitation of components in unknown mixture in samples thru use of pure standards.

ORGANICS

MS-SCAN2

ORGANICS

PCB-AGCW

ORGANICS

PCB-GC

ORGANICS ORGANICS

PCB-GC PNL-4A

ORGANICS

PPBNA-MS

ACR-MSV BTEX-MSV CWTBN-MSV DYE-FL

PCB-GCW PNL-4A

PCB's; by Arochlor by GC by weight Accelerated Solvent Extraction with GPC and Micro/Macro SPE (Solid Phase Extraction) cleanup Techniques Polychlorinated Biphenyls by Arochlor by GC by volume Polychlorinated Biphenyls by Arochlor by GC by weight Phenolics; total; 4-AAP colorimetric

PPBNA-MSV

PP Base Neut.+Acid Extract. by MS by Volume

PCB-AGCW PCB-GCV

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 39 of 42

PPBNA-MSW

PP Base Neut.+Acid Extract. by MS by weight

ORGANICS

PPBNA-MS

PPBNA-SPKM

ORGANICS

PPBNA-MS

PPBN-MSV

PP Base Neut.+Acid Extract SPIKE by MS Base neutrals by MS from Priority Pollutant list; by vol

ORGANICS

PPBN-MS

PPPAR-MSV

Purgeable aromatic Prior Poll by MS by vol

ORGANICS

PPPAR-MS

PPPAR-MSW

Purgeable aromatic Prior Poll by MS by weight Purgeable Prior. Poll. by MS by vol; alph and aromat Purgeable Prior. Poll. by MS by weight alph and aromat Purgeable Prior. Poll. SPIKE by MS; alph and aromat

ORGANICS

PPPAR-MS

ORGANICS

PPP-MS

ORGANICS

PPP-MS

ORGANICS

PPP-MS

Pesticides by GC by vol from PP list; w/ PCB Pesticides by GC by weight from Prior Poll list; w/ PCB

ORGANICS

PPPST-GC

ORGANICS

PPPST-GC

PH

pH by electrochemical pH probe

PRECIP

Metro Plant Daily Precipitation

TEMP

INFLUENT TEMPERATURE

ORGANICS ORGANICS ORGANICS ANALYTICAL SUPPORT ANALYTICAL SUPPORT ANALYTICAL SUPPORT ANALYTICAL SUPPORT

PPPST-GC VA-ABT VA-GC

MINMAXPH

Pesticides by GC SPIKE from PP list; w/ PCB Volatile acids (total) by acid/base titration Volatile acids by GC by vol FIELD DATA: Min and Max pH values read from Primary Influent pH graphs

PPP-MSV PPP-MSW PPP-SPKM PPPST-GCV PPPST-GCW PPPST-SPKG VA-ABT VA-GCV

QA_MANUAL_2 Page 40 of 42

FIELD_DATA PH FIELD_DATA FIELD_DATA

APPENDIX F 4740.2099 Initial Demonstration of Analyst Certification Database Date Last Updated: Updated By:

Date

Name/Analyst

Employee

Training

Status

Completed

(P= Past)

Test Code

SOP

Analytical

Supervisor/Trainer

Identification #

Date Recertification

Date Recert.

Technique

Name

Required

Completed

QA_MANUAL_1 Page 41 of 42

APPENDIX G

Laboratory Services Sample Acceptance Policy Minnesota Department of Healthâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s (MDH) Laboratory Certification rules require that Laboratories establish a Sample Acceptance Policy (SAP) and make it available to sample collection personnel. This policy should clearly outline the circumstances under which samples will be accepted or rejected by the laboratory. Due to the MPCA regulatory monitoring requirements, rather than rejecting samples, Laboratory Services staff will put procedures into place to check for sample irregularities. Such irregularities will be documented and communicated to sample collection personnel. Laboratory staff is always responsible for preparing Agency compliance reports. Documented sample irregularities will be incorporated into these report generation processes.

All samples subject to Laboratory Certification protocols must be collected and preserved according to Code of Federal Regulations 40 Part 136 table II. Upon receipt in the laboratory, samples will be handled according to the following Laboratory Services SAP Criteria: 1. Sample Missing Sheets (SMS) SMSs are prepared for each sample set. A SMS indicates what samples were delivered, sampling interval and delivery date.

2. Sample Condition.

Sample bottles received by laboratory staff are inspected for the following; a) Use of appropriate, permanently marked Laboratory Services provided containers; b) Integrity of Sample Containers (sealed and check for leakage); and c) Adequate Sample Volume. Any deviations from acceptable condition are noted on the SMS. Any deviations are reported to the sample collection personnel to be addressed. Any deviations that might impact analysis or reporting of results for affected samples are addressed according to fixed agency protocols, or are discussed with in the Agency and a specific response established.

3. Proper thermal preservation All samples requiring thermal preservation should arrive to the laboratory in coolers containing ice, indicating at a minimum, that the cooling process has begun. Deviations of this protocol will be noted on the appropriate SMS. Absence of ice in the coolers will be considered a deviation to this protocol and will be reported back to sample collection personnel to be addressed.

4. Proper Acid/Base Chemical Preservation The pH of the preserved sample will be checked to validate complete preservation. If preservation is not complete, additional preservation chemical will be added and the deviation noted on the SMS and corrective action will be initiated.

QA_MANUAL_1 Page 42 of 42

April 18, 2018 Board Meeting V. F. Action Itemsâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Approve Professional Services Agreement with LimnoTech for Como Lake Management Plan (Fossum)

DATE: TO: FROM: RE:

April 12, 2018 CRWD Board of Managers Bob Fossum, Program Manager 2018 Como Lake Management Plan â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Scope of Work, Budget, & Schedule

Background At the January 17, 2018 Board meeting the Managers authorized distribution of a Request for Qualifications (RFQ) for the 2018 Como Lake Management Plan. In February 2018, staff solicited and reviewed Statements of Qualifications (SOQs) from 4 firms relative to lake management plan development experience.

At the February 21, 2018 Board meeting the Managers approved the selection of LimnoTech for the 2018 Como Lake Management Plan and authorized staff to negotiate a detailed scope and budget with LimnoTech for subsequent contract approval by the Board of Managers.

Issues Staff have worked with LimnoTech staff to develop a scope of work, budget, and schedule for the 2018 Como Lake Management Plan. Staff will review the scope of work with the Managers and recommend approval.

Fiscal Note: 2018 CRWD Budget Fund 305-18427: Como Lake Management Plan-- $135,540.00.

Requested Action Approve the Como Lake Management Plan scope of work, budget, and schedule; and authorize the Administrator to execute a professional services agreement with LimnoTech for an amount not to exceed $131,860.00 and any amendments to the agreement up to $20,000. enc:

Como Lake Management Plan Scope of Work, Budget, and Schedule

W:\06 Projects\Como Lake Projects\2018 Como Lake Management Plan\Board & CAC\Brd Memo_CLMP_SOW-Budget-Sched_4-12-2018.docx

Our Mission is to protect, manage and improve the water resources of Capitol Region Watershed District

April 10, 2018 Bob Fossum Britta Belden Capitol Region Watershed District 1410 Energy Park Drive, Suite 4 St. Paul, MN 55108 RE: DRAFT Scope of Work – Como Lake Management Plan Dear Bob and Britta: LimnoTech is pleased to support Capitol Region Watershed District (CRWD) in the development of the Como Lake Management Plan (CLMP). Per your request, this letter provides a draft scope of work to engage stakeholders and develop a holistic CLMP that provides a plan for adaptive management of Como Lake. The primary goal of the CLMP is to develop in-lake and watershed strategies that will achieve water quality goals in Como Lake.

Project tasks that the LimnoTech Team will be supporting include the following: Task 1. Project Coordination & Meetings Task 2. Information Gathering, Review and Summary Task 3. Determine Purpose of Engagement, Identify Key Stakeholders and Develop Stakeholder Engagement Plan Task 4. Identify Como Lake Issues, Goals and Expectation Task 5. Develop Watershed Management Project Elements Task 6. Develop In-Lake Management Project Elements Task 7. Develop Como Lake Management Plan Additional description of the scope items for each of these tasks is provided below.

Task 1. Project Coordination & Meetings. This task will allow for coordination between LimnoTech and CRWD, as needed, to advance and meet the goals of the project. We anticipate regular communication between LimnoTech and CRWD to ensure that goals are being met, and to maintain project schedule. Project meetings with LimnoTech, CRWD, the Technical Advisory Committee (TAC), and the Board are also included as part of this task.

1.1 Project coordination & status reporting: • LimnoTech will coordinate with CRWD staff via email or telephone as needed throughout the duration of the project.

• LimnoTech will provide monthly project status updates to CRWD. 1.2 LimnoTech will participate in in-person meetings with CRWD to discuss project progress and direction.

• LimnoTech will prepare meeting materials and will share notes with CRWD within 3 days after the meeting.

DRAFT Scope of Work: Como Lake Management Plan

•

April 10, 2018

LimnoTech assumes up to one in-person meeting per month during the project duration.

1.3 LimnoTech will participate in in-person meetings with CRWD, the Board and/or the Technical Advisory Committee (TAC) to discuss project progress and direction.

• LimnoTech assumes up to four meetings during the project duration.

• LimnoTech will prepare meeting materials and will share notes with CRWD within 3 days of the meeting.

Task 2. Information Gathering, Review and Summary. LimnoTech will review readily available information that will inform the CLMP. As part of this task, LimnoTech will also review the diffusive sediment phosphorus flux calculations based on the continuous dissolved oxygen data collected by CRWD in 2017.

2.1 Obtain and review existing studies and information.

• Review previously developed reports identified in the RFQ in addition to other readily available relevant reports, literature, and/or textbooks.

• Review past lake management activities, and evaluate success (e.g. hypolimnetic aeration, biomanipulation).

• Summarize key information.

2.2 Develop draft content outline for CLMP. • Develop draft outline of the CLMP using the Crosby Lake Management Plan table of contents as a guide.

• LimnoTech assumes one iterative review and comment on the outline.

2.3 Review and confirm diffusive flux calculations based on continuous DO data • Review and confirm diffusive sediment phosphorus flux calculations based on the continuous DO data collected by CRWD in 2017. This review will seek to confirm the spatial and temporal extent of anoxic conditions in Como Lake based, which will be compared to the historical data that was assessed in Phase I of this project (i.e. the Water Quality Drivers Study – LimnoTech 2017) to confirm internal phosphorus loading estimates.

• Evaluate implications for TMDL. 2.4 Develop and update web-based story map.

• Develop a web-based story map that will be hosted on CRWD’s ArcGIS online account. LimnoTech will provide recommendations for content and layout of the web-based story map.

• The story map will be used as a communication tool to engage and inform the public on the issues in Como Lake as well as showcase adaptive management actions and progress.

• The web-based story map may include, but not limited to the following information: Como Lake history and background, public meetings, stage of the CLMP progress, final report, and emphasis on the long-term adaptive management of Como Lake to meet water quality goals. LimnoTech will develop

Page | 2

DRAFT Scope of Work: Como Lake Management Plan

•

•

April 10, 2018

content to be included in story map with review and approval through CRWD before content goes live on the internet.

The story map will include a comment portal for receiving public feedback on the project. CRWD will compile and manage the comments, which will be provided to LimnoTech for evaluation as part of Task 4.

LimnoTech assumes the following for the story map development: o CRWD staff will assist LimnoTech staff with ArcGIS account setup and access. o Initial setup to include pertinent history and background on Como Lake, current initiative with the CLMP development and emphasis on longterm, holistic and adaptive management process. o Notification of public meetings (up to three updates to story maps). o Up to four additional updates throughout the project duration. o Final update to post a link to the final CLMP, and summary of management outcomes. Updates after the CLMP project is complete will require a separate contract.

Deliverables: • Draft summary of key information that will be serve as background information in the CLMP. LimnoTech assumes one review of the draft summary by CRWD/TAC, which LimnoTech will revise, if needed, in the draft CLMP. • Content outline of the CLMP. • Email confirmation diffusive sediment P flux calculations conducted in Subtask 2.2.

• Web-based story map to be hosted on CRWD’s ArcGIS online account.

Task 3. Determine Purpose of Engagement, Identify Key Stakeholders and Develop Stakeholder Engagement Plan. In order to ensure the long-term success of the final CLMP, it is imperative that the public engagement process is grounded in a clearly articulated purpose for both this project and stakeholder involvement. This will increase the quality of the information generated through collaborative input, enhance the legitimacy of decisions made, and increase buy-in and local capacity to support chosen strategies. Once that purpose is articulated, stakeholder identification and development of an engagement plan can happen. It is expected that the engagement plan will include a mix of formal (meetings/workshops) and informal (surveys, tabling) methods. All input collected will be analyzed after each meeting, and summaries of that information will be made available to the TAC and Project Team for use in preparing for subsequent meetings and informing the CLMP process.

3.1 Determine purpose driving stakeholder engagement, and identify stakeholders and roles • With support from LimnoTech, FWS will lead CRWD (and other relevant individuals specified by CRWD) through a guided conversation to articulate the purpose for stakeholder engagement, identify stakeholders, and establish the role stakeholders will have in decision-making.

• A draft summary from this conversation, prepared by FWS, will be used to define the ‘mission statement’ for public engagement in the development of the Como Lake Management Plan.

Page | 3

DRAFT Scope of Work: Como Lake Management Plan

April 10, 2018

3.2 Develop stakeholder engagement process and draft engagement plan.

• Based on the purpose and stakeholders identified in 3.1, FWS will develop the full engagement plan that seeks to build transparency around the project and will be designed to solicit buy-in from the greater community in both the planning process and the final outcome. CRWD will review the engagement plan, and provide comments/edits for one round of revisions.

• LimnoTech and FWS will also define the structure of the public stakeholder meetings with review from CRWD. 3.3 Adaptively evaluate Scope of Work, Budget, and Schedule to confirm direction and level of effort, and amend the remaining Scope of Work and Schedule if needed.

• Following development of the engagement plan, and/or the first workshop, CRWD and the LimnoTech team will evaluate the remaining Scope of Work, Budget, and Schedule if needed.

• Adjustments could include an increase or decrease in the level of effort for remaining tasks depending upon project progress at the time of evaluation.

• Adjustments to the schedule may also be needed and will be evaluated under this subtask as well.

Deliverables: • Stakeholder engagement plan that describes the full engagement process, including identification of purpose, stakeholders, description of activities involved (communication, formal methods, informal methods, etc.), and timeline.

Task 4. Identify Como Lake Issues, Goals and Expectation. This task will utilize the stakeholder approach and engagement plan developed in Task 3 to engage with key stakeholders to identify and achieve consensus on goals and expectations for Como Lake and its watershed.

4.1 Stakeholder engagement & meetings • Specifics of the overall engagement process will be defined in Task 3 above, but is assumed to include up to three, 3-hour public workshops to engage stakeholders in the CLMP process.

• Based on the outcomes of Task 3, LimnoTech and FWS will develop agendas for up to three public workshops. LimnoTech assumes that CRWD will schedule the workshops. LimnoTech will update the story map with workshop information (i.e. date, time, location, purpose, etc), and will promote the workshops on social media as well.

• CRWD will host the workshops (either at the CRWD office, or another location which will be organized and secured by CRWD) with lead roles from LimnoTech and FWS to engagement stakeholders; however, CRWD will be the “face” of the workshops. As such, LimnoTech assumes CRWD staff will be present at the workshops including representative outreach coordinator(s) to assist with workshop facilitation and outreach.

• LimnoTech and FWS will develop invitation language for various communication channels (e.g. social media and the story map). CRWD will review and edit

Page | 4

DRAFT Scope of Work: Como Lake Management Plan

•

April 10, 2018

language prior to distribution. We assume one iterative review and revision for workshop materials.

LimnoTech assumes that other workshop materials (e.g. maps, pamphlets, etc) will be provided by CRWD. This assumption of responsibility is subject to change pending the outcomes of Subtask 3.3.

4.2 Summarize watershed & in-lake management goals & expectations • FWS will transcribe all comments from each workshop and, using qualitative research methods, analyze the transcripts to identify themes.

• LimnoTech and FWS will draft a narrative summary of the workshop outputs and analysis for each workshop. This draft will be shared with CRWD for review and comment, and will be made available to the public in advance of and at subsequent workshops. Following one iterative review and comment period with CRWD, LimnoTech and FWS will also provide a summary from all workshops that provides clear outlines of goals and priorities stakeholders would like to see in the CLMP Deliverables: • Workshop plan outlining purpose, need, outcomes, process, and schedule for up to three public workshops.

• Transcription of public comments from workshops • Sorting and coding of comments according to qualitative research methods.

• Draft narrative for distribution to workshop participants for review.

• Summary of each workshop that includes narrative reflecting feedback from stakeholders for use in developing goals and priorities in the CLMP plan.

Task 5. Develop Watershed Management Project Elements. The goal of this task will be to summarize watershed loading goals, identified projects, and programs or other strategies previously developed for watershed management. These strategies will seek to reduce nutrient loading to Como Lake with the overall goal of improving water quality. CRWD will provide a timeline for implementation and planning-level cost information to be included with the identified strategies. Watershed strategies that are identified will also consider stakeholder visions, expectations, and goals identified Task 4. Proposed subtasks include the following: 5.1 Review watershed management goals & objectives • LimnoTech will review watershed management goals and objectives that have been developed by CRWD. LimnoTech will include this information in the draft watershed implementation plan.

5.2 Review existing subwatershed loads to confirm progress towards achieving goals from existing BMPs • CRWD will develop a summary of existing subwatershed load which will be reviewed by LimnoTech. CRWD will provide load reductions achieved based on the Como Park Stormwater Inventory & Watershed Analysis (Houston 2016) and outputs from the CRWD BMP Database. LimnoTech will include this information in the draft watershed implementation plan.

Page | 5

DRAFT Scope of Work: Como Lake Management Plan

•

April 10, 2018

If needed, interim milestones will be established to track progress towards meeting subwatershed reduction goals in conjunction with ongoing and future watershed management actions and BMPs.

5.3 Document and summarize future structural & non-structural BMP strategies • Develop BMPs matrix showing potential BMP technologies and suitability for Como Lake watershed, which will be included in the final management plan. This matrix will include previous technologies, and associated costs previously evaluated by CRWD. 5.4 Draft watershed implementation plan.

• The draft plan will identify key watershed partners synthesize work conducted previously by CRWD and its partners in terms of reduction goals, describe existing subwatershed loads, and document an implementation schedule that includes a draft adaptive management approach that will be refined in Task 7.

Osgood Consulting will provide review on the draft plan to inform in-lake management.

• Stakeholder-identified strategies and goals from Task 4 will be documented in the draft plan, and incorporated into strategy development where appropriate and feasible.

• LimnoTech assumes one iterative review and comment period from CRWD and the TAC on this draft plan. Based on comments and feedback on the initial draft, LimnoTech will revise the watershed implementation plan during development of the draft CLMP in Task 7.

Deliverables: • Draft watershed implementation plan that will be finalized as a chapter in the CLMP. Task 6. Develop In-Lake Management Project Elements. The goal of Task 6 will be to define or confirm internal loading goals, identify projects, programs or other strategies for in-lake management. These strategies will seek to reduce nutrient loading to Como Lake with the overall goal of improving water quality. A timeline for implementation and planning-level cost information will be developed for identified strategies. Strategy development will consider stakeholder visions, expectations, and goals identified Task 4. LimnoTech will conduct a highlevel evaluation of all documented in-lake management strategies with more detailed evaluation for those deemed feasible and applicable to Como Lake. Strategies will be evaluated based on proven success rate to improve water quality through reductions in phosphorus concentrations and algal biomass in other systems, applicability for shallow lakes, cost-benefit analysis, and typical timeline for a positive response of implementing that strategy. Strategy development will consider stakeholder visions, expectations, and goals identified Task 4. Proposed subtasks include the following: 6.1 Evaluate In-lake Management Strategies • LimnoTech, with review and input from Osgood Consulting, will provide a highlevel evaluation of all documented in-lake management strategies. Evaluated strategies will include those suggested in the Como Lake Water Quality Drivers

Page | 6

DRAFT Scope of Work: Como Lake Management Plan

• •

•

April 10, 2018

Analysis study, among others described elsewhere (i.e peer-reviewed literature, available reports, guidance documents, and textbooks).

Document why and how some strategies may not feasible for Como Lake.

Feasibility for Como Lake will consider success of strategies applied elsewhere to similar lakes (e.g. shallow, urban), pros and cons of each strategy, general return on investment, complexity of strategy, documented longevity of strategy to reduce nutrient loading, and stakeholder input where appropriate.

Develop planning-level cost comparisons for each strategy (e.g. low, medium, high ranges).

6.2 Develop adaptive in-lake management implementation plan with prioritized strategies.

• Define the adaptive management process. Defining the process will consider the following questions: o How is an adaptive strategy determined? o What science is used to develop it? o What is the process and how is it implemented over time? o What kind of timeline does implementation cover?

• The elements evaluated above will be synthesized into a draft in-lake management plan that emphasizes a long-term, adaptive strategy.

• LimnoTech assumes one review and comment period with CRWD and the TAC. Based on comments and feedback on the initial draft, LimnoTech will revise the in-lake management implementation plan during development of the draft CLMP in Task 7.

Deliverables: • Draft in-lake management plan that will be finalized in the CLMP.

Task 7. Develop Como Lake Management Plan. The information developed in earlier tasks will be synthesized into the CLMP. For the strategies identified in Tasks 5 and 6, cost estimates and timelines for implementation will be included in the plan. The plan will include a separate section that describes the watershed implementation plan. The bulk of the plan will focus on the lake management strategies. Overall, the CLMP will be a holistic plan that integrates multiple management strategies along with an adaptive management approach, which will be required to meet water goals in Como Lake.

7.1 Develop draft plan • The draft CLMP will include background/historical info that was summarized in Task 2. The plan will generally follow the outline developed in Task 2.

• The draft CLMP will include an adaptive management process and timeline for both watershed and in-lake management work.

• Draft plans developed in Tasks 5 and 6 will be revised based on CRWD and TAC feedback on initial drafts, and finalized into the CLMP. • A draft plan will be submitted to CRWD, key partners, and/or stakeholders for comment.

• LimnoTech will present the draft CLMP to CRWD and the TAC.

Page | 7

DRAFT Scope of Work: Como Lake Management Plan

• •

April 10, 2018

LimnoTech assumes CRWD will provide support on compiling public comments on draft CRWD if needed.

LimnoTech assumes two iterative review and comment periods to ready the document for the 30-day public comment period. LimnoTech assumes that CRWD will management and compile public comments, which will be provided to LimnoTech to inform revision in Subtask 7.2.

7.2 Finalize draft plan • LimnoTech will finalize the CLMP based on review and comments from CRWD and the TAC, and stakeholders.

• LimnoTech assumes up to two iterations of review and revision to finalize the document.

7.3 Develop summary of CLMP for public distribution using common language.

• The summary document will provide a summary of the stakeholder engagement process, present management strategies, and timelines and will include imagery from the Story Map. • LimnoTech will draft the CLMP Summary document for CRWD to review and provide input. LimnoTech assumes up to two iterations of review and revision.

7.4 Present final plan to Board of Managers and other key stakeholder groups.

• LimnoTech will present the CLMP to the Board.

• LimnoTech will present the CLMP up to two additional times for other key stakeholder groups to be identified in Task 3.

Deliverables: • Draft CLMP. • Final CLMP. • Summary document for public distribution using common language.

The budget and schedule to complete the Scope of Work proposed here can be found in the attachments (“2018.04.10_CLMP_Budget_table_DRAFT_v2.xlsx” and “2018.04.10_CLMP_Schedue_Draft.xlsx”) Sincerely, LimnoTech

Hans Holmberg, P.E. Associate Vice President

Dendy Lofton, PhD Limnologist

Page | 8

2018.04.10 Timeline for Como Lake Management Plan Project Tasks 1. Project Coordination & Meetings 1.1 Project coordination & status reporting 1.2 Meetings w/ CRWD 1.3 Meetings w/ TAC and/or Board

2. Information Gathering 2.1 Obtain & review existing studies/info 2.2 Develop draft outline for CLMP 2.3 Review and confirm diffusive flux calcs 2.4 Develop and update story map

3. ID Key Stakeholders / Develop Communication Plan 3.1 Determine purpose driving stakeholder engagement, ID stakeholders 3.2 Develop stakeholder engagement process and plan 3.3 Evaluate scope, budget and schedule

4. ID Watershed & In-lake Management Goals & Actions 4.1 Stakeholder engagement & meetings 4.2 Summarize watershed & in-lake management goals & expectations

5. Develop Watershed Management Project Elements 5.1 Review watershed management goals & objectives 5.2 Review existing subwatershed loads 5.3 Document/summarize future structural & non-structural strategies 5.5 Draft watershed implementation plan

6. Develop In-Lake Management Project Elements 6.1 Evaluate in-lake management strategies 6.3 Develop adaptive in-lake management implementation plan

7. Develop Como Lake Management Plan 7.1 Develop draft plan 7.2 Finalize plan based on CRWD and TAC feedback 7.3 Develop summary document for public 7.4 Present final plan to Board of Managers

Apr-18 May-18 Jun-18

Jul-18

Aug-18 Sep-18

Oct-18 Nov-18 Dec-18

Jan-19

Feb-19 Mar-19 Apr-19 May-19

LimnoTech

DRAFT Como Lake Mgmt Plan Budget 04/10/2018 billing rates -->

Dilks

Holmberg

Lofton

Bradley

Sci/Eng 2

Sci/Eng 1

$205

$185

$145

$145

$120

$110

0

6 4 10

48 20 20 88

FWS

Osgood Consulting

Woods $150

$175

Subtotals

Yetka $105

Kader $85

Van Loh $65

Hours

Total

Labor

Expenses

Task 1. Project Coordination & Meetings 1.1 Project coordination & status reporting 1.2 In-person meetings with CRWD to discuss project progress and direction 1.3 In-person meetings with CRWD, the Board and/or the TAC Task 1 Subtotal

12

0

0

27 14

12

0

0

41

0

87 40 24 151

$ $ $ $

11,355.00 5,200.00 3,640.00 20,195.00

$

-

$

20,195.00

0

72 9 10 89 180

$ $ $ $ $

10,160.00 1,125.00 1,810.00 9,805.00 22,900.00

$

-

$

22,900.00

18

2,010.00 2,600.00 1,150.00 5,760.00

$

-

$

5,760.00

Task 2. Information Gathering, Review and Summary 2.1 Obtain and review existing studies and information.

2.2 Develop draft content outline for CLMP 2.3 Review and confirm diffusive flux calculations based on continuous DO data 2.4 Develop web-based story map.

Task 2 Subtotal

2

48 6 4 4 62

6 6

2

12

6

80 80

12

4 3

6

0

5 12

0

Task 3. Determine Purpose of Engagement, Identify Key Stakeholders and Develop Stakeholder Engagement Plan 3.1 Determine purpose driving stakeholder engagement, ID stakeholders & roles 3.2 Develop stakeholder engagement process and draft engagement plan 3.3 Adaptively evaluate SOW and Budget Task 3 Subtotal

0

0

8 8 5 21

0

4

10 12 5 27

0

3 3

28 16 44

0

6 6

52 55 107

0

2 2

2 2

2 2 8 32 44

2 8 8 18

5 5

4 4

2 2 4

2 2 4

60 60 120

0

8 8

16 12 28

0

4

4

72 40 6 12 130

16

8

2

0

509 73,805.00

6 870.00

4 0

0

0

0

4 4

0

10 52

$ $ $ $

2 9 11

82 93 175

$ $ $

8,610.00 9,465.00 18,075.00

$ 150.00

$

18,225.00

0

2 4 16 55 77

$ $ $ $ $

290.00 530.00 2,120.00 7,800.00 10,740.00

$

-

$

10,740.00

0

80 92 172

$ $ $

12,280.00 13,540.00 25,820.00

$

-

$

25,820.00

112 40

$ $ $ $ $

15,970.00 5,800.00 3,710.00 2,480.00 27,960.00

$ 300.00

$

28,260.00

$

131,410.00

$ 450.00

$

131,860.00

Task 4. Identify Como Lake Issues, Goals and Expectations 4.1 Stakeholder engagement & meetings 4.2 Summarize watershed & in-lake management goals & expectations Task 4 Subtotal

$ 150.00

Task 5. Develop Watershed Management Project Elements 5.1 Review watershed management goals & objectives 5.2 Review existing subwatershed loads to confirm progress towards achieving goals from existing BMPs 5.3 Document & Summarize future structural & non-structural BMP strategies 5.4 Draft watershed implementation plan Task 5 Subtotal

0

0

2 2

0

2 2

Task 6. Develop In-Lake Management Project Elements 6.1 Evaluate in-lake management strategies 6.2 Develop adaptive in-lake management implementation plan with prioritized strategies.

Task 6 Subtotal

6 6

Task 7. Develop Como Lake Management Plan 7.1 Develop draft plan 7.2 Finalize draft plan 7.3 Develop summary of CLMP for public distribution using common language 7.3 Present final plan to Board of Managers and other key stakeholder groups Task 7 Subtotal Total Hours Total $

4 $

16 3,280.00

4 8 29 $ 5,365.00

$

$

$

20

4

20

20

50 6,000.00

$

113 12,430.00

$

8

2

62 10,850.00

2 300.00

$

6

0 $

10 1,050.00

6 $

197 16,745.00

0 11 $ 715.00

16 198

$ 150.00 $ 150.00

1005

April 18, 2018 V. G) Action Items F) Approve Contract Amendment with Barr Engineering for Environmental Remediation Work at 595 Aldine (Kelley)

DATE: TO: FROM: RE:

April 11, 2018 Board of Managers Forrest Kelley, P.E., Regulatory Division Manager Contract Amendment with Barr Engineering for Construction Administration at 595 Aldine

Background CRWD has been contracting with Barr Engineering since September 2016 to conduct environmental site assessments for the purchase and redevelopment of the 595 Aldine and 1736 Thomas properties. Barr completed review of the previously conducted Phase I Environmental Site Assessment (ESA), created a Phase II ESA, and a Response Action Plan (RAP) that identifies the potential pollutants of concern on the site, and the precautions and procedures that will be followed during construction to ensure proper screening and handling of potentially contaminated materials.

Issues The original contract with Barr was for $33,100 to complete the Phase II ESA that identified the extent of the contamination inside and outside of the buildings. Since completion of the Phase II report, CRWD has included Barr staff as part of the team of consultants working to design CRWDâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s new office space, and the CRWD administrator has authorized four contract amendments with Barr Engineering. Those scopes of work are summarized in the table below Contract

Value

Date

Work Pre-Purchase Phase

Original

$33,100

08/30/16

595 Aldine Phase II Services

Amendment #1

$30,000

09/17/16

595 Aldine General Stormwater/Site Layout

Subtotal

$63,100 Post Purchase Design and Construction Phase

Amendment #2

$27,500

11/04/16

RAP Creation

Amendment #3

$57,825

04/24/17

Groundwater Eval, Grant Support, RAP Amendment & Design Collaboration

Amendment #4

$12,000

12/21/17

Sub Slab Vapor Mitigation Design

Amendment #5

$94,500

04/18/18

Construction Phase Support and Groundwater Monitoring

Subtotal Project Total

$191,825 $254,925

Staff are requesting Board approval for Contract Amendment #5 with Barr Engineering for the final phase of the project. This work includes construction observation during critical times to ensure potential contaminated soils are correctly handled, and that the sub-slab vapor mitigation system installed and tested per plan. The scope also includes groundwater sampling and monitoring, and creating a report that Our Mission is to protect, manage and improve the water resources of Capitol Region Watershed District.

summarizes implementation of the RAP as required by the MPCA. The CRWD New Office Budget includes $250,000 for Brownfield Engineering and Abatement. Staff will review the scope and budget with the Managers and answer any questions pertaining to the environmental work at 595 Aldine.

Action Requested Approve Contract Amendment #5 with Barr Engineering in the amount of $94,500 for RAP Implementation, Construction Observation, and Groundwater Monitoring enc:

Proposal for Amendment #5 to Phase II Investigation, 595 Aldine and 1736 Thomas from Barr Engineering, dated 4/5/18.

W:\01 Administration\Facility Management\595 Aldine\Building Program\Brownfield Work\Barr Contracts\Contract Amendment 5 Barr Phase II.docx

2

April 5, 2018 Mr. Mark Doneux Administrator Capitol Region Watershed District 1410 Energy Park Drive, Suite 4 Saint Paul, MN 55108 Re: Proposal for Amendment 5 to Phase II Investigation, 595 Aldine and 1736 Thomas: Design Support, RAP Implementation, Groundwater Monitoring, and General Support Dear Mark: Thank you for the opportunity to assist with your on-going efforts related to CRWD’s future headquarters at 595 Aldine Street and 1736 Thomas Avenue in St. Paul. This letter outlines a proposed amendment to our consultant services agreement related to supporting CRWD and the design/construction teams as the environmental requirements of the MPCA-approved RAP (including Addendum 1) are appropriately planned, implemented, and documented.

Based on our conversations with CRWD staff, we understand your desire is for a comprehensive amendment that would include the tasks that can be reasonably foreseen to bring this project to completion (rather than a more focused, shorter duration amendment). We have based the scope on Barr’s experience working on similar projects and have assumed that MPCA’s previous questions about infiltration have been addressed. We will work diligently to monitor the project progress with respect to our anticipated scope, schedule, and budget and will notify you to discuss if any changes may be warranted. The following scope is anticipated to extend through 2019, based on the current project construction schedule.

Scope and Assumptions Task 1: Design and Bid Assistance Barr will continue to support the design team with the environmental aspects of the renovation project (vapor mitigation and soil management). We will perform the following on-going tasks, portions of which have already been completed.

• • • •

Revise design and submit updated drawings per design team request (complete) Respond to design team and contractor questions prior to construction activities Coordinate with design team prior to construction to regarding MPCA and RAP requirements Participate in a pre-construction meeting

Task 2: RAP Implementation Barr will assist CRWD and the design team with the anticipated MPCA requirements during the renovation project. We will work in close communication with CRWD and the design team to be efficient in our

Barr Engineering Co. 4300 MarketPointe Drive, Suite 200, Minneapolis, MN 55435 952.832.2600 www.barr.com

Mr. Mark Doneux April 5, 2018 Page 2

oversight actions. We will attempt to only be on site when necessary in order to document the response actions for inclusion. Where possible, we will attempt to leverage CRWD’s on-site presence to reduce time that Barr staff may be needed. The tasks that we will complete to support that objective include: •

Vapor Mitigation o Provide oversight and input during pre-mitigation diagnostic testing  Assume 1-2 days in the field  Coordinate with contractor during collection of diagnostic testing data o Provide periodic oversight during installation  Assume up to 8 days in the field, up to 6 hours per day  Coordinate with contractor during construction of RAP elements o Complete post-mitigation diagnostic testing and sampling, following current MPCA requirements  Assume 2 sampling events, each including collection of 5 paired sub-slab and indoor air samples and 1 ambient air sample  Assume each event includes 1.5 days in the field  Samples will be submitted to a subcontracted laboratory for analysis of the TO-15 list of organic compounds

•

Soil Management o Coordinate with design team to ensure RAP requirements are met. o Screen soils during excavation activities.  Assume up to 8 days in the field, up to 8 hours per day  Assist with landfill profiling, as needed • Assume collection of up to 3 soil samples for landfill characterization • Parameters will be determined by landfill, but for cost estimating purposes are assumed to include TCLP VOCs and TCLP Metals. o Evaluate backfill sources, in accordance with RAP  Assume 1 day in the field  Assume collection of up to 3 soil samples for analysis of RCRA Metals, VOCs, PAHs, DRO, and GRO

•

Implementation Report o Prepare an implementation report for submittal to MPCA, which will include the following items:  General summary of response action activities  Records of soil management / disposal  MPCA-required mitigation system documentation (provided by contractor), which would be included in a Property Summary Report appendix  Record drawings of mitigation system

•

Construction Meetings o Assume participation by Barr Project Manager in up to 15 routine construction meetings.

We have budgeted for up to 3 hours per meeting. To save costs, participation could be by telephone during phases of the project when it is not critical for an onsite presence.

P:\Mpls\23 MN\62\23621193 Site Plan Assistance\ProjRiskMgmt\PM\Amendment 5\Amendment 5_rev.docx

Mr. Mark Doneux April 5, 2018 Page 3

Task 3: Groundwater Monitoring Barr will assist CRWD with monitoring the existing groundwater monitoring wells, in accordance with the RAP Addendum 1. We will perform the following tasks: •

Perform four rounds of groundwater monitoring. o Each round will include measuring groundwater levels in the monitoring wells and collecting samples for laboratory analysis of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and diesel range organics (DRO).

•

Prepare and complete a summary report for submittal to MPCA. It is assumed the monitoring results will demonstrate that infiltration is acceptable and will not result in further MPCA coordination or changes to the planned stormwater management.

Task 4: Project Support Barr is available to assist CRWD with issues that arise outside of the scope of the renovation project. An example issue that we have already worked to address is responding to MPCA concerns about on-site infiltration with respect to adjacent properties. We will track these types of tasks separately and communicate progress with CRWD with respect to scope and budget.

•

Infiltration Evaluation (underway) o Extend groundwater model to evaluate effect on adjacent property o Review offsite data o Prepare memo that summarizes modeling efforts and provides technical support for infiltration

•

General Support o Assumes 40 hours for PM and 10 hours for PIC to assist CRWD in addressing topics that could arise outside of the currently anticipated scope

Task 5: Project Management and Administration This task includes Barr time to manage and perform administrative functions of the project.

Schedule The anticipated schedule for this scope of work is presented below. As noted, we have already begun work, at CRWD’s direction, on portions of tasks 1 and 4. Because much of our work will be dependent on the contractor’s schedule, the actual timing and duration of our tasks may shift from what is presented below.

Task 1: Design and Bid Assistance The majority of this task would be completed before the environmental aspects of the renovation project begin. Based on the current contractor’s schedule, it is anticipated that construction activities will begin in April 2018. Portions of these on-going tasks have already been completed.

P:\Mpls\23 MN\62\23621193 Site Plan Assistance\ProjRiskMgmt\PM\Amendment 5\Amendment 5_rev.docx

Mr. Mark Doneux April 5, 2018 Page 4

Task 2: RAP Implementation Barr has limited influence over the construction schedule and our work will need to occur in conjuction with the contractor’s progress. Based on the contractor’s anticipated schedule, we anticipate the following general schedule: •

Vapor Mitigation – the vapor mitigation system will be installed early in the construction project.

We have budgeted for an on-site presence for 8 days. The first confirmation sampling would be completed within 30 days of system installation. Assuming that the first sampling event is in the non-heating season, a second event would be conducted during the heating season, per MPCA requirements.

•

Soil Management – expected to occur periodically throughout the project. Cost estimate is based on up to 9 days in the field (8 for excavation and 1 for borrow soil evaluation)

•

Implementation Report – to be completed within 90 days of completion of the renovation project

•

Construction Meetings – participation in up to 15 weekly construction meetings. Specific meetings for Barr to attend will be selected based on project schedule and construction team communications.

Task 3: Groundwater Monitoring Groundwater monitoring will begin following startup of the infiltration system. Based on the contractor’s schedule, it is anticipated that the first quarterly monitoring event would occur late in 2018. The summary report would be prepared within 90 days of the final sampling event, which is anticipated for late 2019.

Task 4: Project Support We have largely completed our assistance with the infiltration evaluation. The additional unanticipated tasks for which we have provided a limited budget may occur at any point during the duration of this amendment

Task 5: Project Management and Administration We will actively monitor and manage the project throughout the duration of the schedule.

Budget Estimated costs are summarized by task in the table below, including the work already completed under Tasks 1 and 4. All work covered by this scope of work will be charged on a time and materials basis and invoiced approximately every month. We will not exceed the total budget listed below without written authorization from you.

P:\Mpls\23 MN\62\23621193 Site Plan Assistance\ProjRiskMgmt\PM\Amendment 5\Amendment 5_rev.docx

Mr. Mark Doneux April 5, 2018 Page 5

Task 1 – Design and Bid Assistance a)

Design and Bid Assistance

2 – RAP Implementation

Hours

Labor + Expenses

Subcontractors

Total

110

$14,000

$0

$14,000

110

$14,000

$0

$14,000

365

$41,500

$6,500

$48,000

a)

Vapor Mitigation

130

$16,000

$5,000

$21,000

b)

Soil Management

80

$8,000

$1,500

$9,500

c)

Implementation Report

110

$11,000

$0

$11,000

d)

Construction Meetings

45

$6,500

$0

$6,500

120

$12,000

$2,000

$14,000

3 – Groundwater Monitoring a)

Quarterly Sampling

65

$7,000

$2,000

$9,000

b)

Summary Report

55

$5,000

$0

$5,000

80

$11,500

$0

$11,500

4 – Project Support a)

Infiltration Evaluation

30

$4,500

$0

$4,500

b)

General Support

50

$7,000

$0

$7,500

50

$7,000

$0

$7,000

50

$7,000

$0

$7,000

725

$86,000

$8,500

$94,500

5 – Project Management a)

Project Management

Total

Please contact Eric Lund or me if you have any questions about this amendment. We appreciate the opportunity to assist CRWD with this project.

Sincerely,

Dan Fetter, P.E. Vice President

P:\Mpls\23 MN\62\23621193 Site Plan Assistance\ProjRiskMgmt\PM\Amendment 5\Amendment 5_rev.docx

April 18, 2018 Board Meeting V. Action Item – H) Approve Professional Services for TBI Easement Project (Eleria)

DATE: TO: FROM: RE:

April 12, 2018 CRWD Board of Managers Anna Eleria, PPG Division Manager Approve Professional Services for TBI Easement Project

Background CRWD needs the assistance of an independent appraisal consultant and an acquisition agent for the documentation and acquisition of easements for the Trout Brook Storm Sewer Interceptor. The appraisal consultant will analyze approximately 50 priority parcels for its fair market value, compensation and any damage issues. The acquisition agent will represent CRWD in the discussions and negotiations of easements with the property owners.

Issues CRWD solicited statement of qualifications (SOQs) from three firms for each service area, which were recommended by the Ramsey County Attorney’s Office. The three appraisal consultants are: 1) Hosch Appraisal and Consulting, 2) Integra Realty Resources, and 3) Kelly Lindstrom. The three acquisition agents are: 1) Henning Professional Services, 2) SRF Consulting Group, and 3) WSB. CRWD and Ramsey County Attorney’s Office staff interviewed all six firms and are currently evaluating the qualifications, relevant experience, and project and cost approach of each firm. Staff will recommend a firm for each service area for the Board of Managers to approve at the April 18th meeting. We anticipate completing our evaluation and providing recommendations for the acquisition agent and appraisal consultant electronically to the Board on Monday, April 16th.

Action Requested Approve staff and legal counsel recommended consultants for TBI easement appraisal services and acquisition agent services and direct staff to prepare professional consultant services agreement including a scope of work and budget with each firm.

W:\06 Projects\Trout Brook Interceptor\Easements\Ramsey County Project 2014-2016\Board Memo\BM TBI Easement Professional Services 04-18-18.docx

Our Mission is to protect, manage and improve the water resources of Capitol Region Watershed District.